Mentor MP User Guide PDF

User Guide
Mentor MP
High performance DC drive
25A to 7400A, 480V to 690V
Two or four quadrant operation
Part Number: 0476-0000-05

Issue: 5
www.controltechniques.com
General Information
The manufacturer accepts no liability for any consequences resulting from inappropriate, negligent or incorrect installation
or adjustment of the optional operating parameters of the equipment or from mismatching the variable speed drive with the
motor.
The contents of this guide are believed to be correct at the time of printing. In the interests of a commitment to a policy of
continuous development and improvement, the manufacturer reserves the right to change the specification of the product
or its performance, or the contents of the guide, without notice.
All rights reserved. No parts of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electrical or
mechanical including photocopying, recording or by an information storage or retrieval system, without permission in writing
from the publisher.
Drive firmware version
This product is supplied with the latest software versions. If this drive is to be connected to an existing system or machine,
all drive software versions should be verified to confirm the same functionality as drives of the same model already present.
This may also apply to drives returned from a Control Techniques Service Centre or Repair Centre. If there is any doubt
please contact the supplier of the product.
This drive contains two software versions which can be checked by looking at Pr 11.29 (di14/0.49) and Pr 11.34. This takes
the form of xx.yy.zz where Pr 11.29 (di14/0.49) displays xx.yy and Pr 11.34 displays zz for the user software. Power
software is displayed at Pr 11.56 and takes the form of xx.yy. (e.g. for software version 01.06.00, Pr 11.29 (di14/0.49) =
1.06 and Pr 11.34 displays 0 which is compatible with power software version 01.09, Pr 11.56 = 1.09).
Environmental statement
Control Techniques is committed to minimising the environmental impacts of its manufacturing operations and of its
products throughout their life cycle. To this end, we operate an Environmental Management System (EMS) which is
certified to the International Standard ISO 14001. Further information on the EMS, our Environmental Policy and other
relevant information is available on request, or can be found at www.greendrives.com.
The electronic variable-speed drives manufactured by Control Techniques have the potential to save energy and (through
increased machine/process efficiency) reduce raw material consumption and scrap throughout their long working lifetime.
In typical applications, these positive environmental effects far outweigh the negative impacts of product manufacture and
end-of-life disposal.
Nevertheless, when the products eventually reach the end of their useful life, they must not be discarded but should instead
be recycled by a specialist recycler of electronic equipment. Recyclers will find the products easy to dismantle into their
major component parts for efficient recycling. Many parts snap together and can be separated without the use of tools, while
other parts are secured with conventional fasteners. Virtually all parts of the product are suitable for recycling.
Product packaging is of good quality and can be re-used. Large products are packed in wooden crates, while smaller
products come in strong cardboard cartons which themselves have a high recycled fibre content. If not re-used, these
containers can be recycled. Polythene, used on the protective film and bags for wrapping product, can be recycled in the
same way. Control Techniques' packaging strategy prefers easily-recyclable materials of low environmental impact, and
regular reviews identify opportunities for improvement. When preparing to recycle or dispose of any product or packaging,
please observe local legislation and best practice.
REACH legislation
EC Regulation 1907/2006 on the Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and restriction of Chemicals (REACH) requires the
supplier of an article to inform the recipient if it contains more than a specified proportion of any substance which is
considered by the European Chemicals Agency (ECHA) to be a Substance of Very High Concern (SVHC) and is therefore
listed by them as a candidate for compulsory authorisation.
For current information on how this requirement applies in relation to specific Control Techniques products, please
approach your usual contact in the first instance. Control Techniques position statement can be viewed at:
http://www.controltechniques.com/REACH
Copyright © October 2011 Control Techniques Ltd
Issue Number: 5
Firmware versions:
User: 01.06.00 onwards
Power: 01.09.00 onwards
Contents
1 Safety Information .................................5 5 Getting started .....................................59
1.1 Warnings, Cautions and Notes .............................5 5.1 Understanding the display ..................................59
1.2 Electrical safety - general warning ........................5 5.2 Keypad operation ................................................59
1.3 System design and safety of personnel ................5 5.3 Menu 0 (sub block) .............................................61
1.4 Environmental limits ..............................................5 5.4 Pre-defined sub blocks .......................................62
1.5 Access ..................................................................5 5.5 Menu 0 (linear) ....................................................63
1.6 Fire protection .......................................................5 5.6 Menu structure ....................................................63
1.7 Compliance with regulations .................................5 5.7 Advanced menus ................................................64
1.8 Motor .....................................................................5 5.8 Saving parameters ..............................................64
1.9 Mechanical brake control ......................................5 5.9 Restoring parameter defaults ..............................64
1.10 Adjusting parameters ............................................5 5.10 Differences between European and USA
1.11 Electrical installation .............................................5 defaults ...............................................................65
5.11 Displaying parameters with non-default values
2 Product information ..............................6 only .....................................................................65
2.1 Current ratings ......................................................6 5.12 Displaying destination parameters only ..............65
2.2 Model number .......................................................7 5.13 Parameter access level and security ..................65
2.3 Compatible encoders ............................................8 5.14 Serial communications ........................................66
2.4 Nameplate description ..........................................8
2.5 Drive features and options ....................................9 6 Basic parameters ................................67
2.6 Items supplied with the drive ...............................12 6.1 Full descriptions ..................................................68
3 Mechanical Installation .......................13 7 Running the motor ..............................76

3.1 Safety ..................................................................13 7.1 Quick start commissioning / start-up (from
3.2 Planning the installation ......................................13 European defaults) ..............................................77
3.3 Terminal cover removal ......................................14 7.2 Quick start commissioning / start-up
3.4 Mounting method ................................................17 (from USA defaults) ............................................79
3.5 Installing and removing the terminal shrouds .....25 7.3 CTSoft software commissioning / start-up tool ....80
3.6 Enclosure ............................................................27 7.4 Setting up a feedback device ..............................81
3.7 Heatsink fan operation ........................................28
3.8 IP rating (Ingress Protection) ..............................28 8 Optimization .........................................82
3.9 Electrical terminals ..............................................29 8.1 Armature current .................................................82
3.10 Routine maintenance ..........................................32 8.2 Speed feedback ..................................................82
8.3 Field current ........................................................82
4 Electrical installation ..........................33 8.4 Current loop gains self-tuning .............................82
4.1 Electrical connections .........................................34 8.5 Speed loop gains tuning .....................................83
4.2 Ground connections ............................................36 8.6 Current limit tapers ..............................................84
4.3 AC supply requirements ......................................37
4.4 Line reactors .......................................................38 9 SMARTCARD operation ......................85
4.5 Control 24 Vdc supply .........................................38 9.1 Introduction .........................................................85
4.6 Cable and fuse size ratings .................................39 9.2 Easy saving and reading .....................................85
4.7 External suppressor resistor ...............................47 9.3 Transferring data .................................................85
4.8 Ground leakage ..................................................49 9.4 Data block header information ............................87
4.9 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) ..................49 9.5 SMARTCARD parameters ..................................87
4.10 Serial communications connections ....................51 9.6 SMARTCARD trips .............................................88
4.11 Shield connections ..............................................52
4.12 Connecting the fan on size 2C and 2D drives .....52 10 Onboard PLC .......................................90
4.13 Control connections ............................................53 10.1 Onboard PLC and SYPT Lite ..............................90
4.14 General ...............................................................54 10.2 Benefits ...............................................................90
4.15 Connecting an encoder .......................................57 10.3 Limitations ...........................................................90
10.4 Getting started ....................................................91
10.5 Onboard PLC parameters ...................................91
10.6 Onboard PLC trips ..............................................92
10.7 Onboard PLC and the SMARTCARD .................92
Mentor MP User Guide 3

Issue : 5 www.controltechniques.com
11 Advanced parameters .........................93
11.1 Menu 1: Speed reference ....................................98
11.2 Menu 2: Ramps .................................................102
11.3 Menu 3: Speed feedback and speed control .....105
11.4 Menu 4: Torque and current control ..................107
11.5 Menu 5: Motor and field control .........................112
11.6 Menu 6: Sequencer and clock ...........................117
11.7 Menu 7: Analog I/O ...........................................119
11.8 Menu 8: Digital I/O ............................................121
11.9 Menu 9: Programmable logic, motorized
pot and binary sum ............................................125
11.10 Menu 10: Status and trips .................................128
11.11 Menu 11: General drive set-up ..........................129
11.12 Menu 12: Threshold detectors, variable
selectors and brake control function .................130
11.13 Menu 13: Position control ..................................136
11.14 Menu 14: User PID controller ............................140
11.15 Menus 15, 16 and 17: Solutions Module slots ..143
11.16 Menu 18: Application menu 1 ............................144
11.19 Menu 21: Second motor parameters .................145
11.20 Menu 22: Additional Menu 0 set-up ..................145
11.21 Menu 23: Header selections .............................145
12 Technical data ....................................146

12.1 Drive technical data ...........................................146
12.2 Cable and fuse size ratings ...............................152
12.3 Optional external EMC filters ............................176
13 Diagnostics ........................................177
13.1 Trip indications ..................................................177
13.2 Trip categories ..................................................184
13.3 Alarm indications ...............................................185
13.4 Status indications ..............................................185
13.5 Displaying the trip history ..................................185
13.6 Behavior of the drive when tripped ....................185
13.7 Trip masking ......................................................185
14 UL information ...................................186
14.1 Common UL Information ...................................186
14.2 AC supply specification .....................................186
14.3 Maximum ratings ...............................................186
14.4 Parallel operation ..............................................186
14.5 Safety label .......................................................186
14.6 UL Listed accessories .......................................186
4 Mentor MP User Guide

www.controltechniques.com Issue: 5
Safety Product Mechanical Electrical Getting Basic Running the SMARTCARD Onboard Advanced Technical UL
Optimization Diagnostics
Information information Installation installation started parameters motor operation PLC parameters data information
1 Safety Information 1.6 Fire protection

The drive enclosure is not classified as a fire enclosure. A separate fire
1.1 Warnings, Cautions and Notes enclosure must be provided. For further information, refer to section
3.2.5 Electromagnetic compatibility on page 13.
A Warning contains information which is essential for 1.7 Compliance with regulations
avoiding a safety hazard. The installer is responsible for complying with all relevant regulations,
WARNING such as national wiring regulations, accident prevention regulations and
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) regulations. Particular attention
must be given to the cross-sectional areas of conductors, the selection
A Caution contains information which is necessary for of fuses and other protection, and protective ground (earth) connections.
avoiding a risk of damage to the product or other equipment. This User Guide contains instructions for achieving compliance with
CAUTION specific EMC standards.
Within the European Union, all machinery in which this product is used
NOTE must comply with the following directives:
A Note contains information which helps to ensure correct operation of 2006/42/EC: Safety of machinery
the product. 2004/108/EC: Electromagnetic compatibility
1.2 Electrical safety - general warning 1.8 Motor

The voltages used in the drive can cause severe electrical shock and/or Ensure the motor is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
burns, and could be lethal. Extreme care is necessary at all times when recommendations. Ensure the motor shaft is not exposed.
working with or adjacent to the drive.
Low speeds may cause the motor to overheat because the cooling fan
Specific warnings are given at the relevant places in this Guide. becomes less effective. The motor should be installed with a protection
thermistor. If necessary, an electric forced ventilation fan should be
1.3 System design and safety of used.
personnel The values of the motor parameters set in the drive affect the protection
of the motor. The default values in the drive should not be relied upon.
The drive is intended as a component for professional incorporation into
complete equipment or system. If installed incorrectly, the drive may It is essential that the correct value is entered into Pr 5.07 (SE07, 0.28),
present a safety hazard. Motor rated current. This affects the thermal protection of the motor.
The drive uses high voltages and currents, carries a high level of stored 1.9 Mechanical brake control
electrical energy, and is used to control equipment which can cause The brake control functions are provided to allow well co-ordinated
injury. operation of an external brake with the drive. While both hardware and
System design, installation, commissioning / start-up and maintenance software are designed to high standards of quality and robustness, they
must be carried out by personnel who have the necessary training and are not intended for use as safety functions, i.e. where a fault or failure
experience. They must read this safety information and this guide would result in a risk of injury. In any application where the incorrect
carefully. operation of the brake release mechanism could result in injury,
The STOP and START controls or electrical inputs of the drive must independent protection devices of proven integrity must also be
not be relied upon to ensure safety of personnel. They do not incorporated.
isolate dangerous voltages from the output of the drive or from any
external option unit. The supply must be disconnected by an 1.10 Adjusting parameters
approved electrical isolation device before gaining access to the Some parameters have a profound effect on the operation of the drive.
electrical connections. They must not be altered without careful consideration of the impact on
The drive is not intended to be used for safety-related functions. the controlled system. Measures must be taken to prevent unwanted
Careful consideration must be given to the function of the drive which changes due to error or tampering.
might result in a hazard, either through its intended behaviour or through
incorrect operation due to a fault. In any application where a malfunction 1.11 Electrical installation
of the drive or its control system could lead to or allow damage, loss or
1.11.1 Electric shock risk
injury, a risk analysis must be carried out, and where necessary, further
The voltages present in the following locations can cause severe electric
measures taken to reduce the risk - for example, an over-speed
shock and may be lethal:
protection device in case of failure of the speed control, or a fail-safe
mechanical brake in case of loss of motor braking. • AC supply cables and connections
• Output cables and connections
• Many internal parts of the drive, and external option units
1.4 Environmental limits Unless otherwise indicated, control terminals are single insulated and
Instructions within the supplied data and information within this User must not be touched.
Guide regarding transport, storage, installation and the use of the drive
must be complied with, including the specified environmental limits. 1.11.2 Stored charge
Drives must not be subjected to excessive physical force. The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a potentially lethal
voltage after the AC supply has been disconnected. If the drive has been
1.5 Access energized, the AC supply must be isolated at least ten minutes before
work may continue.
Access must be restricted to authorized personnel only. Safety
regulations which apply at the place of use must be complied with.

Issue: 5 www.controltechniques.com
2 Product information Table 2-3 575 V current ratings

AC input Typical motor
DC output current
Table 2-1 Model to frame size cross reference current power
Model Model 150 % (With Vdc =
Continuous Continuous 630 V)
overload
480 V 575 V Frame
690 V A A A kW hp
EN/IEC EN/IEC
EN/IEC
cULus cULus to 600 V MP25A5(R) 22 25 37.5 14 18
MP25A4(R) MP25A5(R) MP45A5(R) 40 45 67.5 25 33
MP45A4(R) MP45A5(R) 1A MP75A5(R) 67 75 112.5 42 56
MP75A4(R) MP75A5(R) MP105A5(R) 94 105 157.5 58 78
MP105A4(R) MP105A5(R) MP155A5(R) 139 155 232.5 88 115
MP155A4(R) MP155A5(R) 1B MP210A5(R) 188 210 315 120 160
MP210A4(R) MP210A5(R) MP350A5(R) 295 350 525 195 260
MP350A4(R) MP350A5(R) MP350A6(R) MP470A5(R) 395 470* 705 265 355
MP700A5(R) 585 700 1050 395 530
MP420A4(R)
2A MP825A5(R) 665 825* 1237.5 465 620
MP470A5(R) MP470A6(R)
MP1200A5(R) 1050 1200 1800 680 910
MP550A4(R)
MP1850A5(R) 1570 1850 2775 1045 1400
MP700A4(R) MP700A5(R) MP700A6(R)
MP825A4(R) MP825A5(R) MP825A6(R) 2B * For this rating at 575 V, 150 % overload time is 20 s at 40 °C and 30s at
35 °C.
MP900A4(R)
MP1200A4 MP1200A5 MP1200A6 Table 2-4 690 V current ratings
2C
MP1850A4 MP1850A5 MP1850A6 AC input
DC output Current Typical motor
MP1200A4R MP1200A5R MP1200A6R current
2D power (With
MP1850A4R MP1850A5R MP1850A6R Model 150 % Vdc = 760 V)
Continuous Continuous
Overload
A A A kW hp
2.1 Current ratings
MP350A6(R) 295 350 525 240 320
The power ratings for the 480 V, 575 V and 690 V configurations are
MP470A6(R) 395 470* 705 320 425
shown in Table 2-2, Table 2-3 and Table 2-4.
MP700A6(R) 585 700 1050 480 640
The continuous current ratings given are for a maximum ambient
MP825A6(R) 665 825* 1237.5 650 850
temperature of 40 °C (104 °F) and an altitude of 1000 m. For operation
MP1200A6(R) 1050 1200 1800 850 1150
at higher temperatures and altitudes de-rating is required.
MP1850A6(R) 1570 1850 2775 1300 1750
For further information see Chapter 12 Technical data on page 146.
* For this rating at 690 V, 150 % overload time is 20 s at 40 °C and 30 s
Table 2-2 480 V current ratings at 35 °C.
AC input Typical motor Maximum continuous input current
DC output current
current power
The values of maximum continuous input current are given to aid the
Model 150 % @ 400 @ 500 selection of cables and fuses. These values are stated for worst-case
Continuous Continuous
overload Vdc Vdc condition.
A A A kW hp NOTE
MP25A4(R) 22 25 37.5 9 15 For current ratings above 1850 A then parallel connection of the drives is
MP45A4(R) 40 45 67.5 15 27 required. However, this function is not implemented on firmware
MP75A4(R) 67 75 112.5 27 45 versions V01.05.02 and earlier.
MP105A4(R) 94 105 157.5 37.5 60
MP155A4(R) 139 155 232.5 56 90
MP210A4(R) 188 210 315 75 125
MP350A4(R) 295 350 525 125 200
MP420A4(R) 350 420 630 150 250
MP550A4(R) 450 550 825 200 300
MP700A4(R) 585 700 1050 250 400
MP825A4(R) 665 825 1237.5 300 500
MP900A4(R) 725 900 1350 340 550
MP1200A4(R) 1050 1200 1800 450 750
MP1850A4(R) 1570 1850 2775 700 1150

2.1.1 Typical short-term overload limits

The maximum percentage overload limit changes depending on the selected motor.
Variations in motor rated current will result in changes in the maximum possible overload as detailed in the Mentor MP Advanced User Guide.
Figure 2-1 can be used to determine the maximum overload duration available for overloads between 100 % and 150 %. For example the maximum
overload available for a period of 60 seconds is 124 %.
Figure 2-1 Maximum overload duration available
160
155
150
145
overload
(%) 140
135
130
125
120
115
110
105
100
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
200
110
overload duration (seconds)
NOTE
Overload of 150 % for 30 s is available up to a maximum of 10 repetitions per hour.
2.2 Model number

The way in which the model numbers for the Mentor MP range are formed is described in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2 Model number
MP 1 2 0 0 A 4 R
Mentor product line

MP : Mentor Platform
Continuous armature current rating (A)
Voltage rating
4 = 480 V 24 V to 480 V -20 % +10 %
5 = 575 V 500 V to 575 V -10 % +10 %
6 = 690 V 500 V to 690 V -10 % +10 %
R - 4 quadrant operation
Blank - 2 quadrant operation

2.3 Compatible encoders

Table 2-5 Encoders compatible with Mentor MP
Pr 3.38
Encoder type (Fb07, 0.77)
setting
Quadrature incremental encoders with or without
Ab (0)
marker pulse
Frequency and direction incremental encoders with
Fd (1)
or without marker pulse
Forward / reverse incremental encoders with or
Fr (2)
without marker pulse
2.4 Nameplate description

Figure 2-3 Typical drive rating label
Rating
Model Customer and
date code
Auxiliary input voltage/
frequency/current
Field output
voltage current
Line input voltage/
frequency/current
Armature output voltage/ Approvals
current/overload
Serial number
IP Rating
Key to approvals
R
UL approval Worldwide
CE approval Europe
C Tick approval Australia
RoHS compliant Europe
2.4.1 Output current

The continuous output current ratings given on the rating label are for maximum 40 °C (104 °F) and 1000 m altitude. Derating is required for higher
ambient temperatures >40 °C (104 °F) and higher altitude. For derating information, refer to section 12.1.12 Altitude on page 151.
2.4.2 Input current
The input current is affected by the supply voltage, frequency and load inductance. The input current given on the rating label is the typical input
current.

2.5 Drive features and options

Figure 2-4 Drive features and options on size 1
SM-Keypad /
MP-Keypad
Identification
AC terminals
marker rail
Keypad
connection
Parame
rEAd
Pro g
+
ter -
+
Pr0.30
Aut o
boo t
+
+
SMARTCARD*
Slot 1
Machine
Solutions Modules
feedback
terminals Slot 2
Slot 3
DC Feedback Automation Fieldbus

terminals
Serial port connector
Control terminals
FXMP25 connection CT Comms cable
Field fuses
FXMP25
Auxiliary connections Mode /Reset

STORED CHARGE
10 min
and field
FXMP25 Field regulator
Figure 2-5 Drive features and options for size 2

Identification
marker rail
SM-Keypad /
MP-Keypad
AC terminals
Keypad connection
Param
rEAd
Prog
eter
+
- Pr0
+
Auto
.30
boot
+
+
SMARTCARD*
Slot 1
Slot 2 Solutions Modules
Slot 3
Feedback Automation Fieldbus
Serial port connector

Paralleling port
Control terminals
CT Comms cable
FXMP25 connection
Field fuses
FXMP25
Auxiliary connections M
Mode /Reset
and field STO RED C HARGE

10 m in
Machine
feedback
Internal terminals
fans
FXMP25 Field regulator
DC
terminals
* A SMARTCARD is provided as standard. For further information, refer to Chapter 9 SMARTCARD operation on page 85.

2.5.1 Options available for Mentor MP

All Solutions Modules are color-coded in order to make identification easy. The following table shows the color-code key and gives further details on
their function.
Table 2-6 Solutions Module identification
Type Solutions Module Color Name Further Details
Universal Feedback interface
Feedback interface for the following devices:
Inputs Outputs
SM-Universal
Light Green • Incremental encoders • Quadrature
Encoder Plus • SinCos encoders • Frequency and direction
• SSI encoders • SSI simulated outputs
• EnDat encoders
Incremental encoder interface
Feedback interface for incremental encoders without
Brown SM-Encoder Plus
commutation signals.
No simulated encoder outputs available
Feedback Incremental encoder interface
Feedback interface for incremental encoders without
SM-Encoder Output
Dark Brown commutation signals.
Plus
Simulated encoder output for quadrature, frequency and
direction signals
Drive encoder input converter
15-way D-type
N/A Provides screw terminal interface for encoder wiring and spade
converter
terminal for shield
Single ended encoder interface
Single ended
Provides an interface for single ended ABZ encoder signals,
N/A encoder interface
such as those from hall effect sensors. 15 V and 24 V versions
(15 V or 24 V)
are available.
Extended I/O interface
Increases the I/O capability by adding the following to the
existing I/O in the drive:
Yellow SM-I/O Plus
• Digital inputs x 3 • Analog output (voltage) x 1
• Digital I/O x 3 • Relay x 2
• Analog inputs (voltage) x 2
Extended I/O interface
Increase the I/O capability by adding the following to the
Yellow SM-I/O 32 existing I/O in the drive:
• High speed digital I/O x 32
• +24 V output
Additional I/O
1 x Analog input (± 10 V bi-polar or current modes)
Dark Yellow SM-I/O Lite
1 x Analog output (0 to 10 V or current modes)
3 x Digital input and 1 x Relay
Automation
(I/O Additional I/O with real time clock
Expansion) Dark Red SM-I/O Timer As per SM-I/O Lite but with the addition of a Real Time Clock
for scheduling drive running
Isolated I/O to NAMUR NE37 specifications

For chemical industry applications
Turquoise SM-I/O PELV 1 x Analog input (current modes)
2 x Analog outputs (current modes)
4 x Digital input / outputs, 1 x Digital input, 2 x Relay outputs
Additional I/O conforming to IEC 61131-2 120 Vac

Olive SM-I/O 120V
6 digital inputs and 2 relay outputs rated for 120 Vac operation
Additional I/O with overvoltage protection up to 48 V

SM-I/O 24V
Cobalt Blue 2 x Analog outputs (current modes)
Protected
4 x Digital input / outputs, 3 x Digital inputs, 2 x Relay outputs

Table 2-6 Solutions Module identification

Type Solutions Module Color Name Further Details
Applications Processor (with CTNet)
Moss Green
SM-Applications 2nd processor for running pre-defined and /or customer created
Plus application software with CTNet support. Enhanced
performance over SM-Applications
Applications Processor
Automation SM-Applications Lite 2nd processor for running pre-defined and /or customer created
(Applications) White
V2 application software. Enhanced performance over SM-
Applications Lite
Applications Processor
Golden brown SM-Register 2nd processor for running position capture functionality with
CTNet support.
SM-PROFIBUS DP- Profibus option

Purple
V1 PROFIBUS DP adapter for communications with the drive
DeviceNet option
Medium Grey SM-DeviceNet
Devicenet adapter for communications with the drive
Interbus option
Dark Grey SM-INTERBUS
Interbus adapter for communications with the drive
Fieldbus
CANopen option
Light Grey SM-CANopen
CANopen adapter for communications with the drive
Ethernet option
10 base-T / 100 base-T; Supports web pages, SMTP mail and
Beige SM-Ethernet
multiple protocols: DHCP IP addressing; Standard RJ45
connection
EtherCAT option
Brown Red SM-EtherCAT
EtherCAT adapter for communications with the drive
Table 2-7 Keypad identification

Keypad Name Further Details
LED keypad option

SM-Keypad
Keypad with a LED display
LCD keypad option

MP-Keypad
Keypad with an alpha-numeric LCD display with Help function
Table 2-8 Serial comms lead

Serial comms lead Name Further Details
CT EIA (RS) -232 (4500-0087)
CT Comms cable
CT USB (4500-0096)
Table 2-9 External field control

External field controller Name Further Details
FXMP25
M
Mode /Reset
STORED CHARGE
For external control of field windings up to 25 A, with field reversal capability. For further
FXMP25
10 min
information, please see the FXMP25 User Guide.

2.6 Items supplied with the drive

The drive is supplied with a printed manual, a SMARTCARD, a safety information booklet, an accessory kit box including the items shown in Table 2-
10, and a CD ROM containing all related product documentation and software tools.
Table 2-10 Parts supplied with the drive
Description Size 1 Size 2A / 2B Size 2C / 2D
Control connectors
Tacho connector
Relay connectors
CAUTION
UL warning label Risk of Electric Shock
Power down unit 10minutes
before removing cover
UL warning label for

heatsink temperature
Grounding bracket
Terminal cover grommets
Terminal shrouds
Terminal shroud base

covers
M4 Screws
Mounting feet bracket

3 Mechanical Installation 3.2 Planning the installation

The following considerations must be made when planning the
3.1 Safety installation:
Follow the instructions 3.2.1 Access

Access must be restricted to personnel only. Safety regulations which
The mechanical and electrical installation instructions must
apply at the place of use must be complied with.
be adhered to. Any questions or doubt should be referred to
WARNING the supplier of the equipment. It is the responsibility of the 3.2.2 Environmental protection
owner or user to ensure that the installation of the drive and The drive must be protected from:
any external option unit, and the way in which they are • moisture, including dripping water or spraying water and
operated and maintained, comply with the requirements of condensation. An anti-condensation heater may be required, which
the Health and Safety at Work Act in the United Kingdom or must be switched off when the drive is running
applicable legislation and regulations and codes of practice • contamination with electrically conductive material
in the country in which the equipment is used. • contamination with any form of dust which may restrict the fan, or
impair airflow over various components
Competence of the installer • temperature beyond the specified operating and storage ranges
The drive must be installed by professional assemblers who • corrosive gasses
are familiar with the requirements for safety and EMC. The 3.2.3 Cooling
WARNING assembler is responsible for ensuring that the end product or The heat produced by the drive must be removed without its specified
system complies with all the relevant laws in the country operating temperature being exceeded. Note that a sealed enclosure
where it is to be used. gives much reduced cooling compared with a ventilated one, and may
need to be larger and/or use internal air circulating fans.
If the drive has been used at high load levels for a period of
For further information, refer to section 3.6.2 Enclosure sizing on
time, the heatsink can reach temperatures in excess of
page 27.
70 °C (158 °F). Human contact with the heatsink should be
WARNING
prevented. 3.2.4 Electrical safety
The installation must be safe under normal and fault conditions.
Enclosure Electrical installation instructions are given in Chapter 4 Electrical
installation on page 33.
The drive is intended to be mounted in an enclosure which
prevents access except by trained and authorized 3.2.5 Electromagnetic compatibility
personnel, and which prevents the ingress of contamination. If it is necessary to meet strict emission limits, or if it is known that
WARNING
It is designed for use in an environment classified as electromagnetically sensitive equipment is located nearby, then full
pollution degree 2 in accordance with IEC 60664-1. This precautions must be observed. The use of an external EMC filter may be
means that only dry, non-conducting contamination is required at the drive inputs, which must be located very close to the
acceptable. drives.
Space must be made available for the filters and allowance made for
The drive enclosure is not classified as a fire enclosure. A carefully segregated wiring. Both levels of precautions are covered in
separate fire enclosure must be provided. For further Table 12-44 Immunity compliance on page 175.
information, refer to section 3.2.5 Electromagnetic
compatibility on page 13.
3.2.6 Hazardous areas
WARNING The drive must not be located in a classified hazardous area unless it is
installed in an approved enclosure and the installation is certified.
Many of the drives in this product range weigh in excess of
15 kg (33 lb). Use appropriate safeguards when lifting these
3.2.7 Fire protection
The drive enclosure is not classified as a fire enclosure. A separate fire
models.
enclosure must be provided.
WARNING
See section 3.4 Mounting method on page 17.
For installation in the USA, a NEMA 12 enclosure is suitable.
IP rating For installation outside the USA, the following (based on IEC 62109-1,
It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that any enclosure standard for PV inverters) is recommended.
which allows access to drives from model sizes 2A to 2D Enclosure can be metal and/or polymeric, polymer must meet
while the product is energized, provides protection against requirements which can be summarized for larger enclosures as using
WARNING
contact and ingress to the requirements of IP20. Refer to materials meeting at least UL 94 class 5VB at the point of minimum
section 12-8 IP rating on page 151. thickness.
Air filter assemblies to be at least class V-2.
The location and size of the bottom shall cover the area shown in Figure
3-1 overleaf.

Any part of the side which is within the area traced out by the 5° angle is This means that openings for cables etc. must be sealed with materials
also considered to be part of the bottom of the fire enclosure. meeting the 5VB requirement, or else have a baffle above. See Figure 3-
Figure 3-1 Fire enclosure bottom layout 2 for acceptable baffle construction. This does not apply for mounting in
an enclosed electrical operating area (restricted access) with concrete
floor.
Figure 3-2 Fire enclosure baffle construction
Not less
than 2
times ‘X’ Baffle plates (may be above or
Drive
N o t le s s
th a n 2 X B a f f le p la t e s ( m a y b e
below bottom of enclosure)

a b o v e o r b e lo w b o t t o m
o f e n c lo s u r e )
X
X
B o t t o m o f f ir e
Bottom of fire enclosure

e n c lo s u r e
3.3 Terminal cover removal

Isolation device
o
The AC supply must be disconnected from the drive using an
5 approved isolation device before any cover is removed from
WARNING
the drive or before any servicing work is performed.
o
5 Stored charge
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a
potentially lethal voltage after the AC supply has been
disconnected. If the drive has been energized, the AC
The bottom, including the part of the side considered to be part of the
WARNING supply must be isolated at least ten minutes before work
bottom, must be designed to prevent escape of burning material - either may continue.
by having no openings or by having a baffle construction.
3.3.1 Removing the terminal covers

The drive is installed with one control terminal cover.
Figure 3-3 Removing the control terminal cover (size 1 shown)
Pozi Pz2
To remove the terminal cover, undo the screw and slide the terminal cover downwards.
When replacing the terminal covers the screw should be tightened with a maximum torque of 1 N m (0.7 Ib ft).

3.3.2 Removing the finger-guard and break-outs Place finger-guard on a flat solid surface and hit relevant break-outs with
Figure 3-4 Removing the finger-guard break-outs hammer as shown (1). Continue until all required break-outs are removed
(2). Remove any flash / sharp edges once the break-outs are removed.
3.3.3 Installation and removal of a Solutions Module
Please power down the drive before removing / installing the

Solutions Module. Failure to do so may cause damage to
product
CAUTION
1 2
All sizes
Figure 3-5 Installation and removal of the Solutions Module
B
A
Solutions Module
in slot 1
Solutions Module
in slot 2
Solutions Module
in slot 3
3. The drive has the facility for all three Solutions Module slots to be
1. To install the Solutions Module, press down in the direction shown
used at the same time, as illustrated.
above until it clicks into place.
NOTE
2. To remove the Solutions Module, press inwards at the points shown
(A) and pull in the direction shown (B). It is recommended that the Solutions Module slots are used in the
following order: slot 3, slot 2 and slot 1.

Be aware of possible live terminals when installing the

keypad.
WARNING
Figure 3-6 Removal and installation of a keypad
A
B
To fit, align the MP-Keypad and press gently in the direction shown until
it clicks into position (A).
To remove, while pressing the tabs inwards (B), gently lift the MP-
Keypad in the direction indicated (C).
NOTE
The keypad can be installed / removed while the drive is powered up and
running a motor, providing that the drive is not operating in keypad
mode.

3.4 Mounting method

The Mentor MP can only be surface mounted.
If the drive has been used at high load levels for a period of
time, the heatsink can reach temperatures in excess of 70 °C
(158 °F). Human contact with the heatsink should be
WARNING
prevented.
Many of the drives in this product range weigh in excess of 15

kg (33lb). Use appropriate safeguards when lifting these
models.
WARNING
Figure 3-7 Overall size 1A dimensions

1
293mm (11.54in)
250mm (9.84in)
222mm (8.74in) 170mm (6.69in)
4 holes to
suit M6
6.5mm (0.26in)
1
MA1
MA2
444mm 380mm
(17.48in) (14.96in)
1
22mm
(0.87in)
1
40mm
(1.58in)
250mm (9.84in)
222mm
(8.74in)
95mm
(3.74in)
1. The two outer holes must be used for mounting the Mentor MP.
NOTE
With the SMARTCARD installed to the drive, the depth measurement
increases by 7.6 mm (0.30 in).
NOTE
Fans are only installed to the MP75A4(R) and MP75A5(R).

Figure 3-8 Overall size 1B dimensions

1
1
293mm (11.54in)
250mm (9.84in)
170mm (6.69in)
4 holes to
suit M6
6.5mm (0.26in)
1
MA1
MA2
444mm
(17.48in) 380mm
(14.96in)
1
22mm
1 (0.87in)
40mm
(1.58in)
250mm (9.84in)
251mm
(9.88in)
124mm
(4.88in)
1. The two outer holes must be used for mounting the Mentor MP.
NOTE
With the SMARTCARD installed to the drive, the depth measurement increases by 7.6 mm (0.30 in).

Figure 3-9 Installing the mounting feet bracket on size 1 drives

1 2 The bottom mounting bracket (1) should be installed to the back plate
first with the screws fully tightened.
The drive should then be lowered onto the bracket and slotted in.
The top mounting bracket (2) should then be slotted into the drive
and the top holes marked for mounting (380 mm [14.96 in] from the
centre of the holes on the bottom mounting bracket).
Once the holes have been drilled, fix the top mounting bracket
accordingly and tighten the screws.
It is not necessary to tighten the bottom mounting brackets with the
drive in place. The brackets are designed to clamp the drive heatsink
against the back plate.
MA1
MA2
Figure 3-10 Overall size 2A / 2B dimensions with terminal shrouds attached

495mm (19.49in) 301mm (11.85in)
453mm (17.84in)
85mm
(3.35in)
472mm (18.58) 8 holes to

suit M8
68mm
(2.68in)
80mm
(3.15in)
640mm 80mm
(25.20in) (3.15in)
65mm
(2.56in)
126mm
(4.96in)
93mm 11.5mm (0.45in)

(3.66in) 495mm (19.49in)
302mm
(11.89in)
NOTE

Figure 3-11 Overall size 2A dimensions without terminal shrouds attached

453mm (17.84in)
495mm (19.49in)
149mm (5.87in) 140mm (5.51in) 140mm (5.51in) 66mm (2.60in)
30mm 30mm 30mm

(1.18in) (1.18in) (1.18in) 15mm
(0.59in)
5mm
126mm
(0.20in)
(4.96in) 472mm (18.58 in)
8 holes to
suit M8
68mm
(2.68in)
80mm
(3.15in)
80mm
11mm (3.15in)
(0.43in)
65mm
25mm 25mm (2.56in)
(0.98in) (0.98in)
77mm 90mm 126mm

(3.03in) (3.54in) (4.96in)
141mm (5.55in) 11.5mm (0.45in)

5mm
(0.20in)
495mm (19.49in)
302mm
(11.89in)
Figure 3-12 Overall size 2B dimensions without terminal shrouds attached

495mm (19.49in)
453mm (17.84in)
149mm (5.87in) 140mm (5.51in) 140mm (5.51in) 66mm (2.60in)
30mm 30mm 30mm

(1.18in) (1.18in) (1.18in)
53mm
(2.09in)
8mm 126mm (4.96in)

(0.32in)
472mm (18.58) 8 holes to

suit M8
68mm
(2.68in)
80mm
(3.15in)
80mm
(3.15in)
38mm
(1.50in) 65mm
(2.56in)
40mm 40mm
(1.58in) (1.58in)
126mm
77mm 90mm
(4.96in)
(3.03in) (3.54in)
141mm (5.55in) 11.5mm (0.45in)

8mm
(0.32in) 495mm (19.49in)
302mm
(11.89in)
NOTE

Figure 3-13 Size 2C front view and mounting dimensions
452mm (17.8in)
390mm (15.35in)
202mm (7.95in)
124mm(4.89in)
6mm (0.24in)
27mm
25mm
(1.06in)
(0.98in)
30mm
(1.18in)
25mm
175mm (6.9in)
(0.98in)
605mm (23.82in)
25mm
(0.98in)
175mm (6.9in)
25mm
175mm (6.9in)
(0.98in)
25mm
202mm (7.95in)
(0.98in)
110.8 115.8
(4.36in) (4.56in)
26mm
(1.02in)
5mm
(0.2in)
321mm (12.64in)
248mm (9.76in)
405mm (15.94)
555mm (21.85in)

Figure 3-14 Size 2C back-plate and mounting detail
180mm (7.09in) 180mm (7.09in)

Rear
90mm 90mm
(3.54in) (3.54in)
68.5mm
83.5
(2.70in)
(3.29in)
50mm
(1.97in)
210mm
(8.27in) 190mm 240mm
(7.48in) (9.45in)
270mm
(10.63in) 8 holes Front
∅7mm
333mm (13.11in)
394mm (15.51in)
59mm 4 holes
(2.32in) to suit M10
260mm 1
(10.24in)
38mm
(1.5in)
9mm
(0.35in)
(23.82in)
1050mm (41.34in)
605mm
(2.09in)
53mm
35mm
(1.38in)
(11.34in)
288mm
306mm (12.05in)
611mm (24.05in)
450mm (17.72in)
NOTE
1. M10 eye-bolts can be inserted in the location shown for lifting the drive. These are not supplied with the drive.
NOTE
With the SMARTCARD installed in the drive, the depth measurement increases by 7.6 mm (0.30 in).

Figure 3-15 Size 2D front view and mounting dimensions
452mm (17.8in)
390mm (15.35in)
202mm (7.95in)
(4.88in)
124mm
6mm
27mm (0.24in)
(1.06in)
26mm
(1.02in)
30mm
(1.18in)
25mm
330mm (13.0in)
(0.98in)
25mm
(0.98in)
1065mm (41.93in)
330mm (13.0in)
25mm
330mm (13.0in)
(0.98in)
25mm
(0.98in)
25mm
(0.98in)
356mm (14.02in)
186mm 190mm
(7.32in) (7.48in)
4mm
321mm (12.64in)
(0.16in)
248mm (9.76in)
405mm (15.94in)
555mm (21.85in)

Figure 3-16 Size 2D back-plate and mounting detail
180mm (7.09in) 180mm (7.09in)
90mm 90mm
(3.54in) (3.54in)
68.5mm
83.5mm (2.70in)
(3.29in)
50mm
(1.97in)
210mm 190mm 240mm

(8.27in) (7.48in) (9.45in)
8 holes
∅7mm
333mm (13.11in)
394mm (15.51in) 4 holes

to suit M10
260mm 1
(10.24in)
38mm
(1.5in)
9mm
(0.35in)
1510mm (59.45in)
1065mm (41.93in)
53mm
(2.09in)
288mm (11.34in)
35mm
(1.38in)
306mm (12.05in)
611mm (24.06in)
450mm (17.72in)
NOTE
1. M10 eye-bolts can be inserted in the location shown for lifting the drive. These are not supplied with the drive.
NOTE

Figure 3-17 Mounting methods of size 2C / 2D air duct The Mentor MP size 2C and 2D air duct can be turned 180° to suit the
customers infrastructure.
NOTE
There is no seal provided with this product for sealing off the gap around
the air duct when mounted.
3.5 Installing and removing the terminal shrouds

Figure 3-18 Installing the terminal shrouds on size 1 drives
1. Thread the AC supply and DC output connectors through the grommets provided and connect them to the drive.
2. Place the terminal shroud over the top of the connectors and click into place (3).

Figure 3-19 Removing the terminal shrouds on size 1 drives
1 2
1. Insert the screwdriver as shown.

2. Lever in the direction shown to unclip the terminal shroud and remove.
Figure 3-20 Installing the terminal shrouds on size 2 drives
1 2 3
L1 L2 L3
A1 A2
1. Assemble the cable to the busbar.
2. Place the terminal shroud base cover underneath the cable in the orientation shown.
3. Place the terminal shroud over the cable in the orientation shown, slide the terminal shroud on to the base cover in the direction shown until it
clicks in to place.
4. For all power connections slide in the terminal shroud sub-assembly in the direction as shown.
5. Insert the 2 x M4 x 16 screws using a pozi drive screwdriver.
NOTE
To remove the terminal shrouds, please reverse the process above.

3.6 Enclosure
3.6.1 Enclosure layout
Please observe the clearances in the diagram below taking into account any appropriate notes for other devices / auxiliary equipment when planning
the installation.
Figure 3-21 Enclosure layout
AC supply contactor,
line chokes and fuses
Enclosure
A
Ensure minimum clearances

are maintained for the drive.
Forced or convection air-flow
must not be restricted by any
object or cabling
Note
For EMC compliance:
≥100mm ≥100mm 1) Power cabling must be at
(4in) (4in) least 100mm (4in) from the
drive in all directions
2) Ensure direct metal contact
MA1 at drive and filter mounting
points (any paint must be
MA2
Signal cables removed)

Plan for all signal cables
to be routed at least A 100mm for Size 1 drives
300mm (12in) from the 200mm for Size 2A/2B drives
drive and any power cable Note
For Size 2C/2D drives
leave a clearance of 100mm
around the drive.
External
controller
A
Auxillary
supply
Armature
connection
cable
Field
connection cable
Where:
3.6.2 Enclosure sizing Ae Unobstructed surface area in m2 (1 m2 = 10.9 ft2)
Refer to Table 12-4 in section 12.1.4 Power dissipation on page 150 for
drive losses. Text Maximum expected temperature in oC outside the
Add the dissipation figures for each drive that is to be installed in the enclosure
enclosure.
Tint Maximum permissible temperature in oC inside the
Add the power dissipation figures for each EMC filter that is to be
enclosure
installed in the enclosure.
P Power in Watts dissipated by all heat sources in the
Calculate the total heat dissipation (in Watts) of any other equipment to
be installed in the enclosure. enclosure
Add the figures of all of the above to get a total heat dissipation figure (in k Heat transmission coefficient of the enclosure material
Watts) for the equipment in the enclosure. in W/m2/ oC
Calculating the size of a sealed enclosure Example
The enclosure transfers internally generated heat into the surrounding To calculate the size of an enclosure for the following:
air by natural convection. The larger the surface area of the enclosure
walls, the better is the dissipation capability. Only the surfaces of the • Two MP25A4 models operating under full load conditions
enclosure that are not in contact with a wall or floor can dissipate heat. • Maximum ambient temperature inside the enclosure: 40 °C
• Maximum ambient temperature outside the enclosure: 30 °C
Calculate the minimum required unobstructed surface area Ae for the
enclosure from: Dissipation of each drive: 125 W
Dissipation from other heat generating equipment in the enclosure. 22 W
P (max).
A = ----------------------------------------
e k(T –T )
int ext Total dissipation: (2 x 125) + 22 = 272 W.

The enclosure is to be made from painted 2 mm (0.079 in) sheet steel Where:
having a heat transmission coefficient of 5.5 W/m2/oC. Only the top, P0 is the air pressure at sea level
front, and two sides of the enclosure are free to dissipate heat. PI is the air pressure at the installation
Typically use a factor of 1.2 to 1.3, to allow also for pressure-drops in
The value of 5.5 W/m2/ ºC can generally be used with a sheet steel
dirty air-filters.
enclosure (exact values can be obtained by the supplier of the material).
If in any doubt, allow for a greater margin in the temperature rise. Example
Figure 3-22 Enclosure having front, sides and top panels free to To calculate the size of an enclosure for the following:
dissipate heat • Three MP45A4 models operating under full load conditions
• Maximum ambient temperature inside the enclosure: 40 °C
• Maximum ambient temperature outside the enclosure: 30 °C
Dissipation of each drive: 168W
Dissipation from other heat generating equipment. 45 W
H Total dissipation: (3 x 168) + 45 = 549 W
Insert the following values:
Tint 40 °C
Text 30 °C
k 1.3
D
P 549 W
W
Then:
Insert the following values: 3 × 1.3 × 549

V = ----------------------------------
Tint 40 °C 40 – 30
Text 30 °C = 214.1 m3/hr (126.3 ft3 /min) (1 m3/ hr = 0.59 ft3/min)
k 5.5
P 272 W 3.7 Heatsink fan operation
The minimum required heat conducting area is then: Mentor MP drives rated 75 A to 900 A are ventilated by internally
supplied fans.
272W
A e = --------------------------------- Ensure the minimum clearances around the drive are maintained to
5.5 ( 40 – 30 )
allow the air to flow freely. The air flow figures are listed below:
= 4.945 m2 (53.90 ft2) (1 m2 = 10.9 ft2)
Size 1A - 0.5 cubic metres per minute.
Estimate two of the enclosure dimensions - the height (H) and depth (D),
Size 1B - 2.8 cubic metres per minute.
for instance. Calculate the width (W) from:
A e – 2HD Size 2A - 7.8 cubic metres per minute.
W = -------------------------- Size 2B - 7.8 cubic metres per minute.
H+D
Inserting H = 2m and D = 0.6m, obtain the minimum width: Mentor MP drives rated 1200 A and above are ventilated by externally
4.945 – ( 2 × 2 × 0.6 ) supplied fans. Please refer to section 4.12 Connecting the fan on size
W = ----------------------------------------------------- 2C and 2D drives on page 52 for more information.
2 + 0.6
=0.979 m (38.5 in) The air flow figures are listed below:
If the enclosure is too large for the space available, it can be made Size 2C - 22 cubic metres per minute.
smaller only by attending to one or all of the following: Size 2D - 22 cubic metres per minute.
• Reducing the ambient temperature outside the enclosure, and/or The drive controls the fan operation based on the temperature of the
applying forced-air cooling to the outside of the enclosure heatsink and the drives thermal model system.
• Reducing the number of drives in the enclosure
• Removing other heat-generating equipment 3.8 IP rating (Ingress Protection)
Calculating the air-flow in a ventilated enclosure IP rating
The dimensions of the enclosure are required only for accommodating
It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that any enclosure
the equipment. The equipment is cooled by the forced air flow.
which allows access to drives from frame sizes 2A to 2D
Calculate the minimum required volume of ventilating air from: while the product is energized, provides protection against
WARNING
3kP contact and ingress to the requirements of IP20.
V = ---------------------------
T int – T ext An explanation of IP rating is provided in section 12.1.13 IP rating on
page 151.
Where:
V Air-flow in m3 per hour (1 m3/hr = 0.59 ft3/min)
Text Maximum expected temperature in °C outside the
enclosure
Tint Maximum permissible temperature in °C inside the
enclosure
P Power in Watts dissipated by all heat sources in the
enclosure
Po
k Ratio of -------
Pl

3.9 Electrical terminals

3.9.1 Location of the power and ground terminals
Figure 3-23 Location of the power and ground terminals on size 1 drives
AC input
M8 nut / 13 mm AF
DC output
MA1 MA2
5mm
Machine
M8 nut
feedback
13mm AF
terminals
Control and
encoder
connections
2.5 mm
Tacho
connections
3.5 mm
T25 Torx
5mm 3.5mm
Ground
Auxiliary Relay connections
connections connections

Figure 3-24 Location of the power and ground terminals on size 2A and 2B drives
AC input
Size 2A: M10 nut 17mm AF
Size 2B: M12 nut 19mm AF
Control and
encoder
connections
2.5 mm
3.5 mm
Tacho
connections
5mm
3.5mm T25 Torx
Auxiliary
5mm Relay
connections Ground
Machine connections
Size 2A: M10 nut 17mm AF connections
feedback
terminals
Size 2B: M12 nut 19mm AF
DC output

Figure 3-25 Location of the power and ground terminals on size 2C and 2D drives
Size 2C / 2D:
Size 2C / 2D:
AC Input
DC Output
M12 nut 19mm AF

M12 nut 19mm AF
3.5mm
Tacho
connections
2.5mm
Control and
encoder
connections
5mm 3.5mm
Auxiliary Relay
5mm
connections connections
Machine
feedback
T25 Torx
terminals
Ground
connections
3.9.2 Terminal sizes and torque settings Table 3-3 Drive power stage terminals on size 1 drives
Model Connection type Torque setting
To avoid a fire hazard and maintain validity of the UL listing,
All M8 stud 10 N m (89.0 lb in)
adhere to the specified tightening torques for the power and
ground terminals. Refer to the following tables. Table 3-4 Drive power stage terminals on size 2 drives
WARNING
3.9.3 Torque settings Size 2A M10 stud 15 N m (133.0 lb in)
Table 3-1 Drive control, status relay and encoder terminal data Size 2B
Model Connection type Torque setting Size 2C M12 stud 30 N m (266.0 Ib in)
All Plug-in terminal block 0.5 N m (4.5 lb in) Size 2D
Table 3-2 Drive auxiliary and machine armature terminal data

All Terminal block 0.5 N m (4.5 lb in)

3.10 Routine maintenance

The drive should be installed in a cool, clean, well ventilated location. Contact of moisture and dust with the drive should be prevented.
Regular checks of the following should be carried out to ensure drive / installation reliability are maximized:
Environment
Ambient temperature Ensure the enclosure temperature remains at or below maximum specified
Ensure the drive remains dust free – check that the heatsink and drive fan are not gathering dust.
Dust
The lifetime of the fan is reduced in dusty environments.
Moisture Ensure the drive enclosure shows no signs of condensation
Enclosure
Enclosure door filters Ensure filters are not blocked and that air is free to flow
Electrical
Screw connections Ensure all screw terminals remain tight
Ensure all crimp terminals remains tight – check for any discoloration which could indicate
Crimp terminals
overheating
Cables Check all cables for signs of damage

4 Electrical installation
Many cable management features have been incorporated into the
product and accessories, this chapter shows how to optimize them. Key
features include:
• EMC compliance
• Product rating, fusing and cabling information
• External suppressor resistor details (selection / ratings)
Electric shock risk

The voltages present in the following locations can cause
severe electric shock and may be lethal:
WARNING
• AC supply cables and connections
• DC cables, and connections
• Many internal parts of the drive, and external option units
Unless otherwise indicated, control terminals are single
insulated and must not be touched.
Isolation device
The AC supply must be disconnected from the drive using
an approved isolation device before any cover is removed
from the drive or before any servicing work is performed.
WARNING
STOP function
The STOP function does not remove dangerous voltages
from the drive, the motor or any external option units.
WARNING
Drives are suitable for use on supplies of installation

category III and lower, according to IEC 60664-1. This
means they may be connected permanently to the supply at
its origin in a building, but for outdoor installation additional
WARNING
over-voltage suppression (transient voltage surge
suppression) must be provided to reduce category IV to
category III.
Permanent magnet motors

Permanent magnet motors generate electrical power if they
are rotated, even when the supply to the drive is
disconnected. If that happens then the drive will become
WARNING
energized through its motor terminals.
If the motor load is capable of rotating the motor when the
supply is disconnected, then the motor must be isolated from
the drive before gaining access to any live parts.

4.1 Electrical connections

Refer to Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2 to understand the function of the different power connections
Figure 4-1 Power connections for 480 V drive
Main
AC Supply
L1 L2 L3
* * *
Branch
fuses
Isolator Branch
10A fuses
* * * 10A
Semiconductor
fuses
1 Line
contactor
**Optional EMC
armature filter
Line
reactor
2 Quadrant 4 Quadrant
Drives Drives
Input power
A2 A1 terminals
L1 L2 L3
A1 A2
Armature
terminals
A1 MA1
MA2
A2
Line
contactor
Control connections coil
DC fuse Auxiliary connections RLY2 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
for 4Q only 61 62 63
E1 E3 L12 L11 F+ F-
24V Drive
enable
**Optional
EMC
field
filter Field
on / off
250Vac
maximum
Fan supply (where applicable)
Motor
1. End user must provide 230 / 115 Vac supply for the internal fans on frame sizes C and D, see section 4.12 on page 52.
* For fuse ratings refer to section 4.6 Cable and fuse size ratings on page 39.
**For further information on EMC filters, see section 4.9.3 EMC filter information on page 50.

Figure 4-2 Power connections for 575 V / 600 V / 690 V drives

Main
AC Supply
L1 L2 L3
* * *
Branch
fuses
Branch
Isolator
fuses
* * *
Semiconductor
fuses
1 Line
contactor
Line
reactor
2 Quadrant 4 Quadrant
Drives Drives
Input power 575 / 690Vac **

A2 A1 terminals
L1 L2 L3
A1 A2
480Vac
maximum
Armature
terminals
A1 MA1 10A 10A

MA2
A2
Line
contactor
Control connections coil
DC fuse Auxiliary connections RLY2 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
for 4Q only 61 62 63
E1 E3 L12 L11 F+ F-
24V Drive
enable
Field
on / off
250Vac
maximum
Fan supply (where applicable)
Motor
1. End user must provide 230 / 115 Vac supply for the internal fans on frame sizes C and D, see section 4.12 on page 52.
* For fuse ratings refer to section 4.6 Cable and fuse size ratings on page 39.
** The transformer must have zero phase delay.

4.2 Ground connections Figure 4-4 Location of ground connections on size 2A / 2B drives
The drive must be connected to the system ground of the AC supply.

The ground wiring must conform to local regulations and codes of
practice.
Electrochemical corrosion of grounding terminals

Ensure that grounding terminals are protected against
corrosion i.e. as could be caused by condensation.
WARNING
Ground loop impedance

The ground loop impedance must conform to the
requirements of local safety regulations.
WARNING The drive must be grounded by a connection capable of
carrying the prospective fault current until the protective
device (fuse, etc,) disconnects the AC supply.
The ground connections must be inspected and tested at
appropriate intervals.
Figure 4-3 Location of ground connection on size 1 drives

Ground
connection
Ground
connections
Figure 4-5 Location of ground connections on size 2C / 2D drives

MA1
MA2
Ground connection

4.3 AC supply requirements Figure 4-7 Removing the MOV ground connection on size 2A / 2B
drives
The standard drive is rated for a nominal supply voltage up to 480 V rms.
An optional rating of 575 V rms is available for size 1 drives.
An optional rating of 575 V rms and 690 V rms is available for size 2
drives.
Grounded delta supplies exceeding 575 V are not permitted

for drives up to and including 210 A. Grounded delta
supplies exceeding 600 V are not permitted for drives rated
WARNING 350 A and above.
4.3.1 Supply types 1

Drives rated for supply voltages of up to 575 V (rated up to 210 A) and
600 V (350 A and above), are suitable for use with any supply type i.e.
TN-S, TN-C-S, TT, IT with grounding at any potential i.e neutral, centre
or corner (“Grounded delta”). The method for disconnecting the MOV ground connection on size 2A /
Grounded delta supplies >575 V are not permitted for drives rated up to 2B drives is shown below:
and including 210 A. Grounded delta supplies >600 V are not permitted 1. Remove the M4 x 30 screw using T20 Torx driver .
for drives rated 350 A and above. If re-installing the M4 x 30 screw using T20 Torx driver, the screw must
4.3.2 Supply fault current be tightened to a torque of 2.5 N m (1.84 Ib ft).
The maximum fault current level of the supply to all circuits is 100 kA Figure 4-8 Removing the MOV ground connection on size 2C / 2D
subject to the capability of the semiconductor fuse fitted. drives
4.3.3 MOV ground disconnect

The facility for disconnecting the jumper (link) between varistors and
ground is provided for special circumstances, where a sustained high
voltage may be present between lines and ground, for example during a
high potential test or in certain situations with IT supplies and multiple
generators. If the jumper (link) is disconnected then the immunity of the
drive to high voltage impulses is reduced. It is then only suitable for use
with supplies having overvoltage category II, i.e. not for connection at
the origin of the low voltage supply within a building.
Figure 4-6 Removing the MOV ground connection on size 1 drives
3 1
4
The method for disconnecting the MOV ground connection on size 2C /

The method for disconnecting the MOV ground connection on size 1
2D drives is shown in Figure 4-8 above:
drives is shown below:
1. Remove the M4 x 30 screw using T20 Torx driver .
1. Remove the M4 x 16 screw using T20 Torx driver.
If re-fitting the M4 x 30 screw using T20 Torx driver, the screw must be
2. Remove the M4 x 12 screw using T20 Torx driver.
tightened to a torque of 2.5 N m (1.84 Ib ft).
3. Remove the plate.
4. Re-fit the M4 x 12 screw using T20 Torx driver and tighten to a
torque of 0.6 N m (0.44 Ib ft).
5. Fit a M4 x 16 nylon screw (not supplied) and tighten to a torque of
0.25 N m (0.18 Ib ft).
The M4 x 16 screw (1) should not be re-used if the plate (3)

is not re-installed. Instead a nylon screw should be used.
WARNING

4.3.4 Main AC supply (L1, L2, L3) 4.4.1 Auxiliary AC supply and connections
Table 4-1 Three phase AC supply Table 4-3 Terminal functions
Product voltage variant Terminals Function
Specification
480 V 575 V 690 V E1, E3 Supply for control electronics and field controller.
Maximum nominal supply 480 V 575 V 690 V Field on / off. When L11 and L12 are open the supply is
Tolerance +10 % L11, L12 disconnected to the field regulator so there will be no field
Minimum nominal supply 24 V 500 V current.
Tolerance -20 % -10 % F+, F- Field supply to the motor.
These terminals are used to provide feedback from the
4.4 Line reactors motor armature terminals. This is required when the user
The Mentor MP, in common with all naturally commutated thyristor has a contactor in the main DC armature connection.
drives, causes voltage notches at the input supply terminals. In order to MA1, MA2
When the contactor is opened the drive will still be
avoid disturbance to other equipment using the same supply, the receiving armature feedback. This allows the field
addition of external line inductance is strongly recommended in order to regulator to function correctly when the contactor is open.
restrict the depth of the notches imposed on the shared supply. This is
generally not necessary where a dedicated transformer is used to supply Table 4-4 Line to line supply
the drive. Specification Value
The following recommendations for added line inductance, have been Maximum nominal supply 480 V
calculated based on the power drive systems standard: EN 61800-
Tolerance +10 %
3:2004 “Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 3: EMC
requirements and specific test methods”. Minimum nominal supply 208 V
Tolerance -10 %
NOTE
The current ratings specified in Table 4-2 are for typical motor currents Each drive has an onboard field controller with the following current
where the motor current ripple is no more than 50 % of drive rating. ratings.
Table 4-2 Minimum required line inductance for a typical Table 4-5 Field controller current ratings
application (50 % ripple content) Maximum Maximum
Drive System voltage Typical Maximum auxiliary continuous
rated current current Model supply input field current
current 400 V 480 V 575 V 690 V rating rating current rating
A A
A μH μH μH μH A A
MP25A4(R) MP25A5(R)
25 220 260 320 21 22
MP45A4(R) MP45A5(R)
45 220 260 320 38 40
MP75A4(R) MP75A5(R)
75 220 260 320 63 67 13 8
MP105A4(R) MP105A5(R)
105 220 260 320 88 94
MP155A4(R) MP155A5(R)
155 160 190 230 130 139 MP210A4(R) MP210A5(R)
210 120 140 170 176 188 MP350A4(R) MP350A5(R) MP350A6(R)
350 71 85 110 120 293 295 MP420A4(R)
420 59 71 351 350 MP470A5(R) MP470A6(R)
470 80 91 393 395 MP550A4(R)
550 45 54 460 450 MP700A4(R) MP700A5(R) MP700A6(R)
700 36 43 53 61 586 585 MP825A4(R) MP825A5(R) MP825A6(R) 23 20
825 45 52 690 665 MP900A4(R)
900 28 33 753 725 MP1200A4 MP1200A5 MP1200A6
1200 21 25 31 36 1004 1050 MP1850A4 MP1850A5 MP1850A6
1850 18 23 29 32 1570 1655 MP1200A4R MP1200A5R MP1200A6R
MP1850A4R MP1850A5R MP1850A6R
NOTE
1. The above assumes the supply has 1.5 % impedance. 4.4.2 Supply requirements
2. Assumes a minimum supply rating of 5 kA and a maximum rating of Maximum supply in-balance: 2 % negative phase sequence (equivalent
60 kA. to 3 % voltage in-balance between phases)
Frequency range: 45 to 65 Hz (maximum rate of frequency change is
7 Hz/s).
4.5 Control 24 Vdc supply

The 24 Vdc input has three main functions.
• It can be used to supplement the drive's own internal 24 V when
multiple SM-Universal Encoder Plus, SM-Encoder Output Plus, SM-
I/O Plus, or SM-I/O 32 modules are being used and the current
drawn by these modules is greater than the drive can supply. (If too
much current is drawn from the drive, the drive will initiate a 'PS.24
V' trip).

• It can be used as a back-up power supply to keep the control circuits Table 4-6 Typical cable sizes for size 1 drives
of the drive powered up when the line power supply is removed. This
allows any fieldbus modules, application modules, encoders or serial IEC 60364-5-52[1] UL508C/NEC[2]
communications to continue to operate. Model
• It can be used to commission the drive when the line power supply is Input Output Input Output
not available, as the display operates correctly. However, the drive MP25A4(R) MP25A5(R) 2.5 mm 2 4 mm2 8 AWG 8 AWG
will be in the UV trip state unless the line power supply is enabled,
MP45A4(R) MP45A5(R) 10 mm2 10 mm2 4 AWG 4 AWG
therefore diagnostics may not be possible. (Power down save
MP75A4(R) MP75A5(R) 2 2 1 AWG 1/0 AWG
parameters are not saved when using the 24 V back-up power 16 mm 25 mm
supply input). MP105A4(R) MP105A5(R) 25 mm2 35 mm2 1/0 AWG 1/0 AWG
The working voltage range of the 24 V power supply is as follows: MP155A4(R) MP155A5(R) 50 mm2 70 mm2 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG
Maximum continuous operating voltage: 30.0 V
Minimum continuous operating voltage: 19.2 V MP210A4(R) MP210A5(R) 95 mm2 95 mm2 300 kcmil 350 kcmil
Nominal operating voltage: 24.0 V
NOTE
Minimum start up voltage: 21.6 V
Maximum power supply requirement at 24 V: 60 W 1. The maximum cable size is defined by the power terminal housing
Recommended fuse: 3 A, 50 Vdc using 90 °C (194 °F) rated cables as per Table A.52-5 of the
standard.
Minimum and maximum voltage values include ripple and noise. Ripple
2. Assumes the use of 75 °C rated cables, as per Table 310.16 of the
and noise values must not exceed 5 %.
National Electrical Code.
4.6 Cable and fuse size ratings The use of higher temperature rated cable would allow a reduction on
the minimum recommended cable size for Mentor MP shown above. For
high temperature cable sizing, please refer to the data supplied by the
The selection of the correct fuse is essential to ensure the manufacturer of the high temperature cable.
safety of the installation
WARNING
Maximum continuous input currents are given in section 2.1 Current

ratings on page 6 to aid the selection of fuses and cabling. The
maximum input current is dependent on the ripple content of the output
current. A value of 100 % ripple has been assumed for the given ratings.
The cable sizing selected when installing a Mentor MP must comply with
the local wiring regulations. The information provided in this section is
provided for guidance purposes only.
The power terminals on Mentor MP frame size 1 drives have been
designed to accommodate a maximum cable size of 150 mm2 (350
kcmil) with a temperature of 90 °C (194 °F).
The power terminals on Mentor MP frame size 2A drives have been
designed to accommodate a maximum cable size of 2 x 150 mm2 (2 x
350 kcmil) with a temperature of 75 °C (167 °F).
The power terminals on Mentor MP frame size 2B drives have been
designed to accommodate 2 x 240 mm2 with a temperature of 90 °C
(194 °F). The use of cables sized using the US national electrical code
as shown in Table 4-8 requires the use of a terminal adaptor.
The power terminals on Mentor MP frame size 2C and 2D drives have
been designed for use with busbars. The drive can be used with cables
as shown in Table 4-8 with the use of a terminal adaptor.
The actual cable size depends on a number of factors including:
• Actual maximum continuous current
• Ambient temperature
• Cable support, method and grouping
• Cable voltage drop
In applications where the motor used is of a reduced rating, the cable
sizing selected can be appropriate for that motor. To protect the motor
and the output cabling the drive must be programmed with the correct
motor rated current.
NOTE
When using reduced cable sizes, the branch circuit protection fuse rating
needs to be reduced in line with the cable size selected.
The following table shows typical cable sizes based on USA and
International standards, assuming 3 conductors per raceway/conduit, an
ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F) and applications with high output
current ripple content.

Table 4-7 Auxiliary wiring for size 1 drives
Maximum Continuous IEC 60364-5-52 Table A52-4 Column B2

UL 508C
Frame input output Column B2 derated by 0,87 of PVC at 40
size current current E1, E3 size F+, F- , L11 & L12 size E1, E3 size F+, F- , L11 & L12 size
A A mm² mm² mm² mm²
1 13 8 2.5 1.5 14 AWG 14 AWG
Notes for IEC 60364:
IEC 60364-5-52 use installation method B2, table A.52-4 for three loaded conductors, PVC insulation 30 °C and apply derating factor for 40 °C from
table A.52-14 (0.87 for PVC).
Notes for UL508C:
Either 60 °C or 75 °C cable can be used. Ampacities as per table 40.3 as described in the UL508C standard.
Table 4-8 Typical cable sizes for size 2 drives

IEC 60364-5-52 Table A52-
12 Column 5 derated by
0.91 for 40 °C XLPE cables
US National
Maximum (IEC 60364-5-52 table A52-
Continuous Electrical Code
input 14) and 0.77 for cables
output current bunching (IEC 60364-5-52
Model current
table A52-17 item 4)
90 °C cables at 40 °C
75 °C cable at 40 °C ambient
ambient
Input size Output size Input cables Output cables
A A mm² mm² Kcmil Kcmil
MP350A4(R) MP350A5(R) MP350A6(R) 295 350 120 150 350 400
MP420A4(R) 350 420 150 185 400 500
MP470A5(R) MP470A6(R) 395 470 185 240 500 600
MP550A4(R) 450 550 300 2 x 185 2 x 300 2 x 350
MP700A4(R) MP700A5(R) MP700A6(R) 585 700 2 x 150 2 x 150 2 x 500 2 x 600
MP900A4(R) 725 900 2 x 185 2 x 240 3 x 350 3 x 400
MP1850A4(R) MP1850A5(R) MP1850A6(R) 1655 1850 4 x 240 4 x 300 * *
* Values are beyond the mechanical design of the drive. At this power level it may be prudent to consider bus-bars.
NOTE
1. IEC 60364-5-52 table A 52-12 F method column 5 = Single core cable in free air.
2. IEC 60364-5-52 table A52-14 correction factor for ambient air temperature others than 30 °C.
3. IEC 60364-5-52 table A52-17 item 4 correction factor for groups of more than one circuit or more than one multi-core cable placed on a single
layer on a perforated tray.
NOTE
Notes for US National Electrical Code:

1. Table 310.17 allowable ampacities of single-insulated conducted rated 0 through 2000 V in free air, based on ambient air temperature of 30 °C
(87 °F).
2. Derating factor of 0.88 is applied for 40 °C to the 75 °C cable column. Table 310.17 is based on 30 °C (86 °F) ambient air temperature.
3. NEC 2005 edition table 310.15(B)(2)(a) shows the adjustment factors for more than three current-carrying conductors in a race way or cable, for
4-6 current-carrying conductors 0.80 derating factor is applied.
IEC 60364-5-52 Table A52-4 Column B2
Maximum Continuous UL 508C
input output Column B2 derated by 0,87 of PVC at 40
Frame size current current
E1, E3 size F+, F- , L11 & L12 size E1, E3 size F+, F- , L11 & L12 size
2 23 20 6 4 10 AWG 10 AWG
IEC 60364-5-52 use installation method B2, table A.52-4 for three loaded conductors, PVC insulation 30 °C and apply derating factor for 40 °C from
table A.52-14 (0.87 for PVC).
Notes for UL508C: Either 60 °C or 75 °C cable can be used. Ampacities as per table 40.3 as described in the UL508C standard.

4.6.1 Ferraz Shawmut fuses
Fuses
The AC supply to the drive must be installed with suitable protection against overload and short-circuits. The following tables show the
recommended fuses. Failure to observe this requirement will cause risk of fire.
WARNING
Ferraz Shawmut fuses are recommended for the Mentor MP.

Table 4-10 Ferraz Shawmut semiconductor fusing for size 1 drives
International USA
Model
Description Catalog No. Ref No. UL app Description Catalog No. Ref No. UL app
10 x 38 mm 10 x 38 mm
Field fuses FR10GB69V12.5 H330011 √ FR10GB69V12.5 H330011 √
Ferrule Ferrule
A50QS Series
MP25A4 A50QS40-4 Y215583 √
FR22GC69V32 A220915 √ round fuse
MP25A5
A50QS Series
MP45A4 A50QS70-4 B222664 √
FR22GC69V63 X220912 √ round fuse
MP45A5
A50QS Series
MP75A4 A50QS125-4 K218417 √
FR22GC69V100 W220911 √ round fuse
MP75A5 22 x 58 mm
Ferrule A70QS Series
MP25A4R A70QS60-4 H219473
MP25A5R
A70QS Series
MP45A4R A70QS80-4 X212816
MP45A5R
A70QS Series
MP75A4R A70QS125-4 Q216375
MP75A5R
A50QS Series
MP105A4 A50QS175-4 A222663 √
PC30UD69V160EF M300092 √ round fuse
MP105A5
A50QS Series
MP155A4 Size 30 Square A50QS250-4 W211251 √
PC30UD69V200EF N300093 √ round fuse
body fuse
MP155A5
A50QS Series
MP210A4 A50QS350-4 T215343 √
PC30UD69V315EF Q300095 √ round fuse
MP210A5
A70QS Series
MP105A4R A70QS175-4 A223192
PC70UD13C160EF T300604 √ round fuse
MP105A5R
A70QS Series
MP155A4R Size 70 Square A70QS250-4 L217406
PC70UD13C200EF V300605 √ round fuse
body fuse
MP155A5R
A70QS Series
MP210A4R A70QS350-4 M211266
PC70UD12C280EF L300712 √ round fuse
MP210A5R
NOTE
A50QS series are only rated up to 500 Vac.

Table 4-11 Ferraz Shawmut branch circuit protection fusing for size 1 drives
International USA
Model
Description Catalog No. Ref No. UL app Catalog No. UL app
Auxiliary 21 x 57 mm Cylindrical HSJ15 D235868 AJT10 √
MP25A4 MP25A5 FR22GG69V25 N212072 AJT30 √
MP45A4 MP45A5 FR22GG69V50 P214626 AJT45 √
MP75A4 MP75A5 FR22GG69V80 Q217180 AJT70 √
22 x 58 mm Ferrule
MP25A4R MP25A5R FR22GG69V25 N212072 AJT30 √
MP45A4R MP45A5R FR22GG69V50 P214626 AJT45 √
MP75A4R MP75A5R FR22GG69V80 Q217180 AJT70 √
MP105A4 MP105A5 NH 00 Knife Blade NH00GG69V100 B228460 AJT125 √
MP155A4 MP155A5 NH1GG69V160 F228487 AJT175 √
NH 1 Knife Blade
MP210A4 MP210A5 NH1GG69V200 G228488 AJT225 √
MP105A4R MP105A5R NH 00 Knife Blade NH00GG69V100 B228460 AJT125 √
MP155A4R MP155A5R NH1GG69V160 F228487 AJT175 √
NH 1 Knife Blade
MP210A4R MP210A5R NH1GG69V200 G228488 AJT225 √
Table 4-12 Ferraz Shawmut DC Semiconductor protection fusing for size 1 drives
International USA
Model UL UL
Description Catalog No. Ref No. Description Catalog No. Ref No.
app app
MP25A4R A70QS Series round fuse A70QS60-4 H219473 √
20 x 127 mm Cylindrical FD20GB100V32T F089498
MP25A5R
MP45A4R A70QS Series round fuse A70QS80-4 X212816 √
36 x 127 mm Cylindrical FD36GC100V80T A083651
MP45A5R
MP75A4R FD20GC100V63T x A70QS Series round fuse A70QS125-4 Q216375 √
20 x 127 mm Cylindrical 2 connected in F083656
MP75A5R parallel
MP105A4R A70QS Series round fuse A70QS175-4 A223192 √
Size 120 Square body D120GC75V160TF R085253
MP105A5R
MP155A4R A70QS Series round fuse A70QS250-4 L217406 √
Size 121 Square body D121GC75V250TF Q085252
MP155A5R
MP210A4R A70QS Series round fuse A70QS350-4 M211266 √
Size 122 Square body D122GC75V315TF M085249
MP210A5R
NOTE
The above DC fuse recommendations are not required for UL conformity of the Mentor MP drive. Any installations required to meet NEC and/or
UL508a panel requirements, must use recognized fuses that meet the requirements of the standard being applied. The UL columns above indicate
whether the recommended fuse is a UL recognized component and not its conformance to either NEC or UL508a.
DC fusing is required on four quadrant (R) drives only.

International USA
Model
FR10GR69V25 F1014581 FR10GR69V25 F1014581

Field fuses 10 x 38 mm 10 x 38 mm
√ √
(all size 2) Ferrule Ferrule
FR10GB69V25 L330014 FR10GB69V25 L330014
A50QS450-4 E216871 √
MP350A4 PC30UD69V500TF W300399 √
A7OQS450-4 F214848 √
MP350A4R PC71UD11V500TF F300523 √ A7OQS450-4 F214848 √
MP350A5 PC31UD69V500TF T300006 √ A70QS450-4 F214848 √

MP350A6 PC31UD69V500TF T300006 A70QS450-4 F214848
MP350A5R PC72UD13C500TF D300498 √ A70QS450-4 F214848 √
MP350A6R PC72UD13C500TF D300498 A70QS450-4 F214848
A50QS600-4 Q219457 √
MP420A4 PC32UD69V630TF M300069 √
A70QS600-4 Y219993 √
MP420A4R PC272UD13C630TF W300721 √ A70QS600-4 Y219993 √
MP470A5 PC272UD13C700TF X300722 √
MP470A6 PC272UD13C700TF X300722 2 x A70QS400
J214345 (x2)
MP470A5R PC272UD13C700TF X300722 √ in parallel
MP470A6R PC272UD13C700TF X300722

A50QS700-4 N223181 √
MP550A4 PC33UD69V700TF Y300079 √
A70QS700-4 E202772 √
MP550A4R PC272UD13C700TF X300722 √ A70QS700-4 E202772 √
A50QS900-4 R212282 √
MP700A4 PC32UD69V1000TF S300074 √ 2 x A70QS500-4
Square body American round A218431 (x2)
in parallel
fuses fuses
MP700A4R PC72UD10C900TF G300869 √
MP700A5 PC32UD69V1000TF S300074 √
2 x A70QS500
MP700A6 PC32UD69V1000TF S300074 A218431 (x2)
in parallel
MP700A5R PC73UD12C900TF T300512 √
MP700A6R PC73UD12C900TF T300512
A50QS1200-4 C217904 √
MP825A4 PC32UD69V1100TF M300759 √ 2 x A70QS600-4
Y219993 (x2)
in parallel
MP825A5 PC33UD69V1100TF C300083 √
MP825A6 PC33UD69V1100TF C300083
2 x A7OQS600-4
MP825A4R Y219993 (x2)
PC73UD95V800TFB W300514 √ in parallel
MP825A5R
MP825A6R PC73UD95V800TFB W300514
A50QS1200-4 C217904 √
MP900A4 PC33UD69V1250TF D300084 √ 2 x A7OQS600-4
Y219993 (x2)
in parallel
2 x A7OQS600-4
MP900A4R PC73UD95V800TFB W300514 √ Y219993 (x2)
in parallel
2 x A5OQS800-4
PC33UD60V1600TF Z300586 C202287 (x2)
in parallel
MP1200A4
2 x A70QS800-4
A075URD 44 PPASF D1020007A √ Z213830 (x2)
in parallel

International USA
Model
PC273UD11C16CTF J302228
MP1200A4R
A075URD 44 PPASF D1020007A √
PC232UD69V16CTD W300215
MP1200A5
A075URD 44 PPASF D1020007A √ 2 x A70QS800-4 in
Z213830 (x2)
MP1200A6 PC232UD69V16CTD W300215 parallel
PC273UD11C16CTF J302228
MP1200A5R
A075URD 44 PPASF D1020007A √
MP1200A6R Square PC273UD11C16CTF J302228 American
body fuses
round fuses 2 x A5OQS1000-4
B217391 (x2)
in parallel.
MP1850A4
3 x A70QS700-4 in
*E202772 (x3)
parallel.
MP1850A4R
** A075URD 44 PPASF D1020007A √
MP1850A5
*3 x A7OQS700-4
MP1850A6 *E202772 (x3)
in parallel
MP1850A5R
MP1850A6R
NOTE
*Application overload limited to infrequent overloads to avoid fuse wear out
**Fuse limits applications to those operating at rated current. No cyclic overloads permitted.
International USA
Model UL UL
app app
25 A 600 Vac 25 A 600 Vac
Auxiliary High Speed HSJ205 G235871J √ High Speed AJT25R X21160J √
Class J Class J
MP350A5(R)
MP350A4(R) NH2GG69V355 Y228503 A6D400R B216776 √
MP350A6(R)
MP420A4(R) NH3GG69V400 D228508 A6D500R P217294 √
MP470A5(R) NH4GG69V630-8 E215537

MP470A6(R) NH4AGG69V630-8 W222107
General A6D600R T217804 √
purpose IEC NH4GG69V630-8 E215537
MP550A4 (R)
(square body) NH4AGG69V630-8 W222107
MP700A5(R) NH4GG69V800-8 K216554 General
MP700A4(R)
MP700A6(R) NH4AGG69V800-8 M222858 purpose US
(round body)
MP825A4(R) A4BQ800 Z219373 √
NH4GG69V800-8 K216554
MP825A5(R)
NH4AGG69V800-8 M222858
MP825A6(R)
MP900A4(R) A4BQ1000 P216282 √
MP1200A5(R) MF76GG69V1250 E302753
MP1200A4(R) General A4BQ1200 R216790 √
MP1200A6(R) Purpose IEC
(round body)
MP1850A5(R)
MP1850A4(R) MF114GG69V2000 G302755 A4BQ2000 B223101 √
MP1850A6(R)
NOTE
USA fuses are only rated up to 600 Vac.

Table 4-15 Ferraz Shawmut DC protection fusing for size 2 drives

International USA
Model UL UL
recog recog
MP350A4R A70QS600-4 Y219993 √
MP350A5R D123GB75V630TF C098557 American round
A100P600-4 A217373 √
MP350A6R fuse
MP420A4R D123GB75V800TF J220946 A70QS800-4 Z213830 √

MP470A5R
A100P1000-4 (x2) Y217371 (x2)
MP470A6R D2122GD75V900TF T220955 American round
fuses
MP550A4R 2 in parallel A70QS450-4 (x2) F214848 (x2) √
MP700A4R A70QS600-4 (x2) Y219993 (x2) √
Square Body
MP700A5R fuse American round
A100P1200-4 N218397
MP700A6R fuse
D2123GB75V12CTF D098558 American round

MP825A4R fuses A70QS800-4 (x2) Z213830 (x2)
2 in parallel
MP825A5R American round
A100P1200-4 N218397
MP825A6R fuse
American round
MP900A4R D2123GB75V14CTF B090483 fuses A70QS600-4 (x3) Y219993 (x3)
3 in parallel
MP1200A4R A70QS700-4 (x3) E202772 (x3)
Square body American round
PC73UD13C630TF Q300509
MP1200A5R fuses fuses
(x3) (x3) A100P700-4 (x3) T223163 (x3)
3 in parallel 3 in parallel
MP1200A6R
MP1850A4R A70QS600-4 (x5) Y219993 (x5)
PC73UD13C700TF R300510
(x4) (x4) A100P600-4 (x5) A217373 (x5)
MP1850A6R
NOTE
The use of the A100P series fuses is limited to applications with L/R time constants of 30 ms or less. DC fusing is only required on four quadrant (R)
drives.
4.6.2 Alternative fusing

Please refer to section 12.2.2 Alternative fusing on page 160.

Table 4-16 Mentor MP size 1 drive thyristor I2t rating for 4.6.3 Internal field fuses
semiconductor fusing The internal field fuses provide protection to the field controller. The
fuses can rupture if there is a fault in the field circuit. The user should
Thyristor Latching Holding check the internal field fuses if the drive is tripping field loss (FdL) and
Model 2 2 current current the field controller is enabled.
I t (A s) IL IH
(mA) (mA)
Field regulator 400 Isolate the power before removing the internal field fuses.
MP25A4 MP25A5 1030
WARNING
MP45A4 MP45A5 3600
MP75A4 MP75A5 15000 Figure 4-9 Removing the internal field fuses
450
200
MP25A4(R) MP25A5(R) 1030
MP45A4(R) MP45A5(R) 3600
MP75A4(R) MP75A5(R) 15000
MP105A4 MP105A5
MP155A4 MP155A5
MP210A4 MP210A5
80000 300 200
MP105A4(R) MP105A5(R)
MP155A4(R) MP155A5(R)
MP210A4(R) MP210A5(R)
Table 4-17 Mentor MP size 2 drive thyristor I2t ratings for

semiconductor fusing
Latching Holding
Thyristor I2t
Model current current
(A2s) IL IH
(mA) (mA)
Field regulator 400
MP350A4(R)
MP550A4(R) 320000 200 150 Insert a flat-head screwdriver into the groove as shown above and lever
MP420A4(R) downwards to remove the fuse cover. Refer to section 4.6.1 Ferraz
Shawmut fuses on page 41 for fuse types.
MP350A6(R)
MP470A6(R) 281000
MP470A5(R)
MP700A4(R)
MP900A4(R) 1050000 300 - 2000 150 - 500
MP825A4(R)
MP700A6(R)
MP825A6(R) 1200000
MP825A5(R)
MP1200A4(R)
MP1200A6(R)
MP1200A5(R)
2720000 2000 1000
MP1850A4(R)
MP1850A6(R)
MP1850A5(R)
When using Mentor MP to control a high impedance load such as a high
current motor field winding, it becomes necessary to connect a resistor
across the A1 / A2 terminals to ensure sufficient current flows.
The required resistor value can be calculated as follows:
1. Determine the required output voltage
2. Calculate R = V / IL
3. Calculate P = IL2 x R to find the power rating
Example:
If V = 200 V and the required output current is 210 A,
then R = 200 V / 300 mA = 666 Ω
and P = 300 mA2 x 666 = 60 W

4.7 External suppressor resistor Figure 4-10 Location of external suppressor resistor terminals on
size 1 drives
The Mentor MP range of drives provide internal suppression of the
voltage overshoots created by commutation of the thyristors in the power To external suppression resistor
stage during the operation of the product. The internal suppression is
suitable for typical applications using recommended line reactors as
defined in section 4.4 Line reactors on page 38. The Mentor MP drives
provide the facility to allow for extra suppression for applications at the
boundaries of the drive's operating area. Applications which may require
an external suppression resistor to be installed have some or all the
following characteristics:
1. Supplies rated ≥10 kA with less than the recommend line reactance.
2. High line-to-line voltage
The recommended external suppressor resistor selections are shown in
Table 4-18.
Table 4-18 Recommended external suppressor resistors
Power Voltage Isolation
Resistance
Model rating rating voltage
kΩ W V V rms
MP25A4(R)
MP45A4(R)
MP75A4(R)
8.2 150 1100 2500
MP105A4(R)
MP155A4(R)
MP210A4(R)
MP25A5(R)
MP45A5(R)
MP75A5(R)
15 150 1400 2500
MP105A5(R) Figure 4-11 Location of external suppressor resistor terminals on
MP155A5(R) size 2 drives
MP210A5(R) To external suppression resistor
MP350A4(R)
MP420A4(R)
MP550A4(R)
MP700A4(R)
4.1 300 1100 2500
MP825A4(R)
MP900A4(R)
MP1200A4(R)
MP1850A4(R)
MP350A5(R)
MP350A6(R)
MP470A5(R)
MP470A6(R)
MP700A5(R)
MP700A6(R)
8.6 300 1600 2500
MP825A5(R)
MP825A6(R)
MP1200A5(R)
MP1200A6(R)
MP1850A5(R)
MP1850A6(R)
The following diagram shows the location of the external suppressor
resistor terminals above the L1 and L2 terminals:

Figure 4-12 Removal of bucket suppressor terminals cover on Table 4-19 Minimum allowable external suppression resistance
size 2C and 2D
Resistance
Model
Ω
MP25A4(R) MP25A5(R)
MP45A4(R) MP45A5(R)
MP75A4(R) MP75A5(R)
500 (maximum 150 W)
MP105A4(R) MP105A5(R)
MP155A4(R) MP155A5(R)
MP210A4(R) MP210A5(R)
MP350A5(R)
MP350A4(R)
MP350A6(R)
MP470A5(R)
MP420A4(R)
MP470A6(R)
MP550A4(R)
MP700A5(R)
MP700A4(R)
MP700A6(R)
500 (maximum 300 W)
MP825A5(R)
MP825A4(R)
MP825A6(R)
MP900A4(R)
1 2 MP1200A5(R)
MP1200A4(R)
MP1200A6(R)
MP1850A5(R)
MP1850A4(R)
MP1850A6(R)
Overload Protection
When using an external suppressor resistor of a resistance or
power rating less than the recommended rating, it is essential
that an overload protection device is incorporated in the
WARNING resistor circuit (refer to Figure 4-13).
1. Remove the 2 x M4 x 16 screws using a pozi drive screwdriver.
2. Remove the bucket suppressor terminal cover. External suppressor resistor protection parameter settings
Shielded cable should be used for bucket suppressor connections. For The software provided by the Mentor MP provides overload
UL applications the cable should comply with UL1063 in accordance protection. Failure to correctly configure Pr 11.62, Pr 11.63
with UL508a. and Pr 11.64, as described in the Mentor MP Advanced User
WARNING
For applications where the external suppressor resistance is chosen to Guide could lead to the resistor being overloaded.
be less than the recommended value for reasons of economy, it is Figure 4-13 Protection circuit for an external suppression resistor
essential that the resistance is not less than the minimum resistance
shown in Table 4-19. However selecting a resistance less than the
recommended value requires a more complex installation. The power
rating of the resistor can be selected by the user according to the L1 L1
dissipation required for the application, up to a maximum of the values
specified in Table 4-19. L2 L2
L3 L3
Drive
Main contactor
supply
Thermal protection
device
External
resistor
Start/Reset connections

4.8 Ground leakage

The ground leakage current depends on whether an external EMC filter is installed. Ground leakage currents for external EMC filters can be obtained
from the manufacturers data sheet for the filter being used.
With no external EMC filter:
<1 mA
4.8.1 Use of residual current device (RCD)
There are three common types of ELCB / RCD:
1. AC - detects AC fault currents
2. A - detects AC and pulsating DC fault currents (provided the DC current reaches zero at least once every half cycle)
3. B - detects AC, pulsating DC and smooth DC fault currents
• Type’s A and AC should never be used with Mentor MP drives.
• Type B must be used with all Mentor MP drives.
Only type B ELCB / RCD are suitable for use with Mentor MP drives.
WARNING
If an external EMC filter is used, a delay of at least 50 ms should be incorporated to ensure spurious trips are not seen. The leakage current is likely
to exceed the trip level if all of the phases are not energized simultaneously.
NOTE
The installer of the drive is responsible for ensuring compliance with the EMC regulations that apply where the drive is to be used.
4.9 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility)

The Mentor MP meets immunity requirements (specified in Table 12-44 Immunity compliance on page 175) with no special precautions.
NOTE N
Some special measures may be required in certain applications where the control cables are long or pass outside the building. See section
4.9.4 Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and connections outside a building on page 50.
Radio frequency noise emission can occur from any of the power connections i.e. main and auxiliary A.C connections, armature and field output
terminals.
For many applications in heavy industrial environments the noise emission is not sufficient to cause interference to other equipment.
When radio frequency emission must be limited the method used should be chosen to suit the situation.
4.9.1 Power drive systems standard
Compliance with the EMC standard for power drive systems (PDS) IEC 61800-3, EN 61800-3:2004 category C3
To meet this standard a standard armature filter and a standard field filter must be installed. See Table 4-20 Mentor MP and EMC filter cross
references on page 50 for EMC filter cross references.
Shielded cables must be used for the field and armature and the shields must be clamped to ground at both ends. The standard is met for cable
lengths up to 100 m.
4.9.2 Generic standard and PDS category C2
Compliance with the generic emission standards for industrial environments category IEC 61000-6-4 and EN 61000-6-4:2007, and the PDS standard
category C2.
To meet this standard a standard field filter and a high performance armature filter must be installed. See Table 4-20 Mentor MP and EMC filter cross
references on page 50 for EMC filter cross references.
Shielded cables must be used for the field and armature and the shields must be clamped to ground at both ends. The standard is met for cable
lengths up to 100 m.

4.9.3 EMC filter information

Refer to Figure 4-1 on page 34 for the location of the optional EMC filter. See Table 4-20 for EMC filters that can be sourced directly from Epcos and
Schaffner.
It is essential that line reactors be connected between the filter terminals and the power input terminals, as shown in Figure 4-1. Failure to
observe this requirement could result in destruction of the thyristors.
CAUTION
Table 4-20 Mentor MP and EMC filter cross references

Manufacturers part number
Epcos
Model Schaffner armature Schaffner armature Schaffner standard Epcos standard
armature
standard high performance field filter field filter
high performance
MP25A4(R)
B84143-A66-R105
MP45A4(R) FN3270H-80-35 FN3258-75-52
MP75A4(R) *B84143-A90-R105
FN3280H-8-29 W62400-T1262D004
MP105A4(R)
MP155A4(R) FN3270H-200-99 FN3258H-180-40 B84143BO250S080
MP210A4(R)
MP350A4(R)
MP420A4(R)
MP550A4(R)
FN3359-800-99
MP700A4(R)
FN3280H-25-33
MP825A4(R)
MP900A4(R)
MP1200A4(R)
FN3359-1600-99
MP1850A4(R)
* This filter is required if the input current to the Mentor MP will be greater than 66 Amperes.
Table 4-21 Emission compliance C1 Residential generic standard EN 61000-6-3:2007
EN 61800-3:2004 first environment unrestricted distribution
Filter
EN 61800-3:2004 defines the following:
Model Field: Standard • The first environment is one that includes residential premises. It
Field: Standard
None Armature:High
Armature: Standard also includes establishments directly connected without intermediate
performance
transformers to a low-voltage power supply network which supplies
MP25A4(R) buildings used for residential purposes.
MP45A4(R) • The second environment is one that includes all establishments
MP75A4(R) other than those directly connected to a low-voltage power supply
C3 network which supplies buildings used for residential purposes.
MP105A4(R)
• Restricted distribution is defined as a mode of sales distribution in
MP155A4(R) which the manufacturer restricts the supply of equipment to
MP210A4(R) suppliers, customers or users who separately or jointly have
MP350A4(R) technical competence in the EMC requirements of the application of
C4 C2 drives.
MP420A4(R)
MP550A4(R)
4.9.4 Surge immunity of control circuits - long
MP700A4(R) cables and connections outside a building
MP825A4(R) The input/output ports for the control circuits are designed for general
MP900A4(R) use within machines and small systems without any special precautions.
MP1200A4(R) In applications where they may be exposed to high-energy voltage
MP1850A4(R) surges, some special measures may be required to prevent malfunction
or damage. Surges may be caused by lightning or severe power faults in
Key (shown in decreasing order of permitted emission level): association with grounding arrangements which permit high transient
C4 EN 61800-3:2004 second environment, restricted distribution voltages between nominally grounded points. This is a particular risk
(Additional measures may be required to prevent interference) where the circuits extend outside the protection of a building.
C3 EN 61800-3:2004 second environment, unrestricted distribution
C2 Industrial generic standard EN 61000-6-4:2007
EN 61800-3:2004 first environment restricted distribution (The
following caution is required by EN 61800-3:2004)
This is a product of the restricted distribution class according

to IEC 61800-3. In a residential environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be
CAUTION required to take adequate measures.

As a general rule, if the circuits are to pass outside the building where Table 4-22 RJ45 connections
the drive is located, or if cable runs within a building exceed 30 m, some
Pin Function
additional precautions are advisable. One of the following techniques
should be used: 1 120 Ω Termination resistor
1. Galvanic isolation, i.e. do not connect the control 0 V terminal to 2 RX TX
ground. Avoid loops in the control wiring, i.e. ensure every control 3 0 V isolated
wire is accompanied by its return (0 V) wire. 4 +24 V (100 mA)
2. Shielded cable with additional power ground bonding. The cable 5 0 V isolated
shield may be connected to ground at both ends, but in addition the
6 TX enable
ground conductors at both ends of the cable must be bonded
together by a power ground cable (equipotential bonding cable) with 7 RX\ TX\
cross-sectional area of at least 10 mm2,or 10 times the area of the RX\ TX\(if termination resistors are
8
signal cable shield, or to suit the electrical safety requirements of the required, jumper (link) to pin 1)
plant. This ensures that fault or surge current passes mainly through Shell 0 V isolated
the ground cable and not in the signal cable shield. If the building or The communications port applies a two-unit load to the communications
plant has a well-designed common bonded network this precaution network. Connectors 2, 3, 7 and shield must always be made to the
is not necessary. serial communications port. Shielded cable must be used at all times.
3. Additional over-voltage suppression - for the analog and digital
inputs and outputs, a zener diode network or a commercially 4.10.1 Isolation of the serial communications port
available surge suppressor may be connected in parallel with the The serial PC communications port is double insulated and meets the
input circuit as shown in Figure 4-14 and Figure 4-15. requirements for SELV in EN 50178:1998.
Figure 4-14 Surge suppression for digital and unipolar inputs and In order to meet the requirements for SELV in IEC 60950 (IT
outputs equipment) it is necessary for the control computer to be
Signal from plant Signal to drive grounded. Alternatively, when a lap-top or similar device is
used which has no provision for grounding, an isolation
WARNING device must be incorporated in the communications lead.
30V zener diode
e.g. BZW50-15
An isolated serial communications lead has been designed to connect
0V 0V the drive to IT equipment (such as laptop computers), and is available
from the supplier of the drive. See Table 4-23 for details.
Figure 4-15 Surge suppression for analog and bipolar inputs and
Table 4-23 Isolated serial comms lead details
outputs
Part number Description
Signal from plant Signal to drive
4500-0087 CT EIA232 Comms cable
4500-0096 CT USB Comms cable
The “isolated serial communications” lead has reinforced insulation as
2 x 15V zener diode defined in IEC 60950 for altitudes up to 3,000 m.
e.g. 2xBZW50-15
NOTE N
When using the CT EIA232 Comms cable the available baud rate is
limited to 19.2 k baud.
0V 0V
4.10.2 Multi-drop network
Surge suppression devices are available as rail-mounting modules, e.g. The drive can be used on a 2 wire EIA485 multi-drop network using the
from Phoenix Contact: drive's serial communications port when the following guidelines are
Unipolar TT-UKK5-D/24 DC adhered to.
Bipolar TT-UKK5-D/24 AC Connections
These devices are not suitable for encoder signals or fast digital data The network should be a daisy chain arrangement and not a star,
networks because the capacitance of the diodes adversely affects the although short stubs to the drive are allowed.
signal. Most encoders have galvanic isolation of the signal circuit from The minimum connections are pins 2 (RX TX), 3 (isolated 0 V), 7 (RX\
the motor frame, in which case no precautions are required. For data TX\) and the shield.
networks, follow the specific recommendations for the particular
Pin 4 (+24 V) on each drive can be connected together but there is no
network.
power sharing mechanism between drives and therefore the maximum
4.10 Serial communications connections power available is the same as a single drive. (If pin 4 is not linked to the
The Mentor MP has a serial communications port (serial port) as other drives on the network and has an individual load then the
standard supporting two wire EIA(RS)-485 communications. See Table maximum power can be taken from pin 4 of each drive.)
4-22 for the connection details for the RJ45 connector. Termination resistors
Figure 4-16 Serial communications port If a drive is on the end of the network chain then pins 1 and 8 should be
linked together. This will connect an internal 120 Ω termination resistor
between RXTX and RX\TX\. (If the end unit is not a drive or the user
wishes to use their own termination resistor, a 120 Ω termination resistor
1
should be connected between RXTX and RX\TX\ at the end unit.)
If the host is connected to a single drive then termination resistors
8 should not be used unless the baud rate is high.

CT Comms cable
The CT Comms cable can be used on a multi-drop network but should
only be used occasionally for diagnostic and set up purposes. The
network must also be made up entirely of Mentor MPs.
If the CT Comms cable is to be used, then pin 6 (TX enable) should be
connected on all drives and pin 4 (+24 V) should be linked to at least one
drive in order to supply power to the converter in the cable. Only one CT
Comms cable can be used on a network.
4.11 Shield connections
These instructions must be followed to ensure suppression of radio-
frequency emission and good noise immunity in the encoder circuit. It is
recommended that the instructions for the connection of the encoder
cable be followed closely and, to use the grounding bracket and
grounding clamp supplied with the drive, to terminate the shields at the
drive.
4.11.1 Motor cables
Use of a motor cable with an overall shield for the armature and field A faston tab is located on the grounding bracket for the purpose of
circuits may be needed if there is a critical EMC emissions requirement. connecting the drive 0 V to ground should the user wish to do so.
Connect the shield of the motor cable to the ground terminal of the motor Figure 4-18 Grounding of signal cable shields using the
frame using a jumper (link) that is as short as possible and not grounding bracket
exceeding 50 mm (2 in) long. A full 360° termination of the shield to the
terminal housing of the motor is beneficial.
4.11.2 Encoder cable
To obtain the maximum benefit from shielding, use cable with an overall
shield and separate shields on individual twisted pairs. Refer to section
4.15 Connecting an encoder on page 57.
4.11.3 Control cables
It is recommended that signal cables should be shielded. This is
essential for encoder cables, and strongly recommended for analog
signal cables. For digital signals it is not necessary to use shielded
cables within a panel, but this is recommended for external circuits,
especially for inputs where a momentary signal causes a change of state
(i.e. latching inputs).
4.11.4 Grounding hardware

The drive is supplied with a grounding bracket, to facilitate EMC
compliance. This provides a convenient method for direct grounding of
cable shields without the use of "pig-tails". Cable shields can be bared
and clamped to the grounding bracket using metal clips, clamps or cable
ties. Note that the shield must in all cases be continued through the
clamp to the intended drive terminal in accordance with the connection
details for the specific signal.
Figure 4-17 Installation of grounding bracket
4.12 Connecting the fan on size 2C and 2D

drives
A supply needs to be connected to the dual fan unit enclosed within the
lower duct on Mentor MP size 2C and 2D. The fans can be configured
for a 230 Vac (factory setting) or 115 Vac supply as shown below on the
label next to the fan connections. When connecting the fan supply, the
screws should be tightened with a maximum torque of 1.2 N m (0.88 Ib
ft) to 2 N m (1.47 Ib ft).
Figure 4-19 Fan connection
Loosen the ground connection (2 x M5 x 10) screws using T25 Torx

driver and slide the grounding bracket in the direction shown. Once in
place, re-tighten the ground connection M5 x 10 screws to 3 N m (2.21 Ib
ft).

Table 4-24 Fan supply specification

The control circuits are isolated from the power circuits in the
Fan configuration Supply specification drive by basic insulation (single insulation) only. The installer
230 V 230 V ± 10 % must ensure that the external control circuits are insulated
115 V 115 V ± 10 % from human contact by at least one layer of insulation
WARNING (supplementary insulation) rated for use at the AC supply
Cabling should be 300 V rated. Rated for at least 3 A continuous in line voltage.
with local wiring regulations. Cabling should be protected 3 A non time
delay fuses i.e. gG, Class CC or Class J and rated for at least 300 V, in
accordance with local wiring regulations.
Status relay contacts are over-voltage category II.
4.13 Control connections
Refer to Figure 4-20 to understand the connection of the different control WARNING
connections.
4.13.1 General
A fuse or other over-current protection should be installed to
Table 4-25 The control connections consist of: the relay circuit.
Control parameters Terminal WARNING
Function Qty
available number
Differential analog Destination, offset, invert, Table 4-26 Control connection recommended cable sizes
1 5,6
input scaling Terminal Minimum cable size Maximum cable size
Single ended analog Mode, offset, scaling,
2 7,8 Machine armature
input invert, destination 5 mm2 10 AWG
Auxiliary
Analog output 2 Source, mode, scaling, 9,10
Control I/O
Digital input 3
Destination, invert, logic
27, 28, 29 0.5 mm2 20 AWG 1.31 mm2 16 AWG
select Encoder
Input / output mode select, Tachogenerator
2.5 mm2 12 AWG
Digital input / output 3 destination / source, invert, 24, 25, 26 Status relays
logic select
51, 52, 53
Relay 2 Source, invert
61, 62, 63
Drive enable 1 Logic select 31
+10 V User output 1 4
+24 V User output 1 22
1, 3, 11,
0 V common 6
21, 23, 30
+24 V External input 1 2
Key:
Destination Indicates the parameter which is being controlled by the
parameter: terminal / function
Source
Indicates the parameter being output by the terminal
parameter:
Mode Analog - indicates the mode of operation of the terminal,
parameter: i.e. voltage 0-10 V, current 4-20 mA etc.
Digital - indicates the mode of operation of the terminal,
i.e. positive / negative logic, open collector.
All analog terminal functions can be programmed in menu 7.
All digital terminal functions (including the relays) can be programmed in
menu 8.
The setting of Pr 6.04 can cause the function of digital inputs T25 to T27
to change. For more information, refer to the Mentor MP Advanced User
Guide.
If the control circuits are to be connected to other circuits

classified as Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) (e.g. to a
personal computer), an additional isolating barrier must be
WARNING
included in order to maintain the SELV classification.
If any of the digital inputs (including the drive enable input)

are connected in parallel with an inductive load (i.e.
contactor or motor brake) then suitable suppression (i.e.
diode or varistor) should be used on the coil of the load. If no
CAUTION suppression is used then over voltage spikes can cause
damage to the digital inputs on the drive.

Figure 4-20 Default terminal functions 4.14 General

4.14.1 Control terminal specification
1 0 V common
Common connection for all external
Function
devices
MA1
MA2
2 +24 V external input

To supply the control circuit
Function without providing a supply to the
power stage
Nominal voltage +24.0 Vdc
Minimum continuous operating
+19.2 Vdc
voltage
Maximum continuous operating
+30.0 Vdc
voltage
Encoder Minimum start-up voltage 21.6 Vdc
Status Status A A\ B B\ 1 11
Tacho Recommended power supply 60 W 24 Vdc nominal
relay 1 relay 2 Arm
51 52 53 61 62 63 41 42 current Polarized signal Recommended fuse 3 A, 50 Vdc
connectors
+ _ Z Z\ + 0 21 31
1 0V
3 0 V common
2 +24V input Common connection for all external
Function
Analog speed reference 1 devices
3 0V
Single-ended 5
4 +10 V user output
Non-inverting input
signal
6 Inverting input Function Supply for external analog devices
Voltage tolerance ±1 %
0V Nominal output current 10 mA
Non-inverting input Protection Current limit and trip @12 mA
Differential signal
Inverting input
4 +10V output Precision reference analog input 1

Analog speed
reference 2 7 Analog input 2 5 Non-inverting input
6 Inverting input
Default function Speed reference
Bipolar differential analog
Analog input 3 8 Analog input 3* Type of input (For single-ended use, connect terminal 6
(Motor thermistor) to terminal 3)
Full scale voltage range ± 10.0 V ± 1.5 %
9 Analog output 1
Speed Absolute maximum
10 Analog output 2 +30 V, -18 V relative to 0 V
voltage range
Armature
Working common mode voltage
current ± 16 V
11 0V range
Input resistance 94 k Ω
21 0V Resolution 14-bit plus sign
22 +24V output Monotonic Yes
Dead band None
23 0V
Jumps None
At speed 24 Digital I/O 1
Maximum offset ±5 mV
Reset 25 Digital I/O 2 Maximum non linearity ±0.05 % of Full scale voltage range
Run forward 26 Digital I/O 3 Maximum gain asymmetry ±0.2 %
Run reverse 27 Digital input 4

Input filter bandwidth single pole ~1 kHz
Analog input 1/ Analog input 1 250 μs if configured with the destination as
input 2 select 28 Digital input 5 Sampling period Pr 1.36, Pr 1.37, Pr 3.19 and Pr 4.08. 4 ms
Analog input 2
Jog forward select 29 Digital input 6 for all other destinations
30 0V
31 Drive enable
* Thermistor disabled by USA defaults.

7 Analog input 2 9 Analog output 1

Default function Speed reference 10 Analog output 2
Type of input Unipolar voltage and current
Terminal 9 default function Speed feedback
Mode controlled by... Pr 7.11
Terminal 10 default function Current feedback
Operating in Voltage mode
Bipolar single-ended voltage or unipolar
Full scale voltage range ± 10.0 V ± 0.5 % Type of output
single-ended current
Maximum offset ± 33 mV Mode controlled by...
Absolute maximum voltage ± 36 V relative to 0 V Operating in Voltage mode (default)
Input resistance >94 kΩ Full scale voltage range ± 10 V ± 5 %
Operating in current mode Maximum offset ± 40 mV
0 to 20 mA ± 5 %, 20 to 0 mA ± 5 %, Maximum output current ± 35 mA
Current ranges
4 to 20 mA ± 5 %, 20 to 4 mA ± 5 %
Load resistance 1 kΩ min
Maximum offset 120 μA
Protection 35 mA max. Short circuit protection
Absolute maximum voltage ± 36 V
Operating in current mode
Equivalent input resistance ~100 Ω 0 to 20 mA ±5 %
Current ranges
Common to all modes 4 to 20 mA ±5 %
Resolution 10 bit plus sign Maximum offset 350 μA
250 μs if configured with the destination as Open circuit voltage +15 V
Sampling period Pr 1.36, Pr 1.37, Pr 3.19 and Pr 4.08. 4 ms
Load resistance 600 Ω max
for all other destinations
Common to all modes
Resolution 10-bit plus sign
8 Analog input 3 250 μs if configured with the destination as
Default function Thermistor for all other destinations
Unipolar voltage, unipolar current and
Type of input
thermistor
Input mode controlled by... Pr 7.15 (in01, 0.81) 11 0 V common
Operating in Voltage mode
Voltage range ± 10.0 V ± 0.5 % Function
devices
Maximum offset ± 33 mV
Absolute maximum voltage range ± 36 V relative to 0 V
Input resistance >94 kΩ 21 0 V common
Operating in current mode
0 to 20 mA ± 5 %, 20 to 0 mA ± 5 %, Function
Current ranges devices
4 to 20 mA ± 5 %, 20 to 4 mA ± 5 %
Maximum offset 120 μA
Absolute maximum voltage ± 36 V max 22 +24 V user output
Equivalent input resistance ~ 100 Ω Function Supply for external digital devices
Operating in thermistor input mode Nominal output current 200 mA (including all digital I/O)
Internal pull-up voltage <5 V Maximum output current 240 mA (including all digital I/O)
Trip threshold resistance 3.3 kΩ ± 10 % Protection Current limit and trip
Reset resistance 1.8 kΩ ± 10 %
Short-circuit detection resistance 50 Ω ± 40 %
Common to all modes 23 0 V common
Resolution 10 bit + sign Common connection for all external
Function
250 μs if configured with the destination as devices
for all other destinations

24 Digital I/O 1 Drive commissioning output

Instantaneous armature current
25 Digital I/O 2 Function
feedback
26 Digital I/O 3 Type of output Unipolar single-ended voltage
Full scale voltage range 10 V ± 5 % (10 V = 2 x Motor rated current)
Terminal 24 default function AT SPEED output
Maximum offset 7 mV
Terminal 25 default function DRIVE RESET input
~25 mA max. Short circuit protection to
Terminal 26 default function RUN FORWARD input Protection
ground (0 V).
Positive or negative logic digital inputs,
Type positive or negative logic push-pull outputs
or open collector outputs Full scale range of drive
Input / output mode controlled by... Pr 8.31, Pr 8.32 and Pr 8.33 Model
commissioning output
Operating as an input 2.29 x Drive rated current
Logic mode controlled by... Pr 8.29 MP25A4(R) MP25A5(R)
(Pr 11.32)
Absolute maximum applied voltage 2.30 x Drive rated current
+30 V, -18 V relative to 0 V MP45A4(R) MP45A5(R)
range
(Pr 11.32)
Impedance 6 kΩ
2.42 x Drive rated current
Input thresholds 10.0 V ± 0.8 V MP75A4(R) MP75A5(R)
(Pr 11.32)
Operating as an output 2.29 x Drive rated current
MP105A4(R) MP105A5(R)
Open collector outputs selected Pr 8.30 (Pr 11.32)
Nominal maximum output current 200 mA (total including terminal 22) 2.30 x Drive rated current
MP155A4(R) MP155A5(R)
Maximum output current 240 mA (total including terminal 22) (Pr 11.32)
Common to all modes 2.41 x Drive rated current
MP210A4(R) MP210A5(R)
Voltage range 0 V to +24 V (Pr 11.32)
250 μs if configured with the destination as 2.73 x Drive rated current
MP350A4(R) MP350A5(R) MP350A6(R)
Sampling period Pr 6.35 or Pr 6.36. 4 ms for all other (Pr 11.32)
destinations 2.27 x Drive rated current
MP420A4(R)
(Pr 11.32)
27 Digital input 4 3.34 x Drive rated current
MP470A5(R) MP470A6(R)
(Pr 11.32)
28 Digital input 5 2.85 x Drive rated current
MP550A4(R)
29 Digital input 6 (Pr 11.32)
Terminal 27 default function RUN REVERSE input MP700A4(R) MP700A5(R) MP700A6(R)
(Pr 11.32)
Terminal 28 default function LOCAL/REMOTE select
Terminal 29 default function JOG SELECT input MP825A4(R) MP825A5(R) MP825A6(R)
(Pr 11.32)
Type of input Negative or positive logic digital inputs
Logic mode controlled by... Pr 8.29 MP900A4(R)
(Pr 11.32)
Voltage range 0 V to + 24 V 3.44 x Drive rated current
Absolute maximum applied voltage MP1200A4(R) MP1200A5(R) MP1200A6(R)
+30 V, -18 V relative to 0 V (Pr 11.32)
range
Impedance 6kΩ MP1850A4(R) MP1850A5(R) MP1850A6(R)
(Pr 11.32)
Input thresholds 10.0 V ± 0.8 V
250 μs if configured with the destination as
Sampling period Pr 6.35 or Pr 6.36. 4 ms for all other 41 Tachogenerator positive input
destinations
42 Tachogenerator negative input
30 0 V common Speed feedback inputs for
Function
tachogenerator feedback device
Function Maximum voltage 300 V
devices
Feedback scaling controlled by Pr 3.51 (Fb02, 0.72)
Sampling period 4 ms
31 Drive enable
Function Drive enable
Type Positive or negative logic digital input Status relay contacts are over-voltage category II.
Absolute maximum applied voltage
+30 V, -18 V relative to 0 V WARNING
range
Input threshold 10.0 V ± 0.8 V
A fuse or other over-current protection should be installed to
the relay circuit.
WARNING

51 Relay 1 common 4.15 Connecting an encoder

Additional measures to prevent unwanted emission of radio frequency
52 Relay 1 normally closed noise are only required where the installation is subject to specific
requirements for radio frequency emission.
53 Relay 1 normally open
Encoder connections:
Default function Drive OK indicator
240 Vac, installation over-voltage category To ensure suppression of radio frequency emission, observe the
Contact voltage rating
II following:
5 A AC 240 V • Use an encoder with the correct impedance
Contact maximum current rating 5 A DC 30 V resistive load
• Use a cable with individually shielded twisted pairs.
0.5 A DC 30 V inductive load (L/R = 40 ms)
• Connect the cable shields to 0 V at both the drive and the encoder,
Contact minimum recommended
rating
12 V, 100 mA using the shortest possible links (pig-tails).
• The cable should not be interrupted. If interruptions are unavoidable,
Default contact position Closed when power on and drive OK
ensure the absolute minimum length of "pig-tail" in the shield
connections at each interruption. Use a connection method that
provides substantial metallic clamps for the cable shield
terminations.
61 Relay 2 common
The above applies where the encoder body is isolated from the motor
62 Relay 2 normally closed and where the encoder circuit is isolated from the encoder body. Where
there is no isolation between the encoder circuits and motor body, and in
63 Relay 2 normally open
case of doubt, the following additional requirements must be observed to
Default function Contactor enable give the best possible noise immunity.
240 Vac, installation over-voltage category • The shields must be directly clamped to the encoder and to the
Contact voltage rating
II
drives grounding bracket. This may be achieved by clamping of the
5 A AC 240 V
individual shields or by providing an additional overall shield that is
Contact maximum current rating 5 A DC 30 V resistive load
0.5 A DC 30 V inductive load (L/R = 40 ms) clamped.
Contact minimum recommended NOTE
12 V, 100 mA
rating The recommendations of the encoder manufacturer should also be
Default contact position
Closed when AC or DC contactor is adhered to for the encoder connections.
required to be closed.
Sampling period 4 ms NOTE N
In order to obtain maximum noise immunity for any application, double
NOTE
shielded cable should be used as shown.
The relays are not UL rated when used with inductive loads.
In some cases single shielding of each pair of differential signals cables,
Feedback device connections or a single overall shield with individual shield on the thermistor
Ab, Fd, Fr encoders connections is sufficient. In these cases all the shields should be
A Channel A, Frequency or Forward inputs connected to ground and 0 V at both ends.
If the 0 V is required to be left floating a cable with individual shields and
A\ Channel A\, Frequency\ or Forward\ inputs
an overall shield must be used.
B Channel B, Direction or Reverse inputs Figure 4-21 and Figure 4-22 illustrate the preferred construction of cable
and the method of clamping. The outer sheath of the cable should be
B\ Channel B\, Direction\ or Reverse\ inputs stripped back enough to allow the clamp to be installed. The shield must
not be broken or opened at this point. The clamps should be installed
Z Marker pulse channel Z close to the drive or feedback device, with the ground connections made
to a ground plate or similar metallic ground surface.
Z\ Marker pulse channel Z\
Figure 4-21 Feedback cable, twisted pair
Type EIA 485 differential receivers
Cable overall shield
Maximum input frequency 500 kHz
Line loading <2 unit loads
Line termination components 100 Ω for 2 - 5 V range (switchable)
Twisted
Working common mode range +12 V to –7 V pair Cable
cable
Absolute maximum applied voltage
± 25 V
relative to 0 V
Absolute maximum applied differential
± 25 V
voltage Twisted pair shield
+ + supply
0V 0V

Figure 4-22 Feedback cable connections

Connection
at drive
Shield
connection
to 0V
Twisted
Cable pair
shield shield
Ground clamp Cable

on shield
Cable Twisted
shield pair
shield
Shield
connection
to 0V
Connection
at motor
Table 4-27 Encoder types

Pr 3.38
(Fb07, 0.77) Description
setting
Quadrature incremental encoder with or without marker
Ab (0)
pulse
Incremental encoder with frequency pulses and
Fd (1)
direction, with or without marker pulse
Incremental encoder with forward pulses and reverse
Fr (2)
pulses, with or without marker pulse

5 Getting started
This chapter introduces the user interfaces, menu structure and security level of the drive.
5.1 Understanding the display

There are two types of keypad available for the Mentor MP. The SM-Keypad has an LED display, and the MP-Keypad has an LCD display.
5.1.1 SM-Keypad (LED) 5.1.2 MP-Keypad (LCD)
The display consists of two horizontal rows of 7 segment LED displays. The display consists of three lines of text.
The upper display shows the drive status or the current menu and The top line shows the drive status or the current menu and parameter
parameter number being viewed. number being viewed on the left, and the parameter value or the specific
trip type on the right.
The lower display shows the parameter value or the specific trip type.
The lower two lines show the parameter name or the help text.
Figure 5-1 SM-Keypad Figure 5-2 MP-Keypad
Upper display
Lower display
Mode (black) button Mode (black) button
Help button
Control buttons Control buttons
User defined Rev (blue) button Joypad User defined Rev (blue) button Joypad
Stop/reset (red) button Stop/reset (red) button
Start (green) button Start (green) button
NOTE
The red stop button is also used to reset the drive.

The SM-Keypad and the MP-Keypad can indicate when a SMARTCARD access is taking place or when the second motor map is active (menu 21).
These are indicated on the displays as follows.
SM-Keypad MP-Keypad
The decimal point after the fourth digit in the The symbol ‘CC’ will appear in the lower left
SMARTCARD access taking place
upper display will flash. hand corner of the display
The decimal point after the third digit in the The symbol ‘Mot2’ will appear in the lower left
Second motor map active
upper display will flash. hand corner of the display
The symbol ‘Opx’ will appear in the left hand
Solutions Module parameters displayed
corner of the display
5.2 Keypad operation

Control buttons
The keypad consists of:
1. Joypad - used to navigate the parameter structure and change parameter values.
2. Mode button - used to change between the display modes – parameter view, parameter edit, status.
3. Three control buttons - used to control the drive if keypad mode is selected.
4. Help button (MP-Keypad only) - displays text briefly describing the selected parameter.
The Help button toggles between other display modes and parameter help mode. The up and down functions on the joypad scroll the help text to
allow the whole string to be viewed. The right and left functions on the joypad have no function when help text is being viewed.
The display examples in this section show the SM-Keypad, seven segment, LED display. The examples are the same for the MP-Keypad, The
exceptions is that the information displayed on the lower row on the SM-Keypad is displayed on the right hand side of the top row on the MP-Keypad.

The display examples in this section show the SM-Keypad 7 segment LED display. The examples are the same for the MP-Keypad except that the
information displayed on the lower row on the SM-Keypad is displayed on the right hand side of the top row on the MP-Keypad.
Figure 5-3 Display modes
Status
Mode
(Display
not
flashing)
Timeout** Timeout** Timeout**
To enter Parameter
Mode, press key or To return to
Status Mode,
press key
Parameter When returning

Mode to Parameter
(Upper Mode use the Temporary
display Parameter
*
flashing) Mode
keys to select (Upper display
Use * keys another parameter flashing)
to select parameter for editing to change, if
required
To exit Edit Mode,

press key
To enter Edit Mode,
press key
RO R/W
parameter parameter
Edit Mode
(Character to be edited in lower line of display flashing)
Change parameter values using keys.
* Can only be used to move between menus if L2 access has been enabled Pr 11.44 (SE14, 0.35)
**Time-out defined by Pr 11.41 (default value = 240 s).
Figure 5-4 Mode examples
Parameter
Status Mode
View Mode
Healthy Status Alarm Status Trip Status
Menu 5. Parameter 5 Drive status = tripped

Pr 5.05 value Trip type (UV = undervolts)
Do not change parameter values without careful

consideration; incorrect values may cause damage or a
safety hazard.
WARNING
NOTE
When changing the values of parameters, make a note of the new
values in case they need to be entered again.
NOTE
For new parameter-values to apply after the AC supply to the drive is
interrupted, new values must be saved (section 5.8 Saving
parameters on page 64).

5.3 Menu 0 (sub block) Coding

The coding defines the attributes of the parameter as follows.
Menu 0 can be accessed by 2 methods:
1. Pr 11.44 (SE14, 0.35) = 0. Sub block mode. Coding Attribute
2. Pr 11.44 (SE14, 0.35) <>0. Linear mode.
{X.XX} Copied Menu 0 or advanced parameter
Menu 23 contains the parameters to allow menu 0 to be customized in Bit 1 bit parameter: ‘On’ or ‘OFF’ on the display
sub block mode. The first sub block is a user defined area (USEr) which
Bi Bipolar parameter
is configured by the parameters in menu 22. As default there are no
parameters configured to the user sub block and so it is empty. The next Uni Unipolar parameter
7 sub blocks are pre-defined. Access to the pre-defined blocks is Txt Text: the parameter uses text strings instead of numbers.
enabled or disabled by Pr 23.03 to Pr 23.09. SP Spare: not used
Movement between sub blocks is achieved with the left and right keys. Filtered: some parameters which can have rapidly changing
Pr 23.01 contains all the sub block headers. FI values are filtered when displayed on the drive keypad for
easy viewing.
Table 5-1 and Figure 5-5 show the result of the direction keys when
Destination pointer parameter: This parameter can be used
Pr 11.44 (SE14, 0.35) is set to L1 (0). When Pr 11.44 (SE14, 0.35) is not
0 the left and right keys will allow access to the advance parameter set DE to set up the location (i.e. menu/parameter number) where
the destination data is to be routed.
and menu 0 will become a linear menu.
Variable maximum: the maximum of this parameter can
Table 5-1 Keypad navigation VM
vary.
Starting location Action Finishing location Decimal place: indicates the number of decimal places used
DP
Right Next header by this parameter.
Left Previous header No default: when defaults are loaded (except when the drive
Header ND is manufactured or on EEPROM failure) this parameter is
Up First parameter in header block
not modified.
Down Last parameter in header block
Rating dependant: this parameter is likely to have different
Right Next header
values and ranges with drives of different voltage and
Left Previous header current ratings. Parameters with this attribute will not be
Parameter
Up Next parameter in header block transferred to the destination drive by a SMARTCARD when
Down Previous parameter in header block RA the rating of the destination drive is different from the source
drive if the drive voltage ratings are different or the file is a
When moving to the user block header, the user block header is only
parameter file. However, the value will be transferred if only
displayed if there are some valid parameters in the block. When moving
the current rating is different and the file is a differences
between pre-defined header blocks the pre-defined header block is only
from default type file.
displayed if the pre-defined block is enabled.
Not copied: not transferred to or from SMARTCARD during
When moving between parameters within a block, only valid parameters NC
copying.
are displayed.
NV Not visible: not visible on the keypad.
Figure 5-5 Sub block navigation
PT Protected: cannot be used as a destination.
User save: saved in drive EEPROM when the user initiates
US
a parameter save.
RW Read/write: can be written by the user.
RO Read only: can only be read by the user
Bit default one/unsigned: Bit parameters with this flag set to
one have a default of one (all other bit parameters have a
SEt UP BU
default of zero. Non-bit parameters are unipolar if this flag is
SE00 one.
Power-down save: parameter automatically saved in drive
EEPROM when the under volts (UV) trip occurs. Power-
PS
SE13 down save parameters are also saved in the drive when the
user initiates a parameter save.
diAGnoS
di01
23.01 Sub block headers
RO Txt NC PT BU
di14 USEr (0), SEt UP (1),
triPS diAGnoS (2), triPS (3), SP
Ú LOOP (4), SintEr (5), Fb SP
Ö USEr (0)
(6), inPut (7)
inPut
Defines the sub block headers. Can be used by the MP-Keypad to
in01 display the same strings as the SM-Keypad.
in10
Headers

Diagnostic
23.02 Binary sum of pre-defined sub block enables
RO NC PT BU Menu 0 Parameter Description Display
Ú 0 to 127 Ö 0 0.36 1.01 Speed reference selected di01
0.37 1.03 Pre-ramp reference di02
The OR of Pr 23.03 to Pr 23.09. To be used by the MP-Keypad. 0.38 2.01 Post ramp reference di03
0.39 3.01 Final speed reference di04
Parameter Value
0.40 3.02 Speed feedback di05
23.03 1
0.41 3.04 Speed controller output di06
23.04 2
0.42 4.03 Torque demand di07
23.05 4
0.43 4.01 Current magnitude di08
23.06 8
0.44 5.56 Field current feedback di09
23.07 16
0.45 5.02 Armature voltage di10
23.08 32
0.46 1.11 Reference enabled indicator di11
23.09 64
0.47 1.12 Reverse selected indicator di12
0.48 1.13 Jog selected indicator di13
23.03 - 23.09 Pre-defined sub block enable
0.49 11.29 Software version di14
RW Bit US BU
0.50 0.00 Spare
Ú 0 to1 Ö 1
Trips
When this parameter is set to 1 the associated pre-defined sub block is Menu 0 Parameter Description Display
accessible. When this parameter is 0 the associated pre-defined block is
0.51 10.20 Trip 0 tr01
bypassed.
0.52 10.21 Trip 1 tr02
Parameter Description Display 0.53 10.22 Trip 2 tr03
23.03 Set up SEt UP 0.54 10.23 Trip 3 tr04
23.04 Diagnostic diAGnoS 0.55 10.24 Trip 4 tr05
23.05 Trips triPS 0.56 10.25 Trip 5 tr06
0.57 10.26 Trip 6 tr07
23.06 Speed loop SP LOOP
0.58 10.27 Trip 7 tr08
23.07 Serial interface SintEr
0.59 10.28 Trip 8 tr09
23.08 Speed feedback Fb SP
0.60 10.29 Trip 9 tr10
23.09 IO InPut
Speed loop
5.4 Pre-defined sub blocks Menu 0 Parameter Description Display
Speed controller
Menu 0 Parameter Description Display 0.61 3.10 SP01
proportional gain
0.01 to Configured by Pr 22.01 to 0.62 3.11 Speed controller integral gain SP02
0.20 Pr 22.20 Speed controller differential
0.63 3.12 SP03
feedback gain
Set-up
0.64 0.00 Spare
Menu 0 Parameter Description Display 0.65 0.00 Spare
0.21 1.00 Parameter 0 SE00 Serial interface

0.22 1.07 Minimum reference clamp SE01
Menu 0 Parameter Description Display
0.23 1.06 Maximum reference clamp SE02
0.66 11.25 Baud rate Si01
0.24 2.11 Acceleration rate SE03
0.67 11.23 Serial address Si02
0.25 2.21 Deceleration rate SE04 0.68 0.00 Spare
0.26 1.14 Reference selector SE05 0.69 0.00 Spare
0.27 5.09 Armature rated voltage SE06 0.70 0.00 Spare
0.28 5.07 Motor rated current SE07
0.29 5.08 Base speed SE08
0.30 11.42 Parameter copying SE09
0.31 5.70 Rated field current SE10
0.32 5.73 Rated field voltage SE11
0.33 5.77 Enable field control SE12
0.34 5.12 Autotune SE13
0.35 11.44 Security status SE14

Speed feedback 5.6 Menu structure

Menu 0 Parameter Description Display The drive parameter structure consists of menus and parameters.
0.71 3.26 Speed feedback selector Fb01 The drive initially powers up in sub menu mode. Once Level 2 access
Tachometer rating (V/1000 (L2) has been enabled (refer to Pr 11.44 (SE14, 0.35)) the left and right
0.72 3.51 Fb02 buttons are used to navigate between numbered menus.
rpm)
0.73 3.53 Tachometer input mode Fb03 For further information, refer to section 5.13 Parameter access level and
Tachometer speed security on page 65.
0.74 3.52 Fb04
feedback Figure 5-7 Menu structure
Drive encoder lines per
0.75 3.34 Fb05
revolution Menu 0 Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 22 Menu 23
0.76 3.36 Encoder supply Fb06 Pr 0.00 Pr 1.00 Pr 2.00 Pr 22.00 Pr 23.00
Pr 0.01 Pr 1.01 Pr 2.01 Pr 22.01 Pr 23.01
0.77 3.38 Encoder type Fb07
Pr 0.02 Pr 1.02 Pr 2.02 Pr 22.02 Pr 23.02
0.78 3.39 Encoder termination select Fb08
0.79 3.27 Encoder speed feedback Fb09
0.80 0.00 Spare Pr 0.88 Pr 1.49 Pr 2.39 Pr 22.38 Pr 23.09
Moves
Pr 0.89 Pr 1.50 Pr 2.40 Pr 22.39 Pr 23.10 between
IO Pr 0.90 Pr 1.51 Pr 2.41 Pr 22.40 Pr 23.11 parameters

0.81 7.15 Analog input 3 mode in01
Moves between Menus
0.82 7.01 Analog input 1 in02
0.83 7.02 Analog input 2 in03 The menus and parameters roll over in both directions.
0.84 7.03 Analog input 3 in04 For example:
0.85 8.01 I/O state 1 in05 • If the last parameter is displayed, a further press will cause the
display to roll-over and show the first parameter.
0.86 8.02 I/O state 2 in06
• When changing between menus the drive remembers which
0.87 8.03 I/O state 3 in07 parameter was last viewed in a particular menu and will display that
0.88 8.04 I state 4 in08 parameter. The menus and parameters roll over in both directions.
0.89 8.05 I state 5 in09
0.90 8.06 I state 6 in10
For more information on the sub block function please refer to the
Mentor MP Advanced User Guide.
5.5 Menu 0 (linear)

Menu 0 is used to bring together various commonly used parameters for
basic easy set up of the drive.
Appropriate parameters are copied from the advanced menus into menu
0 and thus exist in both locations.
For further information, refer to section 5.3 Menu 0 (sub block) on
page 61.
Figure 5-6 Menu 0 copying
Menu 2
2.21 5
Menu 0
Menu 1
0.04 5
0.05 0
0.06 150
1.14 0
Menu 4
4.07 150

5.7 Advanced menus Table 5-3 Menu 40 parameter descriptions
The advanced menus consist of groups or parameters appropriate to a Parameter Range(Ú)

specific function or feature of the drive. Menus 0 to 23 can be viewed on 40.00 Parameter 0 0 to 32767
both keypads. Menus 40 and 41 are specific to the MP-Keypad (LCD). English (0), Custom (1), French (2),
40.01 Language selection
Menus 70 to 91 can be viewed with an MP-Keypad (LCD) only when an German (3), Spanish (4), Italian (5)
SM-Applications module is installed. 40.02 Software version 999999
Table 5-2 Advanced menu descriptions Idle (0), Save (1), Restore (2),
40.03 Save to flash
Menu Description LED LCD Default (3)
Commonly used basic set up parameters for quick 40.04 LCD contrast 0 to 31
0 9 9 Drive and attribute
/ easy programming
40.05 database upload was Updated (0), Bypass (1)
1 Speed reference 9 9
bypassed
2 Ramps 9 9
Browsing favourites
3 Speed feedback and speed control 9 9 40.06 Normal (0), Filter (1)
control
4 Torque and current control 9 9 40.07 Keypad security code 0 to 999
5 Motor control including field regulator 9 9 Communication Disable (0), Slot1 (1), Slot2 (2),
40.08
6 Sequencer and clock 9 9 channel selection Slot3 (3), Slave (4), Direct (5)
7 Analog I/O 9 9 40.09 Hardware key code 0 to 999
8 Digital I/O 9 9 Drive node ID
40.10 0 to 255
(Address)
Programmable logic, motorized pot and binary
9 9 9 Flash ROM memory
sum 40.11 4Mbit (0), 8Mbit (1)
size
10 Status and trips 9 9
String database
11 General drive set-up 9 9 40.19 0 to 999999
version number
12 Threshold detectors and variable selectors 9 9 Screen saver strings
40.20 None (0), Default (1), User (2)
13 Position control 9 9 and enable
14 User PID controller 9 9 40.21 Screen saver interval 0 to 600
15 Solutions Module set-up 9 9 Turbo browse time
40.22 0 to 200 ms
16 Solutions Module set-up 9 9 interval
Unidrive SP (0),
17 Solutions Module set-up 9 9
40.23 Product identification Commander SK (1), Mentor MP (2),
18 Application menu 1 9 9 Affinity (4), Digitax ST (5)
19 Application menu 2 9 9
20 Application menu 3 9 9 Table 5-4 Menu 41 parameter descriptions
21 Second motor parameters 9 9 Parameter Range(Ú)
22 Menu 0 set-up - user area 9 9 41.00 Parameter 0 0 to 32767
23 Menu 0 sub block control 9 9 41.01 to Browsing filter source F01 to
Pr 0.00 to Pr 22.99
40 Keypad configuration menu X 9 41.50 F50
41.51 Browsing favourites control Normal (0), Filter (1)
41 User filter menu X 9
70 PLC registers X 9
5.8 Saving parameters
When changing a parameter in Menu 0, the new value is saved when
pressing the Mode button to return to parameter view mode from
parameter edit mode.
If parameters have been changed in the advanced menus, then the
change will not be saved automatically. A save function must be carried
85 Timer function parameters X 9 out.
86 Digital I/O parameters X 9
Procedure
88 Status parameters X 9
1. Enter SAVE in Pr xx.00
90 General parameters X 9 2. Either:
91 Fast access parameters X 9
• Press the red reset button
Key: 9= Available • Toggle the reset digital input, or
X = Not available • Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by
setting Pr 10.38 to 100 (ensure that Pr xx.00 returns to 0).
5.9 Restoring parameter defaults

Restoring parameter defaults by this method saves the default values in
the drive’s memory. (Pr 11.44 (SE14, 0.35) and Pr 11.30 are not affected
by this procedure).
Procedure
1. Ensure the drive is not enabled, i.e. terminal 31 is open or Pr 6.15 is
OFF (0)
2. Select Eur or USA in Pr xx.00.

3. Either: Table 5-5 User security and parameter access levels

• Press the red reset button Parameter Advanced
User security Menu 0 status
access level menus status
• Toggle the reset digital input, or
L1 Open Sub block RW Not visible
• Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by
setting Pr 10.38 to 100 (ensure that Pr. xx.00 returns to 0). L1 Closed Sub block RO Not visible
L2 Open Linear RW RW
5.10 Differences between European and L2 Closed Linear RO RO
USA defaults RW = Read / write access RO = Read only access
The default settings of the drive are parameter access level L1 and User
Pr Description Default
Security Open, i.e. read / write access to Menu 0 with the advanced
2.06 S ramp enable Eur: OFF (0), USA: On (1) menus, not visible
Tachometer voltage rating
3.51 Eur: 60.00, USA: 50.00 5.13.1 User security
(Fb02, 0.72)
The user security, when set, prevents write access to any of the
5.09, Armature rated voltage 480 V drive Eur: 440, parameters (other than Pr 11.44 (SE14, 0.35) Access Level) in any menu.
21.09 (SE06, 0.27) USA:500
Figure 5-8 User security open
Field weakening
5.28 Eur: OFF (0), USA On (1) User security open - All parameters: Read / Write access
compensation disable
5.59,
Back emf set point 480V drive Eur: 440, USA:500
21.08
5.65 Economy timeout Eur: OFF (0), USA: On (1)
Size 1: Eur: 2.00, USA: 8.00
5.70, Rated field current Size 2A & B Eur: 3.00, USA:
21.24 (SE10, 0.31) 20.00 Size 2C & D Eur: 5.00,
USA 20.00
5.73, Rated field voltage
Eur: 360, USA: 300
21.23 (SE11, 0.32)
5.75 Field voltage mode Eur: OFF (0), USA: On (1) Pr 0.00 Pr 1.00 ............ Pr 22.00 Pr 23.00
Analog input 3 mode Pr 0.01 Pr 1.01 ............ Pr 22.01 Pr 23.01
7.15 Eur: th (8), USA: VOLt (6)
(in01, 0.81) Pr 0.02 Pr 1.02 ............ Pr 22.02 Pr 23.02
Pr 0.03 Pr 1.03 ............ Pr 22.03 Pr 23.03
5.11 Displaying parameters with non- ............
............
default values only
Pr 0.89 Pr 1.50 ............ Pr 22.39 Pr 23.10
Select dIS.dEf in Pr xx.00, the only parameters that will be visible to the Pr 0.90 Pr 1.51 ............ Pr 22.40 Pr 23.11
user will be those containing a non-default value. This function does not
require a drive reset to become active. To deactivate this function, return User security closed - All parameters: Read Only access
to Pr xx.00 and enter a value of 0. (except Pr 11.44 (SE14, 0.35)
Please note that this function can be affected by the access level
Pr 0.00 Pr 1.00 ............ Pr 22.00 Pr 23.00
enabled. You must refer to section 5.13 Parameter access level and
Pr 0.01 Pr 1.01 ............ Pr 22.01 Pr 23.01
security for more information regarding access level.
Pr 0.02 Pr 1.02 ............ Pr 22.02 Pr 23.02
5.12 Displaying destination parameters Pr 0.03 Pr 1.03 ............ Pr 22.03 Pr 23.03
............
only ............
Select dIS.dESt in Pr xx.00, the only parameters that will be visible to Pr 0.49 Pr 1.50 ............ Pr 22.39 Pr 23.10
the user will be destination parameters. This function does not require a Pr 0.90 Pr 1.51 ............ Pr 22.40 Pr 23.11
drive reset to become active. To deactivate this function, return to
Pr xx.00 and enter a value of 0.
5.13.2 Setting user security
Please note that this function can be affected by the access level Enter a value between 1 and 999 in Pr 11.30 and press the button;
enabled You must refer to section 5.13 Parameter access level and the security code has now been set to this value. To activate the security,
security for further information regarding access levels. the access level must be set to Loc in Pr 11.44 (SE14, 0.35). When the
drive is reset, the security code will have been activated and the drive
5.13 Parameter access level and security returns to access level L1. The value of Pr 11.30 will return to 0 in order
The parameter access levels determine whether the user has access to to hide the security code. At this point, the only parameter that can be
Menu 0 (in sub block mode) only or to all of the advanced menus (Menus changed by the user is the access level Pr 11.44 (SE14, 0.35).
1 to 23), in addition to Menu 0 (in linear mode). 5.13.3 Unlocking user security
The user security determines whether the access to the user is read only Select a read write parameter to be edited and press the button; the
or read write. upper display will now show CodE.
The user security and the parameter access level can operate Use the arrow buttons to set the security code and press the button.
independently of each other as shown in Table 5-5 . With the correct security code entered, the display will revert to the
parameter selected in edit mode. If an incorrect security code is entered
the display will revert to parameter view mode.
To lock the user security again, set Pr 11.44 (SE14, 0.35) to Loc and
press the reset button.

5.13.4 Disabling user security ANSIx3.28 protocol

Unlock the previously set security code as detailed above. Set Pr 11.30 Full details of the CT ANSI communications protocol are in the Mentor
to 0 and press the button. The user security has now been MP Advanced User Guide.
disabled, and will not have to be unlocked each time the drive is Modbus RTU protocol
powered up to allow read / write access to the parameters. Full details of the CT implementation of Modbus RTU are given in the
Mentor MP Advanced User Guide.
5.14 Serial communications Modbus RTU protocol, but with an MP-Keypad only
This setting is used for disabling communications access when the MP-
5.14.1 Introduction Keypad is used as a hardware key.
The Mentor MP has a standard 2-wire EIA485 interface (serial
Si01
communications interface) which enables all drive set-up, operation and Baud rate
{0.66/11.25}
monitoring to be carried out with a PC or controller if required. Therefore,
it is possible to control the drive entirely by serial communications RW Txt US
without the need for a keypad or other control cabling. The drive 300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2),
supports two protocols selected by parameter configuration: 2400 (3), 4800 (4), 9600 (5),
Ú 19200 (6), 38400 (7),
Ö 19200 (6)
• Modbus RTU
• CT ANSI 57600 (8)*, 115200 (9)*
Modbus RTU has been set as the default protocol, as it is used with the
Used in all comms modes to define the baud rate.
PC-tools commissioning/start-up software as provided on the CD ROM.
The serial communications port of the drive is a RJ45 socket, which is Parameter value String/baud rate
isolated from the power stage and the other control terminals (see 0 300
section 4.10 Serial communications connections on page 51 for
1 600
connection and isolation details).
2 1200
The communications port applies a 2 unit load to the communications
3 2400
network.
4 4800
USB/EIA232 to EIA485 Communications
5 9600
An external USB/EIA232 hardware interface such as a PC cannot be
6 19200
used directly with the 2-wire EIA485 interface of the drive. Therefore a
suitable converter is required. 7 38400
8* 57600
Suitable USB to EIA485 and EIA232 to EIA485 isolated converters are
available from Control Techniques as follows: 9* 115200
• CT USB Comms cable (CT Part No. 4500-0096) * Only applicable to Modbus RTU mode
• CT EIA232 Comms cable (CT Part No. 4500-0087)
This parameter can be changed via the drive keypad, via a Solutions
When using one of the above converters or any other suitable converter Module or via the comms interface itself. If it is changed via the comms
with the Mentor MP, it is recommended that no terminating resistors be interface, the response to the command uses the original baud rate. The
connected on the network. It may be necessary to 'link out' the master should wait at least 20 ms before sending a new message using
terminating resistor within the converter depending on which type is the new baud rate.
used. The information on how to link out the terminating resistor will
normally be contained in the user information supplied with the NOTE
converter. When using the CT EIA232 Comms cable the available baud rate is
limited to 19.2k baud.
5.14.2 Serial communications set-up parameters
The following parameters need to be set according to the system Si02
requirements. Serial address
{0.67/11.23}
RW Txt US
11.24 Serial mode
RW Txt US Ú 0 to 247 Ö 1
Ú AnSI (0), rtU (1), Lcd (2) Ö rtU (1) Used to define the unique address for the drive for the serial interface.
The drive is always a slave.
This parameter defines the communications protocol used by the 485
ANSI
comms port on the drive. This parameter can be changed via the drive
When the ANSI protocol is used the first digit is the group and the
keypad, via a Solutions Module or via the comms interface itself. If it is
second digit is the address within a group. The maximum permitted
changed via the comms interface, the response to the command uses
group number is 9 and the maximum permitted address within a group is
the original protocol. The master should wait at least 20 ms before
9. Therefore, Pr 11.23 (Si02, 0.67) is limited to 99 in this mode. The
sending a new message using the new protocol. (Note: ANSI uses 7
value 00 is used to globally address all slaves on the system, and x0 is
data bits, 1 stop bit and even parity; Modbus RTU uses 8 data bits, 2
used to address all slaves of group x, therefore these addresses should
stops bits and no parity).
not be set in this parameter.
Comms value String Communications mode
Modbus RTU
0 AnSI ANSI
When the Modbus RTU protocol is used addresses between 0 and 247
1 rtU Modbus RTU protocol are permitted. Address 0 is used to globally address all slaves, and so
Modbus RTU protocol, but with a MP- this address should not be set in this parameter.
2 Lcd
Keypad only

6 Basic parameters
The pre-defined sub blocks contain commonly used parameters for basic set-up of the Mentor MP. All parameters in the pre-defined sub blocks
appear in other menus in the drive. (Denoted by {x.xx} in Table 6-1.)
Table 6-1 Pre-defined sub block parameters
Parameter Range(Ú) Default(Ö) Type
SE00 Parameter zero {0.21, x.00} 0 to 32,767 0 RW Uni
SE01 Minimum reference clamp {0.22, 1.07} ±SPEED_LIMIT_MAX rpm 0.0 RW Bi PT US
SE02 Maximum reference clamp {0.23, 1.06} SPEED_LIMIT_MAX rpm 1000.0 RW Bi US
0 to MAX_RAMP_RATE
SE03 Acceleration rate {0.24, 2.11} 5.000 RW Uni US
s/(SE02 [Pr 0.23, 1.06] or Pr 2.39)
0 to MAX_RAMP_RATE
SE04 Deceleration rate {0.25, 2.21} 5.000 RW Uni US
s/(SE02 [Pr 0.23, 1.06] or Pr 2.39)
A1.A2 (0), A1.Pr (1), A2.Pr (2), Pr (3), PAd
SE05 Reference selector {0.26, 1.14} A1.A2 (0) RW Txt US
(4), Prc (5), PAd rEF (6)
For 480 V drive: 440 Eur 500 USA
SE06 Armature rated voltage {0.27, 5.09} 0 to ARMATURE_VOLTAGE_MAX Vdc For 575 V drive: 630 Eur 630 USA RW Uni RA US
For 690 V drive: 760 Eur 760 USA
SE07 Motor rated current {0.28, 5.07} 0 to RATED_CURRENT_MAX A RATED_CURRENT_MAX RW Uni RA US
SE08 Base speed {0.29, 5.08} 0.0 to 10,000.0 rpm 1000.0 RW Uni US
nonE (0), rEAd (1), ProG (2), Auto (3),
SE09 Parameter copying {0.30, 11.42} nonE (0) RW Txt * NC
boot (4)
Size 1: Eur 2A, USA 8 A
SE10 Rated field current {0.31, 5.70} 0 to FIELD_CURRENT_SET_MAX Size 2A/B: Eur 3A, USA 20 A RW Uni PT US
Size 2C/D: Eur 5A, USA 20 A
SE11 Rated field voltage {0.32, 5.73} 0 to 500 Vdc Eur: 360, USA: 300 RW Uni PT US
SE12 Enable field control {0.33, 5.77} OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Txt US
SE13 Autotune {0.34, 5.12} 0 to 3 0 RW Uni NC
SE14 Security status {0.35, 11.44} L1 (0), L2 (1), Loc (2) L1 (0) RW Txt PT US
di01 Speed reference selected {0.36, 1.01} ±MAX_SPEED_REF rpm RO Bi NC PT
di02 Pre-ramp reference {0.37, 1.03} ±MAX_SPEED_REF rpm RO Bi NC PT
di03 Post ramp reference {0.38, 2.01} ±SPEED_MAX rpm RO Bi NC PT
di04 Final speed reference {0.39, 3.01} ±SPEED_MAX rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
di05 Speed feedback {0.40, 3.02} ±SPEED_MAX rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
±TORQUE_PRODUCT_
di06 Speed controller output {0.41, 3.04} RO Bi FI NC PT
CURRENT_MAX %
±TORQUE_PROD_
di07 Torque demand {0.42, 4.03} RO Bi FI NC PT
CURRENT_MAX %
di08 Current magnitude {0.43, 4.01} 0 to DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX A RO Uni FI NC PT
di09 Field current feedback {0.44, 5.56} ±50.00 A RO Bi FI NC PT
±ARMATURE_VOLTAGE_
di10 Armature voltage {0.45, 5.02} RO Bi FI NC PT
MAX V
di11 Reference enabled indicator {0.46, 1.11} OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
di12 Reverse selected indicator {0.47, 1.12} OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
di13 Jog selected indicator {0.48, 1.13} OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
di14 Software version {0.49, 11.29} 1.00 to 99.99 RO Uni NC PT
tr01 Trip 0 {0.51, 10.20} RO Txt NC PT
0 to 229
(Kp1) Speed controller
SP01 {0.61, 3.10} 0.0000 to 6.5535 (1 / (rad/s)) 0.0300 RW Uni US
proportional gains
(Ki1) Speed controller
SP02 {0.62, 3.11} 0.00 to 655.35 (s / (rad/s)) 0.10 RW Uni US
integral gains
(Kd1) Speed controller 0.00000 to 0.65535
SP03 {0.63, 3.12} 0.00000 RW Uni US
differential feedback gains (1/s / (rad/s))
300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2), 2400 (3), 4800 (4),
Si01 Serial comms baud rate {0.66, 11.25} 9600 (5), 19200 (6), 38400 (7), 57600 (8)**, 19200 (6) RW Txt US
115200 (9)**
Si02 Serial comms address {0.67, 11.23} 0 to 247 1 RW Uni US
drv (0), Slot1 (1), Slot2 (2), Slot3 (3), tACHO
Fb01 Speed feedback selector {0.71, 3.26} Est SPEED (5) RW Txt US
(4), Est SPEED (5)
Fb02 Tachometer voltage rating {0.72, 3.51} 0 to 300.00 V/1000 rpm Eur: 60.00, USA: 50.00 RW Uni US
Fb03 Tachometer input mode {0.73, 3.53} DC (0), DC Filt (1), AC (2) DC (0) RW Txt US
Fb04 Tachometer speed feedback {0.74, 3.52} ±SPEED_MAX rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
Drive encoder lines per
Fb05 {0.75, 3.34} 1 to 50,000 1,024 RW Uni US
revolution


Fb06 Drive encoder supply voltage {0.76, 3.36} 5 V (0), 8 V (1), 15 V (2), 24 V (3) 5 V (0) RW Txt US
Fb07 Drive encoder type {0.77, 3.38} Ab (0), Fd (1), Fr (2) Ab (0) RW Txt US
Fb08 Drive encoder termination select {0.78, 3.39} 0 to 2 1 RW Uni US
Fb09 Drive encoder speed feedback {0.79, 3.27} ±10,000.0 rpm RW Bi FI NC PT US
0-20 (0), 20-0 (1), 4-20.tr (2), 20-4.tr (3), 4-20
in01 Analog input 3 mode {0.81, 7.15} (4), 20-4 (5), VOLt (6), th.SC (7), th (8), th. th (8) RW Txt US
diSp (9)
in02 Analog input 1 {0.82, 7.01} ±100.00 % RO Bi NC PT
in05 T24 digital I/O 1 state {0.85, 8.01} RO Bit NC PT
OFF (0) or On (1)
in08 T27 digital input 4 state {0.88, 8.04} RO Bit NC PT
* Modes 1 and 2 are not user saved, Modes 0, 3 and 4 are user saved. Pr x.00 is available in all menus and has the following functions.
** Only applicable to Modbus RTU mode.
Value String Action
Key: 0 No Act No action
1 SAUE Save parameters
Coding Attribute
2 rEAd 1* Transfer SMARTCARD data block 1 to the drive
{X.XX} Copied Menu 0 or advanced parameter Transfer drive parameters as difference from
RW Read/write: can be written by the user 3 PrOg 1*
default to SMARTCARD block number 1
RO Read only: can only be read by the user 4 rEAd 2* Transfer SMARTCARD data block 2 to the drive
Bit 1 bit parameter: ‘On’ or ‘OFF’ on the display Transfer drive parameters as difference from
5 PrOg 2*
Bi Bipolar parameter default to SMARTCARD block number 2
6 rEAd 3* Transfer SMARTCARD data block 3 to the drive
Uni Unipolar parameter
Transfer drive parameters as difference from
Txt Text: the parameter uses text strings instead of numbers. 7 PrOg 3*
default to SMARTCARD block number 3
Filtered: some parameters which can have rapidly changing 8 diS.diFF Display non-default values only
FI values are filtered when displayed on the drive keypad for 9 diS.dESt Display destination parameters only
easy viewing. 10 Eur Load European defaults
Destination: This parameter selects the destination of an 11 USA Load USA defaults
DE
input or logic function. 12 rES OP Reset all Solution Modules
Rating dependent: this parameter is likely to have different 1000 1000 Save parameters
values and ranges with drives of different voltage and 1070 1070 Reset all Solution Modules
current ratings. Parameters with this attribute will not be 1233 1233 Load European defaults
transferred to the destination drive by SMARTCARDs when 1244 1244 Load USA defaults
RA
the rating of the destination drive is different from the 1255 1255 Load European defaults (excluding menus 15 to 20)
source drive and the file is a parameter file. However, the 1256 1256 Load USA defaults (excluding menus 15 to 20)
value will be transferred if only the current rating is different Transfer drive parameter to a card and create a
and the file is a differences from default type file. bootable difference from default SMARTCARD
Not copied: not transferred to or from SMARTCARDs 2001 2001* block with data block number 1 and clear
NC
during copying. parameter 11.42. If data block 1 exists it is over
PT Protected: cannot be used as a destination. written.
User save: parameter saved in drive EEPROM when the Transfer drive parameters to SMARTCARD block
US 3yyy 3yyy*
user initiates a parameter save. number yyy
Power-down save: parameter automatically saved in drive 4yyy 4yyy*
default to SMARTCARD block number yyy
EEPROM when the under volts (UV) trip occurs. Power-
PS Transfer Onboard Applications Lite ladder
down save parameters are also saved in the drive when the 5yyy 5yyy*
program to SMARTCARD block number yyy
user initiates a parameter save.
Transfer SMARTCARD data block yyy to the
6yyy 6yyy*
drive
7yyy 7yyy* Erase SMARTCARD data block yyy
6.1 Full descriptions 8yyy 8yyy* Compare drive data with SMARTCARD block yyy
6.1.1 Parameter x.00 9555 9555* Clear SMARTCARD warning suppression flag
SE00 {x.00} Parameter zero 9666 9666* Set SMARTCARD warning suppression flag
9777 9777* Clear SMARTCARD read-only flag
RW Uni
9888 9888* Set SMARTCARD read-only flag
Ú 0 to 32,767 Ö 0 9999 9999* Erase SMARTCARD
12000** 12000** Display non-default values only
12001** 12001** Display destination parameters only
* See Chapter 9 SMARTCARD operation on page 85 for more

information of these functions.

** These functions do not require a drive reset to become active. All

other functions require a drive reset to initiate the function. SE05
Reference selector
{0.26, 1.14}
6.1.2 Parameter x.00 reset
When an action is started by setting Pr x.00 to one of the above values RW Txt US
and initiating a drive reset this parameter is cleared when the action is A1.A2 (0), A1.Pr (1), A2.Pr (2),
completed successfully. If the action is not started, e.g. because the Ú Pr (3), PAd (4), Prc (5), PAd Ö A1.A2 (0)
drive is enabled and an attempt is made to load defaults, etc., Pr x.00 is rEF (6)
not cleared and no trip is produced. If the action is started and then fails
for some reason a trip is always produced and Pr x.00 is not cleared. It Defines how the value of Pr 1.49 is derived as follows:
should be noted that parameter saves etc. can also be initiated with the Value of
Display String Pr 1.49
copying parameter (Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30)). If actions that can be Pr 1.14
initiated by either parameter are started and then completed successfully A1.A2 (Analog ref 1. Analog *Selected by
Pr x.00 is cleared and Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) is cleared if it has a value of 0
ref 2) terminal input
less than 3. A1.Pr (Analog ref 1. Preset
1 1
It should be noted that there could be some conflict between the actions speeds)
of Pr x.00 and Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) Parameter copying when the drive A2.Pr (Analog ref 2. Preset
2 2
is reset. If Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) has a value of 1 or 2 and a valid action speeds)
is required from the value of Pr x.00 then only the action required by 3 Pr (Preset speeds) 3
Pr x.00 is performed. Pr x.00 and Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) are then reset to
4 Pad (Keypad reference) 4
zero. If Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) has a value of 3 or 4 it will operate
correctly causing parameters to be save to a SMARTCARD each time a 5 Prc (Precision reference) 5
parameter save is performed. 6 Pad rEF 6
6.1.3 Set-up *Pr 1.41 to Pr 1.44 and Pr 1.52 can be controlled by digital inputs to force
the value of Pr 1.49:
SE01 When all bits = 0, Pr 1.49 =1
Minimum reference clamp
{0.22, 1.07}
Pr 1.41 = 1 then Pr 1.49 = 2
RW Bi PT US Pr 1.42 = 1 then Pr 1.49 = 3
Ú ±SPEED_LIMIT_MAX rpm Ö 0.0 Pr 1.43 = 1 then Pr 1.49 = 4
Pr 1.44 = 1 then Pr 1.49 = 5
(When the drive is jogging, this parameter has no effect.) Pr 1.52 = 1 then Pr 1.49 = 6
Set SE01 (Pr 0.22, 1.07) at the required minimum motor speed for both The bit parameters with lower numbers have priority over those with
directions of rotation. The drive speed reference is scaled between SE01 higher numbers.
(Pr 0.22, 1.07) and SE02 (Pr 0.23, 1.06). Pr 1.49 and Pr 1.50 then define the reference as follows:
Pr 1.49 Pr 1.50 Reference
SE02
Maximum reference clamp 1 1 Analog reference 1 (Pr 1.36)
{0.23, 1.06}
1 >1 Preset defined by Pr 1.50 (Pr 1.21 to Pr 1.28)
RW Bi US
2 1 Analog reference 2 (Pr 1.37)
Ú SPEED_LIMIT_MAX rpm Ö 1000.0 2 >1 Preset defined by Pr 1.50 (Pr 1.21 to Pr 1.28)
3 x Preset defined by Pr 1.50 (Pr 1.21 to Pr 1.28)
(The drive has additional over-speed protection.) 4 x Keypad reference (Pr 1.17)
Set SE02 (Pr 0.23, 1.06) at the required maximum motor speed for both 5 x Precision reference (Pr 1.18 and Pr 1.19)
directions of rotation. The drive speed reference is scaled between SE01 6 x Keypad reference only
(Pr 0.22, 1.07) and SE02 (Pr 0.23, 1.06).
x = any value
SE03 Keypad reference
Acceleration rate If Keypad reference is selected the drive sequencer is controlled directly
{0.24, 2.11}
by the keypad keys and the keypad reference parameter (Pr 1.17) is
RW Uni US
selected. The sequencing bits, Pr 6.30 to Pr 6.34, have no effect and jog
0 to MAX_RAMP_RATE is disabled.
Ú s/(SE02 [Pr 0.23, 1.06] or Ö 5.000
Pr 2.39)
SE06
Armature rated voltage
Set SE03 (Pr 0.03, 2.11) at the required rate of acceleration. {0.27, 5.09}
Note that larger values produce lower acceleration. The rate applies in RW Uni RA US
both directions of rotation. For 480 V drive: 440 Eur,
500 USA
0 to
SE04 For 575 V drive: 630 Eur,
Deceleration rate Ú ARMATURE_VOLTAGE_MAX Ö 630 USA
{0.25, 2.21} Vdc
For 690 V drive: 760 Eur,
RW Uni US
760 USA
0 to MAX_RAMP_RATE
Ú s/(SE02 [Pr 0.23, 1.06] or Ö 5.000
Pr 2.39)
Set Pr SE04 (Pr 0.25, 2.21) at the required rate of deceleration.

Note that larger values produce lower deceleration. The rate applies in
both directions of rotation.

SE07 SE12
Motor rated current Enable field control
{0.28, 5.07} {0.33, 5.77}
RW Uni RA US RW Txt US
0 to RATED_CURRENT_MAX Ú OFF (0) or On (1) Ö OFF (0)
Ú A
Ö RATED_CURRENT_MAX
When this parameter is set to 0 the internal and external field controllers
The rated current should be set at the motor nameplate value for rated
are disabled. Setting the parameter to 1 enables the internal or external
current. The value of this parameter is used in the following:
field controller.
• Current limits
• Motor thermal protection
SE13
Autotune
{0.34, 5.12}
SE08 RW Uni NC
Base speed
{0.29, 5.08}
RW Uni US
Ú 0 to 3 Ö 0
Ú 0.0 to 10,000.0 rpm Ö 1000.0 If this parameter is set to a non-zero value, the drive is enabled and a
run command is applied in either direction the drive performs an auto-
The rated speed defines the base speed of the motor. It is also to tune test. All tests that rotate the motor are carried out in the forward
determine the speed used in the auto tuning inertia test (see SE13 direction if di12 (Pr 0.47, 1.12) = 0 or the reverse direction if di12
[Pr 0.34, 5.12]). (Pr 0.47, 1.12) = 1. For example, if the test is initiated by applying run
reverse (Pr 6.32 = 1) the test is performed in the reverse direction. The
SE09 test will not start unless the drive is disabled before the test is initiated by
Parameter copying applying the enable or run, i.e. it will not start if the drive is in the stop
{0.30, 11.42}
state. It is not possible to go into the stop state if di12 (Pr 0.47, 1.12) has
RW Txt NC *
a non-zero value.
nonE (0), rEAd (1), ProG (2),
Ú Auto (3), boot (4)
Ö nonE (0) When the test is completed successfully the drive is disabled and will
enter the inhibit state. The motor can only be restarted if the enable is
* Modes 1 and 2 are not user saved, Modes 0, 3 and 4 are user saved. removed either from the enable input, or Pr 6.15 is set to zero or from
the control word (Pr 6.42) if it is active.
If SE09 (Pr 0.30, 11.42) is equal to 1 or 2 this value is not transferred to
the EEPROM or the drive. If SE09 (Pr 0.30, 11.42) is set to a 3 or 4 the Value Autotune function
value is transferred.
0 None
Pr Pr 1 Static autotune for current loop gains
Comment
String value
2 Spinning autotune for motor saturation break points
nonE 0 Inactive
rEAd 1 Read parameter set from the SMARTCARD 3 Spinning autotune for inertia measurement
ProG 2 Programming a parameter set to the SMARTCARD
Static autotune for current loop gains
Auto 3 Auto save When this operation is performed, the drive will estimate the following,
boot 4 Boot mode with respect to the selected motor map, and store the values:
For further information, refer to Chapter 9 SMARTCARD operation on Motor constant (Pr 5.15)
page 85. Continuous proportional gain (Pr 4.13)
Continuous integral gain (Pr 4.14)
SE10 Discontinuous integral gain (Pr 4.34)
Rated field current
{0.31, 5.70} Back EMF set point (Pr 5.59)
RW Uni PT US Armature resistance (Pr 5.61)
Flux loop P gain (Pr 5.71)
Size 1: Eur 2A, USA 8A
0 to Flux loop I gain (Pr 5.72)
Ú FIELD_CURRENT_SET_MAX Ö Size 2A/B: Eur 3A, USA 20A
Size 2C/D: Eur 5A, USA 20A Spinning autotune for motor saturation break points
When this operation is performed, the drive will estimate the following,
This parameter will be set to the field current of the motor and will define with respect to the selected motor map, and store the values:
the rated field current for the field controller.
Motor saturation break points (Pr 5.29, Pr 5.30), by spinning the
motor at 25 % of it’s base speed (Pr 5.08)
SE11
Rated field voltage Field current compensation factor (Pr 5.74)
{0.32, 5.73}
RW Uni PT US
Ú 0 to 500 Vdc Ö Eur: 360, USA: 300
The maximum voltage the field controller is allowed to generate.

Spinning autotune for inertia measurement

The drive can measure the total inertia of the load and motor. This is di05
Speed feedback
used to set the speed loop gains. See Pr 3.17 Speed controller setup {0.40, 3.02}
method = 1 (bandwidth setup). During the inertia measurement test the RO Bi FI NC PT
drive attempts to accelerate the motor to 3/4 rated speed then back to a
Ú ±SPEED_MAX rpm Ö
standstill. Several attempts may be made, starting with rated torque/16,
and then increasing the torque progressively to x1/8, x1/4, x1/2, and x 1 The speed feedback can be taken from the drive encoder port or
rated torque if the motor cannot be accelerated to the required speed. If tachometer or armature voltage or a position feedback module installed
the required speed is not achieved on the final attempt the test is in any slot as selected with Fb01 (Pr 0.71, 3.26). di05 (Pr 0.40, 3.02)
aborted and a tuNE 1 trip is initiated. If the test is successful the shows the level of the speed feedback selected for the speed controller.
acceleration and deceleration times are used to calculate the motor and Display filtering is active when this parameter is viewed with one of the
load inertia and a value is written to Pr 3.18 Motor and load inertia. drive keypads. The value held in the drive parameter (accessible via
comms or an option module) does not include this filter, but is a value
SE14 that is obtained over a sliding 16 ms period to limit the ripple seen in this
Security status parameter value. The speed feedback value includes encoder
{0.35, 11.44}
quantization ripple given by the following equation:
RW Txt PT US
Ripple in di05 (Pr 0.40, 3.02) = 60 / 16 ms / (ELPR x 4)
Ú L1 (0), L2 (1), Loc (2) Ö L1 (0)
Where ELPR is the equivalent encoder lines per revolution as defined
This parameter controls access via the drive keypad as follows: here:
Value String Action Position feedback device ELPR
0 L1 Only menu 0 can be accessed Ab number of lines per revolution
1 L2 All menus can be accessed Fd, Fr number of lines per revolution / 2
Lock user security when drive is reset.
2 Loc For example a 4096 line Ab type encoder gives a ripple level of 0.23
(This parameter is set to L1 after reset.)
rpm.
The keypad can adjust this parameter even when user security is set.
The 16 ms sliding window filter is always applied to the value
6.1.4 Diagnostic shown in di05 (Pr 0.40, 3.02), but this sliding window filter is not
normally applied to the actual speed feedback used by the speed
di01 controller or the drive encoder reference system (Pr 3.43 to
Speed reference selected
{0.36, 1.01} Pr 3.46). The user may apply a filter to the speed controller input and the
RO Bi NC PT drive encoder reference system input if required by setting Pr 3.42 to the
required filter time. The encoder ripple seen by the speed controller is
Ú ±MAX_SPEED_REF rpm Ö given by:
Encoder speed ripple = 60 / Filter time / (ELPR x 4)
di02 If Pr 3.42 is set to zero (no filter) the ripple seen by the speed controller
Pre-ramp reference
{0.37, 1.03} and drive encoder reference system is given by:
RO Bi NC PT Encoder speed ripple = 60 / 250μs / (ELPR x 4)
Ú ±MAX_SPEED_REF rpm Ö Figure 6-1 Speed feedback filter arrangement
Speed
Filter
controller
di03 From the drive defined
Post ramp reference encoder port by Pr 3.42
{0.38, 2.01} Drive encoder
RO Bi NC PT reference
system
16ms di05
di04 filter (Pr 0.40, 3.02)
Final speed reference and
{0.39, 3.01}
Fb09
RO Bi FI NC PT (Pr 0.79, 3.27)
Ú ±SPEED_MAX rpm Ö Figure 6-1 shows the filter arrangement. It should be noted that the
same filtering is provided at the speed controller input and for di05
This is the final speed demand at the input to the speed regulator formed (Pr 0.40, 3.02) when the feedback is obtained from an option module,
by the sum of the ramp output and the hard speed reference (if the hard but the variable length window filter is controlled by Pr x.19.
speed reference is enabled). If the drive is disabled this parameter will It is not advisable to set the speed feedback filter too high unless it is
show 0.0. specifically required for high inertia applications with high controller
gains because the filter has a non-linear transfer function. It is preferable
to use the current demand filters (see Pr 4.12 or Pr 4.23) as these are
linear first order filters that provide filtering on noise generated from both
the speed reference and the speed feedback. It should be noted that any
filtering included within the speed controller feedback loop, either on the
speed feedback or the current demand, introduces a delay and limits the
maximum bandwidth of the controller for stable operation.

The speed ripple can be quite high, for example with a 4096 line encoder
the speed ripple is 14.6 rpm, but this does not define the resolution of the di11
Reference enabled indicator
speed feedback which is normally much better and depends on the {0.46, 1.11}
length of the measuring period used to obtain the feedback. This is di12
shown in the improved resolution of the value accessible in di05 Reverse selected indicator
{0.47, 1.13}
(Pr 0.40, 3.02) which is measured over 16 ms, i.e. a resolution of 0.23
rpm with a 4096 line encoder. The speed controller itself accumulates all di13
Jog selected indicator
{0.48, 1.14}
pulses from the encoder, and so the speed controller resolution is not
limited by the feedback, but by the resolution of the speed reference. If a RO Bit NC PT
SINCOS encoder is used from an option the encoder speed ripple is
Ú OFF (0) or On (1) Ö
reduced by a factor of 2(2-Interpolation bits). For example with the nominal
10 bits of interpolation information, the speed ripple is reduced by a These parameters are controlled by the drive sequencer as defined in
factor of 256. This shows how a SINCOS encoder can reduce noise Menu 6. They select the appropriate reference as commanded by the
caused by encoder quantization without any filtering in the speed drive logic. di11 (Pr 0.46, 1.11) will be active if a run command is given,
feedback or the current demand, so that high gains may be used to give the drive is enabled and the drive is ok. This parameter can be used as
high dynamic performance and a very stiff system. an interlock in a Onboard PLC or SM-Applications program to show that
the drive is able to respond to a speed or torque demand.
di06
Speed controller output
{0.41, 3.04} di14
Software version
RO Bi FI NC PT {0.49, 11.29}
±TORQUE_PRODUCT_ RO Uni NC PT
Ú CURRENT_MAX rpm
Ö
Ú 1.00 to 99.99 Ö
The output of the speed regulator is a torque demand given as a
percentage of rated motor torque. This is then modified to account for The parameter displays the software version of the drive.
changes in motor flux if field weakening is active, and then used as the
torque producing current reference. 6.1.5 Trips
tr01
di07 Trip 0
Torque demand {0.51, 10.20}
{0.42, 4.03}
tr02
RO Bi FI NC PT Trip 1
{0.52, 10.21}
±TORQUE_PROD_
Ú CURRENT_MAX %
Ö tr03
Trip 2
{0.53, 10.22}
The torque demand can be derived from the speed controller and/or the tr04
torque reference and offset. The units of the torque demand are a % of Trip 3
{0.54, 10.23}
rated torque.
tr05
Trip 4
di08 {0.55, 10.24}
Current magnitude
{0.43, 4.01} tr06
Trip 5
RO Uni FI NC PT {0.56, 10.25}
0 to DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX tr07
Ú A
Ö {0.57, 10.26}
Trip 6
The current feedback signal is derived from internal current tr08

Trip 7
transformers. It is used for closed loop control and indication of the {0.58, 10.27}
armature current, and to initiate motor protection. tr09
Trip 8
{0.59, 10.28}
di09 tr10
Field current feedback Trip 9
{0.44, 5.56} {0.60, 10.29}
RO Bi FI NC PT RO Txt NC PT PS
Ú ±50.00A Ö Ú 0 to 229 Ö
Indicates the field current feedback in 0.01 amperes. Contains the last 10 drive trips. tr01 (Pr 0.51, 10.20) is the most recent
trip and tr10 (Pr 0.60, 10.29) the oldest. When a new trip occurs all the
di10 parameters move down one, the current trip is put in tr01 (Pr 0.51,
Armature voltage
{0.45, 5.02} 10.20) and the oldest trip is lost from the bottom of the log. Descriptions
RO Bi FI NC PT of the trips are given in Table 13-1 on page 177. All trips are stored,
±ARMATURE_VOLTAGE_ including HF trips numbered from 20 to 29. (HF trips with numbers from
Ú MAX V
Ö 1 to 16 are not stored in the trip log.) Any trip can be initiated by the
actions described or by writing the relevant trip number to Pr 10.38. If
The average measured DC output voltage seen across the drive A1 and any trips shown as user trips are initiated the trip string is "txxx", where
A2 terminals or the average measured DC output voltage seen across xxx is the trip number.
the motor. Selected by Pr 5.14.
The armature voltage feedback has a resolution of 10-bits plus sign.

6.1.6 Speed loop The maximum permitted group number is 9 and the maximum permitted
address within a group is nine.
SP01
(Kp1) Speed controller proportional gains Therefore, Si02 (Pr 0.67, 11.23) is limited to 99 in this mode. The value
{0.61, 3.10}
00 is used to globally address all slaves on the system, and x0 is used to
RW Uni US
address all slaves of group x, therefore these addresses should not be
Ú 0.0000 to 6.5535 (1 / (rad/s)) Ö 0.0300 set in this parameter.
SP01 (Pr 0.61/3.10) operates in the feed-forward path of the speed- 6.1.8 Speed feedback
control loop in the drive. See Figure 11-3 on page 106 for a schematic of
the speed controller. For information on setting up the speed controller Fb01
Speed feedback selector
gains, refer to Chapter 8 Optimization on page 82. {0.71, 3.26}
RW Txt US
SP02 drv (0), Slot1 (1), Slot2 (2),
(Ki1) Speed controller integral gains
{0.62, 3.11} Ú Slot3 (3), tACHO (4), Est Ö Est SPEED (5)
RW Uni US SPEED (5)
Ú 0.00 to 655.35 (s / (rad/s)) Ö 0.1 0, drv: Drive encoder

The position feedback from the encoder connected to the drive itself
SP02 (Pr 0.62, 3.11) operates in the feed-forward path of the speed- is used to derive the speed feedback for the speed controller and to
control loop in the drive. See Figure 11-3 on page 106 for a schematic of calculate the motor rotor flux position.
the speed controller. For information on setting up the speed controller
1, Slot1: Solutions Module in slot 1
gains, refer to Chapter 8 Optimization on page 82.
The position feedback from the Solutions Module in Solutions
Module slot 1 is used to derive the speed feedback for the speed
SP03
(Kd1) Speed controller differential feedback gains controller and to calculate the motor rotor flux position. If a position
{0.63, 3.12}
feedback category Solutions Module is not installed in slot 1 the
RW Uni US drive produces an EnC9 trip.
0.00000 to 0.65535
Ú (1/s / (rad/s))
Ö 0.00000 2, Slot2: Solutions Module in slot 2
3, Slot3: Solutions Module in slot 3
SP03 (Pr 0.63, 3.12) operates in the feed-forward path of the speed- 4, tACHO: Tachometer
control loop in the drive. See Figure 11-3 on page 106 for a schematic of
the speed controller. For information on setting up the speed controller 5, ESt.SPEED: Estimated speed
gains, refer to Chapter 8 Optimization on page 82.
Fb02
Tachometer voltage rating
6.1.7 Serial interface {0.72, 3.51}
RW Uni US
Si01
Serial comms baud rate Ú 0 to 300.00 V/1000 rpm Ö Eur: 60.00, USA: 50.00
{0.61, 11.25}
RW Txt US
Defines the rating of the tachometer installed to the motor. This
300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2), parameter should be set slightly above or below the nominal value if the
2400 (3), 4800 (4), 9600 (5), user wishes to trim out the tolerance build ups in the feedback
Ú 19200 (6), 38400 (7),
Ö 19200 (6)
electronics.
57600 (8)*, 115200 (9)*
* Only applicable to Modbus RTU mode Fb03

Tachometer input mode
{0.73, 3.53}
This parameter can be changed via the drive keypad, via a Solutions
Module or via the comms interface itself. If it is changed via the comms RW Txt US
interface, the response to the command uses the original baud rate. The Ú DC (0), DC Filt (1), AC (2) Ö DC (0)
master should wait at least 20 ms before send a new message using the
new baud rate. The input electronics for the tachometer input can be configured in 3
ways.
Si02
Serial comms address
{0.67, 11.23}
Value Text Action
RW Uni US
0 DC DC tachometer
Ú 0 to 247 Ö 1 1 DC Filt DC tachometer with input filter
2 AC AC tachometer
Used to define the unique address for the drive for the serial interface.
The drive is always a slave.
Modbus RTU Fb04
Tachometer speed feedback
When the Modbus RTU protocol is used addresses between 0 and 247 {0.74, 3.52}
are permitted. Address 0 is used to globally address all slaves, and so RO Bi FI NC PT
this address should not be set in this parameter
ANSI
When the ANSI protocol is used the first digit is the group and the Provided the tachometer voltage rating parameter for the tachometer is
second digit is the address within a group. correct this parameter shows the tachometer speed in rpm.

It should be noted that the value shown by this parameter is measured

Fb05 over a 16 ms sliding window period (in the same way as di05 (Pr 0.40,
Drive encoder lines per revolution
{0.75, 3.34} 3.02)), and so the ripple in this parameter accessible via comms or by an
RW Uni US Solutions Module is as defined for di05 (Pr 0.40, 3.02).
Ú 1 to 50,000 Ö 1,024 The FI attribute for this parameter is set, and so further filtering is applied
when this parameter is viewed with one of the drive keypads.
When Ab, Fd, Fr are used the equivalent number of encoder lines per
revolution must be set-up correctly in Fb05 (Pr 0.75, 3.34) to give the 6.1.9 I/O
correct speed and position feedback. This is particularly important if the in01
encoder is selected for speed feedback with Fb01 (Pr 0.71, 3.26). The Analog input 3 mode
{0.81, 7.15}
equivalent number of encoder lines per revolution (ELPR) is defined as
RW Txt US
follows.:
0-20 (0), 20-0 (1), 4-20.tr (2),
Position feedback device ELPR 20-4.tr (3), 4-20 (4), 20-4 (5),
Ú VOLt (6), th.SC (7), th (8), th.
Ö Eur: th (8), USA: VOLt (6)
Ab number of lines per revolution
diSp (9)
Fd, Fr number of lines per revolution / 2
The following modes are available for the analog input 3. In modes 2 and
The incremental (A/B) signal frequency should not exceed 500 kHz. If
3, a current loop loss trip is generated if the input current falls below 3
Fb05 (Pr 0.75, 3.34) is changed the encoder is re-initialized.
mA. In modes 4 and 5 the analog input level goes to 0.0 % if the input
current falls below 3 mA.
Fb06
Drive encoder supply voltage
{0.76, 3.36} Parameter Parameter
Mode Comments
RW Txt US value string
5 V (0), 8 V (1), 15 V (2), 24 V 0 0-20 0 - 20 mA
Ú (3)
Ö 5 V (0)
1 20-0 20 - 0 mA
The encoder supply voltage present on the drive encoder connector is 4 -20 mA with trip on
2 4-20.tr Trip if I < 3 mA
defined by this parameter as 0 (5 V), 1 (8 V), 2 (15 V) or 3 (24 V) loss
20 - 4 mA with trip on
3 20-4.tr Trip if I < 3 mA
Fb07 loss
Drive encoder type
{0.77, 3.38} 4 - 20 mA with no trip
4 4-20
RW Txt US on loss
20 - 4 mA with no trip
Ú Ab (0), Fd (1), Fr (2) Ö Ab (0) 5 20-4
on loss
0.0 % if I < 4 mA
6 VOLt Voltage mode

The following encoders can be connected to the drive encoder port.
TH trip if R > 3 k 3
0, Ab: Quadrature incremental encoder, with or without marker pulse.
TH reset if R < 1 k
1, Fd: Incremental encoder with frequency and direction outputs, with or Thermistor with short
7 th.SC 8
without marker pulse. circuit detection
THS trip if R < 50
2, Fr: Incremental encoder with forward and reverse outputs, with or R
without marker pulse. TH trip if R > 3 k 3
Thermistor without
8 th TH reset if R < 1 k
short circuit detection
Fb08 8
Drive encoder termination select
{0.78, 3.39} Thermistor display
9 th.diSp
RW Uni US only with no trip
Ú 0 to 2 Ö 1 In modes 2 and 4 the destination parameter is at a value equivalent to

0.0 % when the input current is less than 4 mA. In modes 3 and 5 the
The terminations may be enabled/disabled by this parameter as follows: destination parameter is at a value equivalent to 100.0 % when the input
current is less than 4 mA.
Encoder Fb08 Fb08 Fb08
input {0.78, 3.39} = 0 {0.78, 3.39} = 1 {0.78, 3.39} = 2 in02
Analog input 1
A-A\ Disabled Enabled Enabled {0.82, 7.01}
B-B\ Disabled Enabled Enabled RO Bi NC PT
Z-Z\ Disabled Disabled Enabled
Ú ±100.00 % Ö
Fb09
Drive encoder speed feedback in03
{0.79, 3.27} Analog input 2
{0.83, 7.02}
RW Bi FI NC PT US
RO Bi NC PT
Ú ±10,000.0 rpm Ö Ú ±100.0 % Ö
Provided the set-up parameters for the drive encoder are correct this
parameter shows the encoder speed in rpm.

in04
Analog input 3
{0.84, 7.03}
RO Bi NC PT
Ú ±100.0 % Ö
When analog input 3 is in thermistor mode the display indicates the
resistance of the thermistor as a percentage of 10 k Ω.
in05
T24 digital I/O 1 state
{0.85, 8.01}
in06
{0.86, 8.02}
in07
{0.87, 8.03}
in08
T27 digital input 4 state
{0.88, 8.04}
in09
{0.89, 8.05}
in10
{0.90, 8.06}
RO Bit NC PT
Ú OFF (0) or On (1) Ö
OFF (0) = Terminal inactive
On (1) = Terminal active

Safety Product Mechanical Electrical Getting Basic Running SMARTCARD Onboard Advanced Technical UL
Information information Installation installation started parameters the motor operation PLC parameters data information
7 Running the motor

This chapter takes the new user through all the essential steps to
running a motor for the first time, in each of the possible operating
modes.
Ensure that no damage or safety hazard could arise from the

motor starting unexpectedly.
WARNING
The values of the motor parameters affect the protection of

the motor.
The default values in the drive should not be relied upon.
It is essential that the correct value is entered in Pr 5.07
CAUTION
(SE07, 0.28) Motor rated current. This affects the thermal
protection of the motor.
If the keypad mode has been used previously, ensure that

the keypad reference has been set to 0 using the
buttons as if the drive is started using the keypad it will run to
CAUTION the speed defined by the keypad reference (Pr 1.17).
If the intended maximum speed affects the safety of the

machinery, additional independent over-speed protection
must be used.
WARNING
Table 7-1 Minimum control connection requirements for each

control mode
Drive control method Requirements
Drive enable
Speed reference
Terminal mode
Run forward or run reverse
command
Keypad mode Drive enable
Drive enable
Serial communications
Serial communications link
Refer to Figure 4-1 Power connections for 480 V drive on page 34 for
minimum connections to get a motor running.

7.1 Quick start commissioning / start-up (from European defaults)

Action Detail
Ensure:
• Drive Enable signal is not given (terminal 31)
Before power-up • Run signal is not given
• Motor connected
• Tacho connected if one is being used
• Encoder connected if one is being used
Ensure:
• Drive displays ‘inh’
NOTE
Power-up the
The drive will trip ‘th’ (Motor thermistor trip) if no motor thermistor is connected to analog input 3 (terminal 8). If
drive
the motor protection is not connected to the drive, the ‘th’ trip can be disabled by setting Pr 7.15 (in01, 0.81)
(analog input 3 mode) to VOLt.
For drive trips, see Chapter 13 Diagnostics on page 177.
Enter:
• Armature rated voltage in Pr 5.09 (SE06, 0.27) (V)
Enter motor
• Motor rated current in Pr 5.07 (SE07, 0.28) (A) Mot X XXXXXXXXX
nameplate No XXXXXXXXXX kg
• Motor rated speed (base speed) in Pr 5.08 (SE08, 0.29) (rpm) XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
details
X XX XXX XX XXX X
X XX XXX XX XXX X
• Field rated current in Pr 5.70 (SE10, 0.31) (A) XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
• Field rated voltage in Pr 5.73 (SE11, 0.32) (V) XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Incremental encoder basic set-up

Enter:
• Drive encoder type in Pr 3.38 (Fb07, 0.77) = Ab (0): Quadrature encoder
Setting the encoder voltage supply too high for the encoder could result in damage to the feedback
device.
CAUTION
• Encoder power supply in Pr 3.36 (Fb06, 0.76) = 5 V (0), 8 V (1), 15 V (2) or 24 V (3)
Set motor NOTE If output voltage from the encoder is >5 V, then the termination resistors must be disabled Pr 3.39
feedback (Fb08, 0.78) to 0.
parameters
• Drive encoder lines per revolution (ELPR) in Pr 3.34 (Fb05, 0.75) (set according to encoder)
• Drive encoder termination resistor setting in Pr 3.39 (Fb08, 0.78)
0 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
1 = A-A\, B-B\, termination resistors enabled, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
2 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors enabled
Tachometer set-up
Enter:
• Tachometer voltage rating Pr 3.51 (Fb02, 0.72) (V/1000 rpm)
• Tachometer input mode Pr 3.53 (Fb03, 0.73)
Enter:
• Maximum speed in Pr 1.06 (SE02, 0.23) (rpm)
Set maximum • Set Pr 5.64 = On If field weakening is required
SE02
speed
NOTE t
For field weakening in Estimated Speed Mode please refer to Chapter8 Optimization on page 82
Set acceleration / Enter: SE02
deceleration • Acceleration rate in Pr 2.11 (SE03, 0.24) (time to accelerate to maximum speed)
rates • Deceleration rate in Pr 2.21 (SE04, 0.25) (time to decelerate from maximum speed)
t
SE03 SE04
Field controller set-up

• Select field mode by setting Pr 5.78 = IntrnL (Internal field controller is used), Etrnl (External half control),
Enable the field
E FULL (External in full control).
controller
• Set Pr 5.77 (SE12, 0.33) = On to enable the field.
• Ensure that the L11-L12 connection is closed.

Action Detail
Mentor MP is able to perform either a static, rotating or continuous autotune. The motor must be at a standstill
before an autotune is enabled.
When this operation is performed the drive will perform an estimation of Motor constant (Pr 5.15), Continuous
proportional gain (Pr 4.13), Continuous integral gain (Pr 4.14), Discontinuous integral gain (Pr 4.34), Back
EMF set point (Pr 5.59), Armature resistance (Pr 5.61), Flux loop P gain (Pr 5.71) and Flux loop I gain
(Pr 5.72) with respect to the selected motor map and store the values.
Static autotune
To perform a static autotune:
• Set Pr 5.12 (SE13, 0.34)= 1
• Close the Drive Enable signal (terminal 31). The drive will display ‘rdY’
• Close the run signal (terminal 26 or 27). The lower display will flash ‘Auto’ and ‘tunE’ alternatively, while
the drive is performing the autotune
• Remove the enable signal when the autotune has finished
• Remove the run signal
• Close the enable signal. Close the run signal (terminal 26 or 27). Provide speed reference to run the drive
up to a low speed, the drive will regulate its own estimated speed.
• Check that the feedback device is functioning correctly:
For encoder speed feedback - Check encoder speed feedback Pr 3.27 (Fb09, 0.79).
Checking speed For tachometer speed feedback - Check tachometer speed feedback Pr 3.52 (Fb04, 0.74).
feedback • When the feedback device being used is seen to be functioning correctly, stop the drive and select the
correct feedback device using Pr 3.26 (Fb01, Pr 0.71)
NOTE
For improved estimated speed accuracy and torque control in the field weakening range a rotating autotune is
recommended to determine the motor flux characteristics Pr 5.12 (SE13, 0.34) = 2
and unloaded before a rotating autotune is enabled.
NOTE
A rotating autotune cannot be carried out in Estimated speed mode.
A rotating autotune will cause the motor to accelerate up to 1/4 base speed in the direction selected
regardless of the reference provided. Once complete the motor will coast to a stop. The enable
signal must be removed before the drive can be made to run at the required reference.
WARNING The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run signal or removing the drive enable.
Rotating Rotating autotune for motor field flux set-up

autotune When selected the drive will determine the rated field compensation factor (Pr 5.74) for rated flux and the
motor field winding saturation break-points (Pr 5.29 and Pr 5.30), by spinning the motor at 25 % of its base
speed Pr 5.08 (SE08, 0.29) with respect to the selected motor map and store the values.
To perform an autotune:
• Set Pr 5.12 (SE13, 0.34) = 2 for a rotating autotune
• Wait for the drive to display ‘inh’ and for the motor to come to a standstill
If the drive trips, see Chapter 13 Diagnostics on page 177.
• Remove the drive enable and run signal from the drive.
Select SAVE in Pr xx.00 (SE00, 0.21)
Save parameters
Press the red reset button or toggle the reset digital input (ensure Pr xx.00 (SE00, 0.21) returns to ‘no Act’).
Drive is now ready to run
• Close enable signal
Run
• Close run signal
• Provide speed reference

7.2 Quick start commissioning / start-up (from USA defaults)

Action Detail
Ensure:
• Drive Enable signal is not given (terminal 31)
Before power-up • Run signal is not given
• Motor connected
• Tacho connected if one is being used
• Encoder connected if one is being used
Ensure:
• Drive displays ‘inh’
Power-up the NOTE
drive Motor thermistor input is disabled by default. If motor thermistor is available the thermistor should be used.
The protection is enabled with Pr 7.15 (in01, 0.81).
For drive trips, see Chapter 13 Diagnostics on page 177.
Enter:
Enter motor • Armature rated voltage in Pr 5.09 (SE06, 0.27) (V)
Mot X XXXXXXXXX
nameplate • Motor rated current in Pr 5.07 (SE07, 0.28) (A) No XXXXXXXXXX kg
details • Motor rated speed (base speed) in Pr 5.08 (SE08, 0.29) (rpm)
X XX XXX XX XXX X
X XX XXX XX XXX X
• Field rated voltage in Pr 5.73 (SE11, 0.32) (V) XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Incremental encoder basic set-up

Enter:
• Drive encoder type in Pr 3.38 (Fb07, 0.77) = Ab (0): Quadrature encoder
Setting the encoder voltage supply too high for the encoder could result in damage to the feedback
device.
CAUTION
• Encoder power supply in Pr 3.36 (Fb06, 0.76) = 5 V (0), 8 V (1), 15 V (2) or 24 V (3)
Set motor NOTE If output voltage from the encoder is >5 V, then the termination resistors must be disabled Pr 3.39
feedback (Fb08, 0.78) to 0.
parameters
• Drive encoder lines per revolution (ELPR) in Pr 3.34 (Fb05, 0.75) (set according to encoder)
• Drive encoder termination resistor setting in Pr 3.39 (Fb08, 0.78)
0 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
1 = A-A\, B-B\, termination resistors enabled, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
2 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors enabled
Tachometer set-up
Enter:
• Tachometer voltage rating Pr 3.51 (Fb02, 0.72) (V/1000 rpm)
• Tachometer input mode Pr 3.53 (Fb03, 0.73)
Enter:
• Maximum speed in Pr 1.06 (SE02, 0.23) (rpm) SE02
Set maximum NOTE

speed For field weakening the field controller needs to be set-up in current control by setting Pr 5.75 = OFF, setting t
the rated field current into Pr 5.70 (SE10, 0.31)and setting Pr 5.64 to On.
For field weakening in Estimated Speed Mode please refer to Chapter 8 Optimization on page 82.
Set acceleration / Enter: SE02
deceleration • Acceleration rate in Pr 2.11 (SE03, 0.24) (time to accelerate to maximum speed)
rates • Deceleration rate in Pr 2.21 (SE04, 0.25) (time to decelerate from maximum speed)
t
SE03 SE04
Field controller set-up

• Select field mode by setting Pr 5.78 = IntrnL (Internal field controller is used), Etrnl (External half control),
Enable the field
E FULL (External in full control).
controller
• Set Pr 5.77 (SE12, 0.33) = On to enable the field.
• Ensure that the L11-L12 connection is closed.

Action Detail
before an autotune is enabled.
When this operation is performed the drive will perform an estimation of Motor constant (Pr 5.15), Continuous
proportional gain (Pr 4.13), Continuous integral gain (Pr 4.14), Discontinuous integral gain (Pr 4.34), Back
EMF set point (Pr 5.59), Armature resistance (Pr 5.61), Flux loop P gain (Pr 5.71) and Flux loop I gain
(Pr 5.72) with respect to the selected motor map and store the values.
To perform a static autotune:
Static autotune • Set Pr 5.12 (SE13, 0.34)= 1
• Remove the enable signal when the autotune has finished
• Remove the run signal
NOTE
A rotating autotune Pr 5.12 (SE13, 0.34) = 2 should not be carried out when the field controller is in voltage
mode, Pr 5.75 = On (USA default).
• Close the enable signal. Close the run signal (terminal 26 or 27). Provide speed reference to run the drive
up to a low speed, the drive will regulate its own estimated speed.
Checking speed • Check that the feedback device is functioning correctly:

For encoder speed feedback - Check encoder speed feedback Pr 3.27 (Fb09, 0.79).
feedback
For tachometer speed feedback - Check tachometer speed feedback Pr 3.52 (Fb04, 0.74).
• When the feedback device being used is seen to be functioning correctly, stop the drive and select the
correct feedback device using Pr 3.26 (Fb01, Pr 0.71).
Select SAVE in Pr xx.00 (SE00, 0.21)
Save parameters
Press the red reset button or toggle the reset digital input (ensure Pr xx.00 (SE00, 0.21) returns to ‘no Act’).
Drive is now ready to run
• Close enable signal
Run
• Close run signal
• Provide speed reference
7.3 CTSoft software commissioning / start-up tool

CTSoft can be used for commissioning / start-up and monitoring, drive parameters can be uploaded, downloaded and compared, and simple or
custom menu listings can be created. Drive menus can be displayed in standard list format or as live block diagrams. CTSoft includes a migration
wizard that allows Mentor II parameters to be migrated to the Mentor MP. CTSoft is able to communicate with a single drive or a network.
CT Soft can be found on the CD which is supplied with the drive and is also available for download from the website www.controltechniques.com (file
size approximately 100 MB).
7.3.1 CTSoft system requirements:
• Windows 7, 2000/XP/Vista. Windows 95/98/98SE/ME/NT4 and Windows 2003 server are NOT supported
• Internet Explorer V5.0 or later must be installed
• Minimum of 800x600 screen resolution with 256 colors. 1024x768 is recommended.
• 256 MB RAM
• Pentium IV 1000MHz or better recommended.
• Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.1 or later (for parameter help). See CD provided
• Microsoft.Net Frameworks 2.0
• Note that you must have full administrator rights to install CTSoft.
7.3.2 To install CTSoft from the CD

To install CTSoft from the CD, insert the CD and the auto-run facility should start up the front-end screen from which CTSoft can be selected.
Otherwise run the SETUP.exe in the CTSoft folder. Any previous copy of CTSoft should be uninstalled before proceeding with the installation (existing
projects will not be lost).
1. Included with CTSoft are the user guides for the supported drive models. When help on a particular parameter is request by the user, CTSoft links
to the parameter in the Mentor MP Advanced User Guide.

7.4 Setting up a feedback device

This section shows more detailed information on parameter settings that must be made to each of the compatible encoder types with Mentor MP. For
more information on the parameters listed here please refer to the Mentor MP Advanced User Guide.
7.4.1 Detailed feedback device commissioning/start-up information
Standard quadrature encoder with or without marker pulse
Pr 3.38
Encoder type Ab (0) Standard quadrature incremental encoder with or without marker pulse
(Fb07, 0.77)
5 V (0), 8 V (1) or 15 V (2) or 24 V (3)
Pr 3.36 NOTE
Encoder power supply voltage
(Fb06, 0.76) If the voltage from the encoder is >5 V, then the termination resistors must be disabled Pr 3.39
(Fb08, 0.78) to 0
Encoder number of lines per Pr 3.34
Set to the number of lines per revolution of the encoder
revolution (Fb05, 0.75)
0 = The marker system operates in a conventional manner, 1 = the marker causes a full position
Encoder marker mode Pr 3.35
reset.
Pr 3.39 0 = A, B, Z termination resistors disabled, 1 = A, B termination resistors enabled and Z termination
Encoder termination selection
(Fb08, 0.78) resistors disabled, 2 = A, B, Z termination resistors enabled
0 = No wire break detect, 1 = Wire break detect on A and B (need termination enabled for 5 V
Encoder error detection level Pr 3.40
signals), 2 = Wire break detect on A, B and Z (need termination enabled for 5 V signals)
Incremental encoder with frequency and direction, or forward reverse signals, with or without marker pulse
Pr 3.38 Fd (2) Incremental encoder with frequency and direction outputs, with or without marker pulse,
Encoder type
(Fb07, 0.77) Fr (3) Incremental encoder with forward and reverse outputs, with or without marker pulse
5 V (0), 8 V (1) or 15 V (2) or 24 V (3)
Pr 3.36 NOTE
Encoder power supply voltage
(Fb06, 0.76) If the voltage from the encoder is >5 V, then the termination resistors must be disabled Pr 3.39
(Fb08, 0.78) to 0
Encoder number of lines per Pr 3.34
Set to the number of lines per revolution of the encoder divide by 2
revolution (Fb05, 0.75)
0 = The marker system operates in a conventional manner, 1 = the marker causes a full position
Encoder marker mode Pr 3.35
reset.
Pr 3.39 0 = A, B, Z termination resistors disabled, 1 = A, B termination resistors enabled and Z termination
Encoder termination selection
(Fb08, 0.78) resistors disabled, 2 = A, B, Z termination resistors enabled
0 = No wire break detect, 1 = Wire break detect on A and B (need termination enabled for 5 V
Encoder error detection level Pr 3.40
signals), 2 = Wire break detect on A, B and Z (need termination enabled for 5 V signals)

8 Optimization 8.3.2 Field weakening in estimated speed mode (no

speed feedback device)
Before attempting to tune the drive the following data is required The Rotating Autotune (Pr 5.12 (SE13, 0.34) = 2) sets up the field
• Armature full load current controller for more accurate flux control and open loop speed accuracy.
• Armature voltage The rotating autotune needs to know the motor speed and so a speed
• Field current feedback device has to be connected to the drive before a rotating
• Field voltage autotune can be carried out. In some applications a speed feedback
• Base speed device may not be required and so the procedure below allows the user
• Maximum speed to manually adjust the field controller parameters to achieve better open
loop speed control.
In the following worked example the data below has been used • Follow the quick start commissioning / start-up (from European
• Armature full load current = 67 A with an overload of 90 A for up to defaults) as shown in Table 6-1 Pre-defined sub block
30 seconds parameters on page 67 until a static autotune (Pr 5.12 (SE13, 0.34)
• Armature voltage = 500 V = 1) has been carried out.
• Field current = 1.85 A • Set Pr 5.64 Field weakening enable to On.
• Field voltage = 300 V • Ensure that Pr 5.29 , Pr 5.30, Pr 5.68 and Pr 5.74 are set to their
• Base speed = 1750 rpm default values of 50 %, 75 %, 100 % and 100 % respectively.
• Maximum speed = 2500 rpm • Set the speed demand to 1/4 of Base speed (Pr 5.08 (SE08, 0.29))
and run the machine up to speed and check the speed of the
machine using a hand held device.
8.1 Armature current • If the machine speed is lower than 1/4 of base speed (which is
• Set the motor rated current in Pr 5.07 (SE07, 0.28) to 67 A. normally the case) adjust the Field compensation factor (Pr 5.74)
• Set current limits in Pr 4.05 and Pr 4.06 to 90/67 x 100 = 134 % down until the correct machine speed is reached. If the machine
• Set the motor thermal time constant in Pr 4.15 = -30 / ln(1 - (1.05 / speed is higher than 1/4 of base speed (only possible if the motor
1.34)2) = 31.5 nameplate field current is low), adjust the rated field current (Pr 5.70
(SE10, 0.31)) up until the correct machine speed is reached.
8.2 Speed feedback • Set Pr 5.68 Maximum flux to 75 % and measure the actual speed of
8.2.1 Estimated speed feedback the machine (speed 75)
For estimated speed feedback set Pr 3.26 (Fb01, 0.71) to ESt SPd. This • Set Pr 5.68 Maximum flux to 50 % and measure the actual speed of
uses an estimated speed feedback based on the motor back emf, motor the machine (speed 50).
rated speed, motor rated voltage, armature resistance, armature current • Stop the machine and set Pr 5.68 Maximum flux back to 100 %.
and field flux feedback. • Set Pr 5.29 Motor saturation breakpoint 1 = 50 x set speed / actual
speed (Speed 50)
8.2.2 Tachometer speed feedback • Set Pr 5.30 Motor saturation breakpoint 2 = 75 x set speed / actual
For tachometer speed feedback set Pr 3.26 (Fb01, 0.71) to tACHO. Set
speed (speed 75).
the tachometer voltage rating in V/1000 rpm in Pr 3.51 (Fb02, 0.72) and
• Save parameters.
the tachometer input mode Pr 3.53 (Fb03, 0.73) to suit the type of
tachometer used. NOTE
For field weakening from USA defaults Pr 5.75 Field voltage mode
8.2.3 Encoder speed feedback should be set to OFF. Pr 5.28 Field weakening compensation disable
For encoder speed feedback set Pr 3.26 (Fb01, 0.71) to drv. Set the
should be set to OFF. The procedure above should then be followed to
lines per revolution (Pr 3.34 (Fb05, 0.75)), encoder supply voltage
set up the drive for field weakening.
(Pr 3.36 (Fb06, 0.76)) and encoder type (Pr 3.38 (Fb07, 0.77)).
8.3.3 Field economy
8.2.4 Solutions Module speed feedback Field economy can be used to keep the field energized, at a low level of
If an Solutions Module is being used to provide speed feedback then
current (to prevent overheating), when the motor is not running to
Pr 3.26 (Fb01, 0.71) should be set to SLot1, SLot2, or SLot3.
prevent condensation forming in the motor. The field economy level and
8.3 Field current the timeout can be adjusted.
The rated field current is set in Pr 5.70 (SE10, 0.31). When the field To use this function it is necessary to set:
current equals the compensated rated field current (see Pr 5.74), 100 % • Set Pr 5.65 to enable the field economy timeout
field flux is produced. • Set Pr 5.67 to the percentage of full field that you want to use in
8.3.1 Field weakening with a speed feedback device economy mode e.g 10 %.
If field weakening is required the field compensation factor (Pr 5.74), the • Set Pr 5.66 to the time after the drive enable signal is removed to the
motor saturation breakpoints (Pr 5.29, Pr 5.30) and the voltage at which field current reducing to the economy level.
field weakening is required to begin (Pr 5.59) must be set.
8.4 Current loop gains self-tuning
Setting up the drive in field weakening is straightforward when a speed For optimum performance the current loop must be set-up. The
feedback device is available. The rotating autotune (Pr 5.12 (SE13, dynamics of the current loop are principally a function of the electrical
0.34) = 2) automatically sets up the parameters above. Follow the quick characteristics of a particular motor.
start commissioning / start-up (from European defaults) as shown in
The drive determines the electrical characteristics of the motor by
Table 6-1 on page 67 to set up the drive. Enable field weakening
injecting current into the armature winding.
(Pr 5.64 = On). Save parameters.
NOTE
8.4.1 Static autotune for current loop gains
If Pr 5.12 (SE13, 0.34) is set to a 1, when the drive is enabled and a run
For field weakening from USA defaults Pr 5.75 Field voltage mode
command is applied in either direction the drive performs a static
should be set to OFF. Pr 5.28 Field weakening compensation disable
autotune test. The test will not start unless the drive is disabled before
should be set to OFF. Follow the quick start commissioning / start-up
the test is initiated. i.e. autotune will not start unless the drive is in a stop
(from European defaults) as shown in Table 6-1 on page 67 to set up the
state.
drive. Enable field weakening (Pr 5.64 = On). Save parameters.

When this operation is performed the drive will determine the Motor 8.5.3 Differential gain (Kd) Pr 3.12 (SP03, 0.63) and
constant (Pr 5.15), Continuous proportional gain (Pr 4.13), Continuous Pr 3.15
integral gain (Pr 4.14), Discontinuous integral gain (Pr 4.34), Back EMF The differential gain is provided in the feedback of the speed controller to
set point (Pr 5.59), Armature resistance (Pr 5.60) and Flux loop I gain give additional damping. The differential term is implemented in a way
(Pr 5.72) with respect to the selected motor map and store the values. that does not introduce excessive noise normally associated with this
8.4.2 Continuous autotune for current loop gains type of function. Increasing the differential term reduces the overshoot
In the static autotune the armature current loop gains are set up with no produced by under-damping, however, for most applications the
flux in the motor. In some motors the inductance of the armature proportional and integral gains alone are sufficient.
changes significantly when flux is present in the machine. If this is the 8.5.4 Manually setting up the speed loop gains
case, a continuous autotune can be enabled to correct the gains for the Figure 8-1 Responses
fluxed machine.
When Pr 5.26 is set to On, the continuous autotune is enabled which
continuously monitors the motor ripple and adjusts Motor constant Speed demand
(Pr 5.15), Continuous proportional gain (Pr 4.13) and Discontinuous
integral gain (Pr 4.34) for optimum performance.
The static autotune should still be carried out because Continuous
integral gain (Pr 4.14) is not set by the continuous autotune.
Calculation of the gains is suspended when the voltage field weakening Insufficient proportional
loop becomes active so that the gains are not increased when the field is gain
weakened (less flux in the machine).
This function does not operate when the drives are set-up in serial 12
pulse.
8.4.3 Drive commissioning output Excessive proportional
The Mentor MP has a test pin that gives instantaneous armature current gain
feedback. The pin is identified by a half sign wave symbol and is located
to the right of the tachometer terminals. An oscilloscope probe can be
attached to this pin to monitor the armature current.
8.5 Speed loop gains tuning Excessive integral gain

The speed loop gains control the response of the speed controller to a
change in speed demand. The speed controller includes proportional
(Kp) and integral (Ki) feed forward terms, and a differential (Kd)
feedback term. The drive holds two sets of these gains and either set
may be selected for use by the speed controller with Pr 3.16
Pr 3.16 may be changed when the drive is enabled or disabled. Ideal response
• If Pr 3.16 = 0 - gains Kp1, Ki1 and Kd1 are used
• If Pr 3.16 = 1 - gains Kp2, Ki2 and Kd2 are used
8.5.1 Proportional gain (Kp) Pr 3.10 (SP01, 0.61) and There are two methods of tuning the speed loop gains dependant on the
Pr 3.13 setting of Pr 3.17:
If Kp has a value and the integral gain Ki is set to zero the controller will 1. Pr 3.17 = 0, User set-up.
only have a proportional term, and there must be a speed error to This involves the connecting of an oscilloscope to analog output 1 to
produce a torque reference. Therefore as the motor load increases there monitor the speed feedback. Give the drive a step change in speed
will be a difference between the reference and actual speeds. reference and monitor the response of the drive on the oscilloscope.
This effect, called regulation, depends on the level of the proportional The proportional gain (Kp) should be set up initially. The value should be
gain, the higher the gain the smaller the speed error for a given load. increased up to the point where the speed overshoots and then reduced
If the proportional gain is too high either the acoustic noise produced by slightly.
speed feedback quantization becomes unacceptable, or the stability limit The integral gain (Ki) should then be increased up to the point where the
is reached. speed becomes unstable and then reduced slightly.
8.5.2 Integral gain (Ki) Pr 3.11 (SP02, 0.62) and It may now be possible to increase the proportional gain to a higher
Pr 3.14 value and the process should be repeated until the system response
The integral gain is provided to prevent speed regulation. The error is matches the ideal response as shown.
accumulated over a period of time and used to produce the necessary Figure 8-1 shows the effect of incorrect P and I gain settings as well as
torque demand without any speed error. Increasing the integral gain the ideal response.
reduces the time taken for the speed to reach the correct level and
increases the stiffness of the system, i.e. it reduces the positional 2. Pr 3.17 = 1, Bandwidth set-up
displacement produced by applying a load torque to the motor. If bandwidth based set-up is required, the drive can calculate Kp and Ki
Unfortunately increasing the integral gain also reduces the system if the following parameters are set up correctly:
damping giving overshoot after a transient. For a given integral gain the Pr 3.18 - Motor and load inertia - it is possible to measure the load inertia
damping can be improved by increasing the proportional gain. A as part of the auto-tuning process (see Pr 5.12 (SE13, 0.34)).
compromise must be reached where the system response, stiffness and Pr 3.20 - Required bandwidth,
damping are all adequate for the application. The term is implemented in
Pr 3.21 - Required damping factor,
the form of Σ(Ki x error), and so the integral gain can be changed when
the controller is active without causing large torque demand transients. Pr 5.32 - Motor torque per amp (Kt).

8.5.5 Speed loop gains for very high inertia

Pr 3.17 = 2 - Kp gain times 16
If this parameter is set to 2 the Kp gain (from whichever source), is
multiplied by 16. This is intended to boost the range of Kp for
applications with very high inertia. It should be noted that if high values
of Kp are used it is likely that the speed controller output will need to be
filtered, see (Pr 3.42). If the feedback is not filtered it is possible that the
output of the speed controller will be a square wave that changes
between the current limits causing the integral term saturation system to
malfunction.
8.6 Current limit tapers

With some motors the commutation limit of the motor requires that the
maximum armature current be reduced at higher speeds, the current
limit tapers can be used to provide this speed dependent current limit.
For more information refer to the Mentor MP Advanced User Guide.

9 SMARTCARD operation The whole card may be protected from writing or erasing by setting the
read-only flag as shown in section 9.3.9 9888 / 9777 - Set / clear the
SMARTCARD read only flag on page 87.
9.1 Introduction Either of these indications will tell the user that data is being transferred
This is a standard feature that enables simple configuration of to or from the SMARTCARD:
parameters in a variety of ways. The SMARTCARD can be used for: • SM-Keypad: The decimal point after the fourth digit in the upper
• Parameter copying between drives display will flash.
• Saving whole drive parameter sets • MP-Keypad: The symbol 'CC' will appear in the lower left hand
• Saving ‘differences from default‘ parameter sets corner of the display.
• Storing Onboard PLC programs The card should not be removed during data transfer because the drive
• Automatically saving all user parameter changes for maintenance will trip. If a trip occurs you must either try to transfer the data again or, in
purposes the case of a card-to-drive transfer, the default parameters should be
• Loading complete motor map parameters. loaded.
Refer to Figure 9-1 for installing the SMARTCARD. Ensure the
SMARTCARD is inserted with the MP arrow pointing upwards. 9.3 Transferring data
The drive only communicates with the SMARTCARD when commanded When a code is entered into Pr xx.00 and the drive is subsequently
to read or write, this means that the card may be ‘hot swapped’. reset, the drive will carry out the actions listed in Table 9-2.
Table 9-2 Transferring data
Codes Actions
Be aware of possible live terminals when inserting or
Pr x.00 = rEAd 1 Transfer SMARTCARD data block 1 to the drive.
removing the SMARTCARD
WARNING
Figure 9-1 Installation of the SMARTCARD Transfer drive parameters as difference from default
Pr x.00 = PrOg 1
to SMARTCARD data block number 1.
Transfer drive parameters as difference from default
Pr x.00 = PrOg 2
Transfer drive parameters as difference from default
Pa
rEAd
ram
eter
+
Pr x.00 = PrOg 3
Prog
- Pr
+
0.30

Au
to
+
bo
ot
+

defaults to a bootable SMARTCARD data block with
Pr x.00 = 2001
block number 1. This will clear data block 1 on the
card if it already exists.
Transfer drive parameters to a SMARTCARD data
Pr x.00= 3yyy
block number yyy.
Transfer drive data as difference from defaults to
Pr x.00 = 4yyy
SMARTCARD data block number yyy.
Transfer drive user program to SMARTCARD data
Pr x.00= 5yyy
block number yyy.
Pr x.00 = 6yyy Transfer SMARTCARD data block yyy to the drive.
Pr x.00 = 7yyy Erase SMARTCARD data block yyy.
Pr x.00 = 8yyy Compare drive parameters with data block yyy.
Pr x.00 = 9555 Clear SMARTCARD warning suppression flag.
Pr x.00 = 9666 Set SMARTCARD warning suppression flag.
Pr x.00= 9777 Clear SMARTCARD read-only flag.
Pr x.00 = 9888 Set SMARTCARD read-only flag.
9.2 Easy saving and reading Pr x.00 = 9999 Erase SMARTCARD.
The SMARTCARD has 999 individual data block locations. Each Pr 11.42 (SE09, Transfer SMARTCARD data block 1 to the drive
individual location from 1 to 499 can be used to store data. 0.30) = Read provided it is a parameter file.
The drive can support SMARTCARDS that have a capacity of between Pr 11.42 (SE09, Transfer drive parameters to a SMARTCARD data
4 kB and 512 kB. 0.30) = Prog block number 1.
The usage of the data block locations in the SMARTCARD are shown in Pr 11.42 (SE09, Transfer drive parameters to a SMARTCARD data
Table 9-1. 0.30) = Auto block with data block number 1 provided.
Table 9-1 SMARTCARD data blocks Pr 11.42 (SE09, Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) has been changed since
0.30) = boot power-up.
Data block Type Example of usage
1 to 499 Read / Write Application set-up Where yyy indicates the data block number 001 to 999, refer to Table 9-
1 for restrictions on data block numbers.
500 to 999 Read Only Macros
NOTE
Parameter sets labelled as ‘Differences from default‘ will be much
If the read only flag is set then only codes 6yyy or 9777 are effective.
smaller than whole parameter sets. Therefore they use a lot less
memory because most applications only require a few parameters to be
changed from the default setting.

9.3.1 Writing to the SMARTCARD Changing Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) to Auto (3) and resetting the drive will
3yyy - Transfer data to the SMARTCARD immediately save the complete parameter set from the drive to the card,
The data block contains the complete parameter data from the drive, i.e. i.e. all User Save (US) parameters except parameters with the NC
all user-save (US) parameters except parameters with the NC coding bit coding bit set. Once the whole parameter set is stored only the individual
set. Power-down save (PS) parameters are not transferred to the modified menu 0 parameter setting is updated.
SMARTCARD. Advanced parameter changes are only saved to the card when Pr xx.00
4yyy - Write default differences to a SMARTCARD is set to a 1000 and the drive reset.
The data block only contains the parameter differences from the last All SMARTCARD trips apply, except ‘C.Chg’. If the data block already
time default settings were loaded. contains information it is automatically overwritten.
Six bytes are required for each parameter difference. The data density is If the card is removed when Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) is set to 3, Pr 11.42
not as high as when using the 3yyy transfer method as described in the (SE09, 0.30) is then automatically set to nonE (0).
section 3yyy - Transfer data to the SMARTCARD but in most cases the When a new SMARTCARD is installed Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) must be
number of differences from default is small and the data blocks are set back to Auto (3) by the user and the drive reset so the complete
therefore smaller. This method can be used for creating drive macros. parameter set is rewritten to the new SMARTCARD if auto mode is still
PS parameters are not transferred to the SMARTCARD. required.
Writing a parameter set to the SMARTCARD When Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) is set to Auto (3) and the parameters in the
Setting Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) to Prog (2) and resetting the drive will save drive are saved, the SMARTCARD is also updated, therefore the
the parameters to the SMARTCARD, i.e. this is equivalent to writing SMARTCARD becomes a copy of the drives stored configuration.
3001 to Pr xx.00. All SMARTCARD trips apply except 'C.Chg'. If the data At power up, if Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) is set to Auto (3), the drive will save
block already exists it is automatically overwritten.
the complete parameter set to the SMARTCARD. The drive will display
When the action is complete this parameter is automatically reset to ‘cArd’ during this operation. This is done to ensure that if a user puts a
nonE (0). new SMARTCARD in during power down the new SMARTCARD will
have the correct data.
9.3.2 Reading from the SMARTCARD
6yyy - Read default differences from a SMARTCARD NOTE
When the data is transferred back to a drive, using 6yyy in Pr xx.00, it is When Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) is set to Auto (3) the setting of Pr 11.42
transferred to the drive RAM and the drive EEPROM. A parameter save (SE09, 0.30) itself is saved to the drive EEPROM but NOT to the
is not required to retain the data after power-down. Set-up data for any SMARTCARD.
Solutions Modules installed are stored on the card and are transferred to
the destination drive. If the Solutions Modules are different between the
9.3.4 Booting up from the SMARTCARD on every
source and destination drive, the menus for the slots where the
power up (Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) = boot (4))
Solutions Module categories are different are not updated from the card When Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) is set to boot (4) the drive operates the
same as Auto mode, except when the drive is powered up. The
and will contain their default values after the copying action.
parameters on the SMARTCARD will be automatically transferred to the
The drive will produce a 'C.Optn' trip if the Solutions Modules installed to
drive at power-up if the following are true:
the source and destination drive are different or are in different slots. If
• A card is inserted in the drive
the data is being transferred to a drive of a different voltage or current
rating a 'C.rtg' trip will occur. • Parameter data block 1 exists on the card
• The data in block 1 is type 1 to 5 (as defined in Pr 11.38)
Table 9-3 lists the rating dependent parameters (RA coding bit set) that
• Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) on the card set to boot (4)
will not be written to the destination drive and will contain their default
The drive will display 'boot' during this operation. If the drive mode is
values after the copying action. different from that on the card, the drive gives a 'C.Typ' trip and the data
Table 9-3 Rating dependent parameters is not transferred.
Parameter Function If 'boot' mode is stored on the copying SMARTCARD this makes the
4.05 Current limit copying SMARTCARD the master device. This provides a very fast and
efficient way of re-programming a number of drives.
4.06 Current limit
If data block 1 contains a bootable parameter set and data block 2
4.07 Current limit
contains an Onboard PLC program (type 17 as defined in Pr 11.38), then
4.24 User current maximum scaling the onboard PLC program will be transferred to the drive at power up
5.07 (SE07, 0.28) Motor rated current along with the parameter set in data block 1.
5.09 (SE06, 0.27) Armature rated voltage NOTE
Reading a parameter set from the SMARTCARD “Boot” mode is saved to the card, but when the card is read, the value of
Setting Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) to rEAd (1) and resetting the drive will Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) is not transferred to the drive.
transfer the parameters from the card into the drive parameter set and
the drive EEPROM, i.e. this is equivalent to writing 6001 to Pr xx.00. All
9.3.5 Booting up from the SMARTCARD on every
SMARTCARD trips apply. Once the parameters are successfully copied
power up (Pr xx.00 = 2001)
It is possible to create a difference from default bootable file by setting
this parameter is automatically reset to nonE (0). Parameters are saved
Pr xx.00 to 2001 and resetting the drive. This type of file causes the
to the drive EEPROM after this action is complete.
drive to behave in the same way at power-up as a file created with boot
NOTE mode set up with Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30). The difference from the default
This operation is only performed if data block 1 on the card is a full file is that it has the added advantage of including Menu 20 parameters.
parameter set (3yyy transfer) and not a default difference file (4yyy
Setting Pr xx.00 to 2001 will overwrite data block 1 on the card, if it
transfer). If data block 1 does not exist a 'C.dAt' trip occurs. already exists.
9.3.3 Auto saving parameter changes If a data block 2 exists and contains an Onboard PLC program (type 17
This setting causes the drive to automatically save any changes made to as defined in Pr 11.38), this will also be loaded after the parameters have
Menu 0 parameters on the drive to the SMARTCARD. The latest Menu 0 been transferred.
parameter set in the drive is therefore always backed up on the A bootable difference from default file can only be created in one
SMARTCARD. operation and parameters cannot be added as they are saved via
Menu 0.

9.3.6 Comparing drive full parameter set with the 9.5 SMARTCARD parameters
SMARTCARD values
Setting 8yyy in Pr xx.00, will compare the SMARTCARD file with the 11.36 SMARTCARD parameter data previously loaded
data in the drive:
RO Uni NC PT US
• If the compare is successful Pr xx.00 is simply set to 0
• If the compare fails a ‘C.cpr’ trip is initiated Ú 0 to 999 Ö 0
9.3.7 7yyy / 9999 - Erasing data from the This parameter shows the number of the data block last parameter or
SMARTCARD difference from default data block transferred from a SMARTCARD to
Data can be erased from the SMARTCARD one data block at a time or the drive.
with data blocks 1 to 499 in selected together.
• Setting 7yyy in Pr xx.00 will erase SMARTCARD data block yyy
• Setting 9999 in Pr xx.00 will erase SMARTCARD data blocks 1 to 11.37 SMARTCARD data number
499 RW Uni NC
9.3.8 9666 / 9555 - Set / clear SMARTCARD warning Ú 0 to 1002 Ö 0
suppression flag
1. If the Solutions Module(s) installed to the source and destination This parameter shows the data blocks that are stored on a
drive are different, or are in different slots, the drive will produce a SMARTCARD with header information, including a number to identify
'C.Optn' trip. the data block.
2. If the data is being transferred to a drive of a different voltage or
current rating a 'C.rtg' trip will occur. 11.38 SMARTCARD data type/mode
It is possible to suppress these trips by setting the warning suppression
RO Txt NC PT
flag. If this flag is set the drive will not trip if the Solutions Module(s) or
drive ratings are different between the source and the destination drives. Ú 0 to 18 Ö
The Solutions Module or rating dependent parameters will not be
transferred. This parameter gives the type/mode of the data block selected with
• Setting 9666 in Pr xx.00 will set the warning suppression flag Pr 11.37 as shown in the following table.
• Setting 9555 in Pr xx.00 will clear the warning suppression flag Table 9-4 Pr 11.38 types and modes
9.3.9 9888 / 9777 - Set / clear the SMARTCARD read Pr 11.38 String Type/Mode
only flag 0 FrEE Value when Pr 11.37 = 0
The SMARTCARD may be protected from writing or erasing by setting Commander SE mode parameter file
the read only flag. If an attempt is made to write or erase a data block 1 3C.SE
(not used)
when the read only flag is set, a 'C.rdo' trip is initiated.
2 3OpEn.LP Open-loop mode parameter file
When the read only flag is set only codes 6yyy or 9777 are effective.
3 3CL.VECt Closed-loop vector mode parameter file
• Setting 9888 in Pr xx.00 will set the read only flag
4 3SErVO Servo mode parameter file
• Setting 9777 in Pr xx.00 will clear the read only flag
5 3REGEn Regen mode parameter file
9.4 Data block header information 6 3DC DC mode parameter file
Each data block stored on a SMARTCARD has header information 7 3Un Unused
detailing the following: 8 3Un Unused
• A number which identifies the data block (Pr 11.37) Commander SE mode difference from default
9 4C.SE
• Type of data stored in the data block (Pr 11.38) file (not used)
• Drive mode if the data is parameter data (Pr 11.38) 10 4OpEn.LP Open-loop mode difference from default file
• Version number (Pr 11.39) Closed-loop vector mode difference from
• Checksum (Pr 11.40) 11 4CL.VECt
default file
• Read-only flag
12 4SErVO Servo mode difference from default file
• Warning suppression flag
The header information for each data block that has been used can be 13 4REGEn Regen mode difference from default file
viewed in Pr 11.38 to Pr 11.40 by increasing or decreasing the data block 14 4DC DC Mode difference from default file
number set in Pr 11.37. 15 & 16 4Un Unused
If Pr 11.37 is set to 1000: the checksum parameter (Pr 11.40) shows the 17 LAddEr Onboard Application Lite user program file
number of bytes left on the card in 16 byte pages. A file containing user defined data (the file is
If Pr 11.37 is set to 1001: the checksum parameter (Pr 11.40) shows the 18 Option normally created by an SM-Applications
total capacity of the card in 16 byte pages. Therefore, for a 4kB card this Solutions Module)
parameter would show 254. A file containing user defined data (normally
If Pr 11.37 is set to 1002: the checksum parameter (Pr 11.40) shows the 19 OptPrg created by an SM-Applications Solutions
state of the read-only (bit 0) and warning suppression flags (bit 1). Module user program (Digitax ST only)
If there is no data on the card: Pr 11.37 can only have values of 0 or
1000 to 1002. 11.39 SMARTCARD data version
RW Uni NC
Ú 0 to 9999 Ö 0
This parameter gives the version number of the data block.

* Mode 1 and Mode 2 are not saved when the drive parameters are
11.40 SMARTCARD data checksum
saved. This parameter can only be saved to EEPROM if it has a value of
RO Uni NC PT 0, 3 or 4.
Ú 0 to 65335 Ö 0 Table 9-5 Pr 11.42 actions
This parameter gives the checksum of the data block, space left on the Actions Value Result
card, the total space on the card or the card flags. Refer to Pr 11.37 for None 0 Inactive
information.
Read parameter set from
Reading 1
SMARTCARD
11.42
Parameter copying Program parameter set to the
(SE09, 0.30) Programming 2
SMARTCARD
RW Txt NC US*
Auto 3 Auto save
Ú 0 to 4 Ö 0 Boot 4 Boot mode
NOTE
9.6 SMARTCARD trips

After an attempt to read, write or erase data to or from a SMARTCARD a trip may occur if there has been a problem with the command. Table 9-6 lists
the trip indications and conditions that will cause the SMARTCARD to trip,
Table 9-6 Trip conditions
Trip Condition
SMARTCARD trip: The menu 0 parameter modification cannot be saved to the SMARTCARD because the necessary
C.boot
file has not been created on the SMARTCARD
A write to a Menu 0 parameter has been initiated with the keypad by exiting edit mode and Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) is set for
177 auto or boot mode. However the necessary boot file has not been created on the SMARTCARD to take the new parameter
value. This occurs when Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) is changed to auto or boot mode, but the drive is not subsequently reset.
SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD can not perform the required function as it is being accessed by a Solutions
C.BUSy
Module
An attempt has been made to access a SMARTCARD. However an Solutions Module is already accessing the
178
SMARTCARD.
C.Chg SMARTCARD trip: Data location already contains data
179 An attempt has been made to store data in a SMARTCARD data block that already exists.
C.Optn SMARTCARD trip: Solutions Modules installed are different between source drive and destination drive
Parameter data or default difference data is being transferred from a SMARTCARD to the drive, but the Solutions Module
categories are different between source and destination drives. This trip does not stop the data transfer, but is a warning that
180
the data for the Solutions Modules that are different will be set to the default values and not the values from the card. This trip
also applies if a compare is attempted between the data block and the drive.
C.Rdo SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD has the Read Only bit set
An attempt has been made to modify a read-only SMARTCARD (i.e. erase the card, erase a file or create a file). A
181 SMARTCARD is read-only if the read-only flag has been set or the card contains data blocks with numbers from 500 to 999.
Attempting to create data blocks with numbers from 500 to 999 will always cause a trip.
C.Err SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD data is corrupted
An attempt has been made to transfer a data block from a SMARTCARD to the drive or to compare a SMARTCARD data
182
block and the checksum is incorrect or the data structure on the card is incorrect.
C.dat SMARTCARD trip: Data location specified does not contain any data
An attempt has been made to transfer a data block from a SMARTCARD to the drive or to compare a SMARTCARD data
183
block and the block does not exist.
C.FULL SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD full
184 An attempt has been made to create a data block on a SMARTCARD, but there is not enough space on the card.
C.Acc SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD Read / Write fail
An attempt has been made to access a SMARTCARD, but a card is not present or communications failure has occurred
185 between the drive and the card. This trip is also produced if an attempt is made to access a data block that has already been
opened by an Solutions Module.
C.rtg SMARTCARD trip: The voltage and/or current rating of the source and destination drives are different
Parameter data or default difference data is being transferred from a SMARTCARD to the drive, but the current and /or
voltage ratings are different between source and destination drives. This trip does not stop the data transfer, but is a warning
186
that the data for the Solutions Modules that are different will be set to the default values and not the values from the card. This
trip also applies if a compare is attempted between the data block and the drive.

Trip Condition
C.Typ SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD parameter set not compatible with drive
This trip is produced during a compare if the drive mode in the data block is different from the current drive mode and the file
is a parameter or defaults differences file. This trip is also produced if an attempt is made to transfer parameters from a
187
parameter or default difference to the drive if the drive mode in the data block is outside the allowed range of drive modes for
the drive.
C.cpr SMARTCARD trip: The values stored in the drive and the values in the data block on the SMARTCARD are different
A compare has been carried out between a data block on a SMARTCARD and the drive and the compare has failed. This trip
188
only occurs if the compare has not already failed with the following trips: C.Typ, C.rtg, C.Optn, C.BUSy, C.Acc or C.Err.
Table 9-7 SMARTCARD status indications

Lower
Description
display
boot
A parameter set is being transferred from the SMARTCARD to the
drive during power-up. For further information please refer to section
9.3.4 Booting up from the SMARTCARD on every power up (Pr 11.42
(SE09, 0.30) = boot (4)) on page 86.
cArd
The drive is writing a parameter set to the SMARTCARD during power-
up. For further information please refer to section 9.3.3 Auto saving
parameter changes on page 86.

10 Onboard PLC • There are no real-time tasks, i.e. the scheduling rate of the program
cannot be guaranteed. SM-Applications Plus tasks such as Clock,
Event, Pos0 or Speed are not available.
10.1 Onboard PLC and SYPT Lite • The Onboard PLC should not be used for time-critical applications.
The Mentor MP has the ability to store and execute a 6 kB Onboard PLC For time-critical applications either the SM-Applications Plus or SM-
ladder logic program without the need for additional hardware in the form Applications Lite V2 Solutions Modules should be used.
of a Solutions Module. The program runs at a low priority. The Mentor MP provides a single
background task in which to run a ladder diagram. The drive is prioritized
The ladder logic program is written using SYPT Lite, a Windows™
to perform its major functions first, e.g. motor control, and will use any
based ladder diagram editor allowing the development of programs for remaining processing time to execute the ladder diagram as a
execution in SM-Applications Plus.
background activity. As the drive's processor becomes more heavily
Advantages of SYPT Lite: loaded, less time is spent executing the program.
• SYPT Lite is designed to be easy to use and to make program Figure 10-1 Mentor MP Onboard PLC program scheduling
development as simple as possible. The features provided are a
sub-set of those in the SYPT program editor.
• SYPT Lite programs are developed using ladder logic, a graphical Major
drive
language widely used to program PLCs (IEC 61131-3). functions
• SYPT Lite allows the user to draw a ladder diagram representing a
program.
• SYPT Lite provides a complete environment for the development of User
ladder diagrams. Ladder diagrams can be created, compiled into program
user programs and downloaded to SM-Applications Plus for
execution, via the RJ45 serial communications port on the front of 0 64 128
the drive. Time
• The run-time operation of the compiled ladder diagram on the target (milliseconds)
can also be monitored using SYPT Lite and facilities are provided to
interact with the program on the target by setting new values for The user program is scheduled for a short period approximately once
target parameters. every 64 ms. The time for which the program is scheduled will vary
• SYPT Lite is available on the CD that is supplied with the drive. between 0.2 ms and 2ms depending on the loading of the drive's
processor.
10.2 Benefits When scheduled, several scans of the user program may be performed.
The combination of the Onboard PLC and SYPT Lite means that Mentor Some scans may execute in microseconds. However, when the main
MP can replace nano and some micro PLCs in many applications. The drive functions are scheduled there will be a pause in the execution of
Onboard PLC programs can consist of up to a maximum of 50 ladder the program causing some scans to take many milliseconds. SYPT Lite
logic rungs (up to 7 function blocks and 10 contacts per rung). The displays the average execution time calculated over the last 10 scans of
Onboard PLC program can also be transferred to and from a the user program.
SMARTCARD for backup or quick commissioning / start-up.
The Onboard PLC and SYPT Lite form the first level of functionality in a
In addition to the basic ladder symbols, SYPT Lite contains a sub-set of range of programmable options for Mentor MP.
the function from the full version of SYPT. These include: • SYPT Lite can be used with either the Onboard PLC or with SM-
• Arithmetic blocks Applications Lite V2 to create ladder logic programs.
• Comparison blocks • SYPT can be used with either the SM-Applications Lite V2 or SM-
• Timers Applications Plus to create fully flexible programs using ladder logic,
• Counters function blocks or DPL script.
• Multiplexers
• Latches
• Bit manipulation
Typical applications for the Onboard PLC include,
• Ancillary pumps
• Fans and control valves
• Interlocking logic
• Sequences routines
• Custom control words.
10.3 Limitations
Compared with the SM-Applications Plus or SM-Applications Lite V2
modules when programmed with SYPT, the Onboard PLC program has
the following limitations:
• The maximum program size is 6080 bytes including header and
optional source code.
• The Mentor MP is rated for 100 program downloads. This limitation
is imposed by the flash memory used to store the program within the
drive.
• The user cannot create user variables. The user is only able to
manipulate the drive parameter set.
• The program cannot be downloaded or monitored over CTNet. The
program is only accessible via the drives RJ45 serial
communications port.

Figure 10-2 Programming options for Mentor MP

FUNCTIONALITY
Level 4
SM-Applications
Plus with SYPT
software
Level 3
SM-Applications Lite V2
with SYPT software
Level 2
SM-Applications Lite V2 with
SYPTLite software
Level 1
Onboard PLC with SYPTLite software
CAPABILITY
10.4 Getting started 10.5 Onboard PLC parameters

SYPTLite can be found on the CD which is supplied with the drive. The following parameters are associated with the Onboard PLC
SYPTLite system requirements program.
• Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Windows 95/98/98SE/Me/NT4 are not

supported 11.47 Drive Onboard PLC program enable
• Pentium III 500 MHz or better recommended RW Uni US
• 128 MB RAM
• Minimum of 800 x 600 screen resolution. 1024 x 768 is Ú 0 to 2 Ö 2
recommended
This parameter is used to start and stop the drive Onboard PLC program.
• Adobe Acrobat 5.10 or later (for viewing User Guides)
• Microsoft Internet Explorer V5.0 or later Value Description
• RS232 to RS485, RJ45 communications lead to connect the PC to
0 Halt the drive Onboard PLC program.
the drive
Run the drive Onboard PLC program (if installed). Any out-of-
• Administrator rights are required to install the software
range parameter writes attempted will be clipped to the
To install SYPTLite, insert the CD and the auto-run facility should start 1
maximum / minimum values valid for that parameter before
up the front-end screen, from which SYPTLite can be selected. being written.
See the SYPTLite help file for more information regarding using Run the drive Onboard PLC program (if installed). Any out-of-
SYPTLite, creating ladder diagrams and the available function blocks. 2
range parameter writes attempted will cause a ‘UP ovr’ trip.
11.48 Drive Onboard PLC program status

RO Bi NC PT
Ú -128 to +127 Ö
The drive Onboard PLC program status parameter indicates to the user
the actual state of the drive Onboard PLC program.

Value Description 10.6 Onboard PLC trips

Onboard PLC program caused a drive trip due to an error The following trips are associated with the Onboard PLC program.
-n condition while running rung n. Note that the rung number is
shown on the display as a negative number. Trip Diagnosis
0 Onboard PLC program is not installed. Onboard PLC program: Cannot access Onboard
UP ACC
1 Onboard PLC program is installed but stopped. PLC program file on drive
2 Onboard PLC program is installed and running. Disable drive - write access is not allowed when the
drive is enabled.
When an Onboard PLC program is installed and running, the lower 98
Another source is already accessing Onboard PLC
display of the drive flashes ‘PLC’ once every 10 s.
program - retry once the other action is complete.
UP div0 Onboard PLC program attempted divide by zero
11.49 Drive Onboard PLC programming events
90 Check program
RO Uni NC PT PS
Onboard PLC program variables and function
Ú 0 to 65,535 Ö UP OFL block calls using more than the allowed RAM
space (stack overflow)
The drive Onboard PLC programming events parameter holds the
number of times an Onboard PLC program download has taken place 95 Check program
and is 0 on dispatch from the factory. The drive is rated for one hundred Onboard PLC program attempted out of range
ladder program downloads. This parameter is not altered when defaults UP ovr
parameter write
are loaded.
94 Check program
11.50 Drive Onboard PLC program average scan time Onboard PLC program attempted access to a non-
UP PAr
existent parameter
RO Uni NC PT
91 Check program
Ú 0 to 65,535 ms Ö
Onboard PLC program attempted write to a read-
UP ro
This parameter is updated once per second or once per Onboard PLC only parameter
program scan whichever is the longest. If more than one program scan 92 Check program
occurs within the one second update period the parameter shows the
average scan time. If the program scan time is longer than one second Onboard PLC program attempted read of a write-
UP So
the parameter shows the time for the last program scan. only parameter
93 Check program
11.51 Drive Onboard PLC program first run UP udF Onboard PLC program undefined trip
RO Bit NC PT 97 Check program
Ú OFF (0) or On (1) Ö UP uSEr Onboard PLC program requested a trip
The Drive Onboard PLC program first run parameter is set for the 96 Check program
duration of program scan from the stopped state. This enables the user
to perform any required initialisation every time the program is run. This
parameter is set every time the program is stopped.
10.7 Onboard PLC and the SMARTCARD
The Onboard PLC program in a drive may be transferred from the drive
to a SMARTCARD and vice versa.
• To transfer an Onboard PLC program from the drive to a
SMARTCARD, set Pr xx.00 to 5yyy and reset the drive
• To transfer an Onboard PLC program from the SMARTCARD to a
drive, set Pr xx.00 to 6yyy and reset the drive.
(Where yyy is the data block location, see Table 9-1 SMARTCARD data
blocks on page 85 for restrictions on block numbers).
If an attempt is made to transfer an Onboard PLC program from a drive
to the SMARTCARD when the drive contains no program, the block is
still created on the SMARTCARD but it will contain no data. If this data
block is then transferred to a drive, the destination drive will then have
no Onboard PLC program.
The smallest SMARTCARD compatible with Mentor MP has a capacity
of 4064 bytes and each block can be up to 4064 bytes in size. The
maximum size of a user program is 4032 bytes so it is guaranteed that
any Onboard PLC program downloaded to a Mentor MP will fit on to an
empty SMARTCARD. A SMARTCARD can contain a number of
Onboard PLC programs until the capacity of the card is used.

11 Advanced parameters Coding

The coding defines the attributes of the parameter as follows.
This is a quick reference to all parameters in the drive showing units,
ranges, limits etc, with block diagrams to illustrate their function. Full Table 11-2 Key to parameter table coding
parameter descriptions can be found in the Mentor MP Advanced User
Coding Attribute
Guide on the supplied CD ROM.
{X.XX} Copied Menu 0 or advanced parameter
These advanced parameters are listed for reference Bit 1 bit parameter: ‘On’ or ‘OFF’ on the display
purposes only. The lists in this chapter do not include
Bi Bipolar parameter
sufficient information for adjusting these parameters.
Incorrect adjustment can affect the safety of the system, and Uni Unipolar parameter
WARNING Txt Text: the parameter uses text strings instead of numbers.
damage the drive and or external equipment. Before
attempting to adjust any of these parameters, refer to the SP Spare: not used
Mentor MP Advanced User Guide. Filtered: some parameters which can have rapidly changing
FI values are filtered when displayed on the drive keypad for
Table 11-1 Menu descriptions
easy viewing.
Menu Function
Destination pointer parameter: This parameter can be used
Commonly used basic set-up parameters for quick / DE to set up the location (i.e. menu/parameter number) where
0
easy programming the destination data is to be routed.
1 Speed reference selection, limits and filters Variable maximum: the maximum of this parameter can
VM
2 Ramps vary.
3 Speed feedback and speed control Decimal place: indicates the number of decimal places used
DP
4 Torque and current control by this parameter.
5 Motor and field control No default: when defaults are loaded (except when the drive
ND is manufactured or on EEPROM failure) this parameter is
6 Sequencer and clock
not modified.
7 Analog I/O
Rating dependant: this parameter is likely to have different
8 Digital I/O values and ranges with drives of different voltage and
9 Programmable logic and motorized pot current ratings. Parameters with this attribute will not be
10 Drive status and trip information transferred to the destination drive by a SMARTCARD when
11 General drive set-up RA the rating of the destination drive is different from the source
drive if the drive voltage ratings are different or the file is a
Threshold detectors, variable selectors and brake
12 parameter file. However, the value will be transferred if only
control function
the current rating is different and the file is a differences
13 Position control
from default type file.
14 User PID controller Not copied: not transferred to or from SMARTCARD during
15 Slot 1 Solutions Module menu NC
copying.
16 Slot 2 Solutions Module menu NV Not visible: not visible on the keypad.
17 Slot 3 Solutions Module menu PT Protected: cannot be used as a destination.
18 User application menu 1 (saved in drive EEPROM) User save: saved in drive EEPROM when the user initiates
US
19 User application menu 2 (saved in drive EEPROM) a parameter save.
20 User application menu 3 (not saved in drive EEPROM) RW Read/write: can be written by the user.
21 Second motor parameters RO Read only: can only be read by the user
22 Additional Menu 0 set up Bit default one/unsigned: Bit parameters with this flag set to
23 Header selections one have a default of one (all other bit parameters have a
BU
default of zero. Non-bit parameters are unipolar if this flag is
Default abbreviations: one.
Eur> European default value Power-down save: parameter automatically saved in drive
USA> USA default value EEPROM when the under volts (UV) trip occurs. Power-
PS
NOTE
down save parameters are also saved in the drive when the
Parameter numbers shown in brackets {...} are the equivalent sub block/ user initiates a parameter save.
Menu 0 parameters.
In some cases, the function or range of a parameter is affected by the
setting of another parameter; the information in the lists relates to the
default condition of such parameters.

Table 11-3 Feature look-up table
Feature Related parameters (Pr)

Acceleration rates 2.10 2.11 to 2.19 2.32 2.33 2.34 2.02
Analog speed reference 1 1.36 7.10 7.01 7.07 7.08 7.09 7.25 7.26 7.30
Analog speed reference 2 1.37 7.14 1.41 7.02 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.28 7.31
Analog I/O Menu 7
Analog input 1 7.01 7.07 7.08 7.09 7.10 7.25 7.26 7.30
Analog input 2 7.02 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.28 7.31
Analog input 3 7.03 7.15 7.16 7.17 7.18 7.29 7.32
Analog output 1 7.19 7.20 7.21 7.33
Analog output 2 7.22 7.23 7.24
Application menu Menu 18 Menu 19 Menu 20
Armature IR compensation 5.88
Armature mode 5.43
At speed indicator bit 3.06 3.07 3.09 10.06 10.05 10.07
Auto reset 10.34 10.35 10.36 10.01
Autotune 4.13 4.14 4.34 5.12 5.15 5.23 5.24 5.29 5.30 5.59 5.61 5.70 5.72 5.74
Bridge request output 5.44
Binary sum 9.29 9.30 9.31 9.32 9.33 9.34
Bipolar speed 1.10
Brake control 12.40 to 12.49
Catch a spinning motor 6.09
Coast to stop 6.01
Comms 11.23 to 11.26
Copying 11.42 11.36 to 11.40
Cost - per kWh electricity 6.16 6.17 6.24 6.25 6.26 6.40
Current controller 4.13 4.14 4.34 5.15
Current feedback 4.01 4.02 4.16 4.19 4.20 4.27 4.28 4.29 4.30 4.31 4.32 10.08 10.17
Current limits 4.05 4.06 4.07 4.18 5.07 10.09
Deceleration rates 2.20 2.21 to 2.29 2.04 2.35 to 2.37 2.02 2.08 6.01
Defaults 11.46
Digital I/O Menu 8
Digital I/O read word 8.20
Digital I/O T24 8.01 8.11 8.21 8.31
Digital I/O T25 8.02 8.12 8.22 8.32
Digital I/O T26 8.03 8.13 8.23 8.33
Digital input T27 8.04 8.14 8.24
Digital input T28 8.05 8.15 8.25 8.39
Digital input T29 8.06 8.16 8.26 8.39
Digital lock 13.10 13.01 to 13.09 13.11 13.12 13.16 3.22 3.23 13.19 to 13.23
Direction 10.13 6.30 6.31 3.01 3.02 10.14 8.03 8.04
Display timeout 11.41
Drive active 10.02
Drive OK 10.01 8.27 8.07 8.17 10.36
Electronic nameplate 3.49
Enable 6.15 8.09 8.10
Encoder reference 3.43 3.44 3.45 3.46
Encoder set up 3.33 3.34 to 3.42 3.47 3.48
External flux feedback 5.89
External flux feedback select 5.48
External trip 10.32 8.10 8.07
Fan speed 6.45
Field IR compensation 5.87
Filter change 6.19 6.18
Hard speed reference 3.22 3.23
I/O sequencer 6.04 6.30 6.31 6.32 6.33 6.34 6.42 6.43 6.40
Inertia compensation 2.38 5.12 4.22 3.18
Jog reference 1.05 2.19 2.29
Keypad reference 1.17 1.14 1.43 1.51 6.12 6.13
Limit switches 6.35 6.36
Line power supply loss 6.03 5.05
Local position reference 13.20 to 13.23
Logic function 1 9.01 9.04 9.05 9.06 9.07 9.08 9.09 9.10
Logic function 2 9.02 9.14 9.15 9.16 9.17 9.18 9.19 9.20
Marker pulse 3.32 3.31

Feature Related parameters (Pr)

Maximum speed 1.06
Menu 0 set up 22.01 to 22.21 Menu 22
Minimum speed 1.07 10.04
Modules - number of 11.35
Motor map 5.07 5.08 5.09 5.70 5.73
Motor map 2 Menu 21 11.45
Motorized potentiometer 9.21 9.22 9.23 9.24 9.25 9.26 9.27 9.28
Offset speed reference 1.04 1.38 1.09
Onboard PLC 11.47 to 11.51
Open collector digital outputs 8.30
Orientation 13.10 13.13 to 13.15
Output 5.01 5.02 5.03
Overspeed threshold 3.08
PID controller Menu 14
Position feedback - drive 3.28 3.29 3.30 3.50
Positive logic 8.29
Power up parameter 11.22 11.21
Precision reference 1.18 1.19 1.20 1.44
Preset speeds 1.15 1.21 to 1.28 1.16 1.14 1.42 1.45 to 1.48 1.50
Programmable logic Menu 9
Regenerating 10.10
Relative jog 13.17 to 13.19
Relay output 8.07 8.17 8.27 8.40 8.50 8.60
Reset 10.33 8.02 8.22 10.34 10.35 10.36 10.01
S ramp 2.06 2.07
Security code 11.30 11.44
Serial comms 11.23 to 11.26
Skip speeds 1.29 1.30 1.31 1.32 1.33 1.34 1.35
Slave bridge request status 5.45 to 5.47
SMARTCARD 11.36 to 11.40 11.42
Software version 11.29 11.34
Speed controller 3.10 to 3.17 3.20 3.21
Speed feedback 3.02 3.03
Speed feedback - drive 3.26 3.27 3.28 3.29 3.31 3.42 3.52 3.55 3.56 3.57 3.58
Speed reference selection 1.14 1.15 1.49 1.50 1.01
Status word 10.40
Supply 5.05
Thermal protection - drive 7.04 7.34 10.18
Thermal protection - motor 4.15 5.07 4.19 4.16 4.25 7.15
Thermistor input 7.15 7.03
Threshold detector 1 12.01 12.03 to 12.07
Threshold detector 2 12.02 12.23 to 12.27
Time - filter change 6.19 6.18
Time - powered up log 6.20 6.21 6.28
Time - run log 6.22 6.23 6.28
Torque 4.03 4.26 5.32
Torque mode 4.08 4.11 4.09 4.10
Trip detection 10.20 to 10.29
Trip log 10.20 to 10.29 10.41 to 10.51 6.28
Under voltage 5.05
Variable selector 1 12.08 to 12.15
Variable selector 2 12.28 to 12.35
Velocity feed forward 1.39 1.40
Voltage rating 11.33 5.09 5.05
Warning 10.19 10.17 10.18 10.40
Zero speed indicator bit 3.05 10.03

Parameter ranges and variable maximums:

The two values provided define the minimum and maximum values for
the given parameter. In some cases the parameter range is variable and
dependant on either:
• other parameters
• the drive rating
• or a combination of these
The values given in Table 11-4 are the variable maximums used in the
drive.
Table 11-4 Definition of parameter ranges & variable maximums
Maximum Definition
Maximum speed reference
If Pr 1.08 = 0: MAX_SPEED_REF = Pr 1.06 (SE02, 0.23)
MAX_SPEED_REF
If Pr 1.08 = 1: MAX_SPEED_REF is Pr 1.06 (SE02, 0.23) or – Pr 1.07 (SE01, 0.22) whichever is the largest
[10000.0 rpm]
(If the second motor map is selected Pr 21.01 is used instead of Pr 1.06 (SE02, 0.23) and Pr 21.02 instead of
Pr 1.07 (SE01, 0.22))
Maximum applied to speed reference limits
A maximum limit may be applied to the speed reference to prevent the nominal encoder frequency from
exceeding 500kHz. The maximum is defined by
SPEED_LIMIT_MAX (in rpm) = 500kHz x 60 / ELPR = 3.0 x 107 / ELPR subject to an absolute maximum of
SPEED_LIMIT_MAX 10,000 rpm.
[10000.0 rpm] ELPR is equivalent encoder lines per revolution and is the number of lines that would be produced by a
quadrature encoder.
Quadrature encoder ELPR = number of lines per revolution
F and D encoder ELPR = number of lines per revolution / 2
This maximum is defined by the device selected with the speed feedback selector (Pr 3.26 (Fb01, 0.71)) and
the ELPR set for the position feedback device.
Maximum speed
SPEED_MAX This maximum is used for some speed related parameters in menu 3. To allow headroom for overshoot etc. the
[10000.0 rpm] maximum speed is twice the maximum speed reference.
SPEED_MAX = 2 x MAX_SPEED_REF
Maximum ramp rate
If (Pr 1.06 (SE02, 0.23) [Pr 21.01] >= 1000 and Pr 2.39 = 0) or Pr 2.39 >= 1000 then
MAX_RAMP_RATE = 3200.000
MAX_RAMP_RATE
Else if Pr 2.39 = 0
MAX_RAMP_RATE_M2
MAX_RAMP_RATE = 3200 * Pr 1.06 (SE02, 0.23) [Pr 21.01] / 1000.0
[3200.000]
Else
MAX_RAMP_RATE = 3200 * Pr 2.39 / 1000.0
End if
RATED_CURRENT_MAX Maximum motor rated current
[9999.99A]
Maximum drive current
DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX
The maximum drive current is the current at the over current trip level and is given by:
[9999.99A]
DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX = RATED_CURRENT_MAX x 2
Maximum current limit settings for motor map 1
MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX
This maximum current limit setting is the maximum applied to the current limit parameters in motor map 1. See
[1000.0 %]
introduction to Menu 4 for the definition.
Maximum current limit settings for motor map 2
MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX
This maximum current limit setting is the maximum applied to the current limit parameters in motor map 2. See
[1000.0 %]
introduction to Menu 4 for the definition.
Maximum torque producing current
TORQUE_PROD_CURRENT_MAX This is used as a maximum for torque and torque producing current parameters. It is
[1000.0 %] MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX or MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX depending on which motor map is
currently active.
Current parameter limit selected by the user
USER_CURRENT_MAX The user can select a maximum for Pr 4.08 (torque reference) and Pr 4.20 (percentage load) to give suitable
[1000.0 %] scaling for analog I/O with Pr 4.24. This maximum is subject to a limit of CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX.
USER_CURRENT_MAX = Pr 4.24

Maximum Definition
Maximum armature voltage
Vac x 1.35 (√2 x 3 / π)
480 +10 % drive: 720
ARMATURE_VOLTAGE_MAX 575 +10 % drive: 860
[1025] 690 +10 % drive: 1025
NOTE
For 4 quadrant drives maximum armature voltage = Vac x 1.15
Quadrant maximum
QUADRANT_MAX 0 for a 2 quadrant drive.
1 for a 4 quadrant drive.
Maximum power in kW
The maximum power has been chosen to allow for the maximum power that can be output by the drive with
POWER_MAX
maximum DC output voltage and maximum controlled current.
[9999.99kW]
Therefore:
POWER_MAX = ARMATURE_VOLTAGE_MAX x DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX
The values given in square brackets indicate the absolute maximum value allowed for the variable maximum.

11.1 Menu 1: Speed reference

Menu 1 controls the main reference selection.
Figure 11-1 Menu 1 logic diagram
LOCAL/REMOTE
Analog reference
Analog input 1
Analog Menu 8
reference 1
1.36
Analog reference 2
Menu 7 1.41 select
1.37
Analog input 2 Analog

reference 2
1.42 Preset reference

select
Preset reference
Preset reference 1.43 Keypad reference
1.15 select
selector*
Preset reference select bits 1 ~ 3
1.44 Precision reference

1.47 1.46 select
1.45
Reference
1.14 selector*
1.52 Keypad only
select Reference selected
indicator
1.49
1.21 ~ 1.28
Preset +
references
1 to 8
+
Scan timer
1.38 1.01
1.20
Preset Reference
reference Pr 1.50 set to percentage Level of
selected 1.50
greater than 1 trim reference
1.16 indicator selected
Preset 1.04
reference
scan time Reference
offset
1.48 Pr 1.49 Pr 1.50 Reference being used
1 1 Analog reference 1 1.09
Preset reference 1 >1 Preset reference defined by Pr 1.50
Scan-timer reset 2 1 Analog reference 2 Reference
2 >1 Preset reference defined by Pr 1.50 offset mode
Keypad reference Power-up keypad 3 x Preset reference defined by Pr 1.50 select
1.51 control mode 4 x Keypad reference
reference 5 x Precision reference
6 x Keypad reference only
1.17
Keypad
Reference
Precision reference
Precision-reference
update disable Key
1.20
Input Read-write (RW)
terminals 0.XX
parameter
Precision
reference
Output 0.XX Read-only (RO)
1.18 Memory terminals parameter
1.19
Precision The parameters are all shown in their default settings
reference trim

JOG RUN FORWARD RUN REVERSE
Menu 8
Menu 6
Sequencer
Sequencer (Menu 6)
Jog selected 1.13 Reference in skip
indicator speed band
indicator
Menu 13
Bipolar Position control Reference
reference 1.10 1.35
1.11 enabled
select indicator
Pre-ramp
reference
Feed-forward Pre-filter
selected 1.06 1.02 reference 1.03
indicator Maximum
Reverse speed "clamp"
selected 1.12 1.40
indicator
1.07
Menu 2
Minimum
Negative speed "clamp"
minimum (Maximum
speed reverse speed)
select
1.08
[1.06]
[1.07]
[1.07]
[1.06]
x(-1)
1.29 1.31 1.33

1.39 [1.06]
Skip Skip Skip
speed 1 speed 2 speed 3
Velocity
1.05 feed-forward
reference [1.06] 1.30 1.32 1.34
Jog
Skip Skip Skip
reference
speed band speed band speed band
1 2 3
[1.06]
[1.07]
*Refer to Pr 1.14 (SE05, 0.26) for further information.


1.01 Speed reference selected {di01, 0.36} RO Bi NC PT
1.02 Pre-skip filter reference ±MAX_SPEED_REF rpm RO Bi NC PT
1.03 Pre-ramp reference {di02, 0.37} RO Bi NC PT
1.04 Reference offset ±10,000.0 rpm RW Bi US
0.0
1.05 Jog reference 0 to 1,000.0 rpm RW Uni US
1.06 Maximum reference clamp {SE02, 0.23} SPEED_LIMIT_MAX rpm 1000.0 RW Uni US
1.07 Minimum reference clamp {SE01, 0.22} ±SPEED_LIMIT_MAX rpm* 0.0 RW Bi PT US
1.08 Negative minimum reference clamp enable RW Bit US
1.09 Reference offset select OFF (0) RW Bit US
1.10 Bipolar reference enable RW Bit US
OFF (0) or On (1)
1.11 Reference enabled indicator {di11, 0.46} RO Bit NC PT
1.12 Reverse selected indicator {di12, 0.47} RO Bit NC PT
1.13 Jog selected indicator {di13, 0.48} RO Bit NC PT
1.14 Reference selector {SE05, 0.26} 0 to 6 0 (A1.A2) RW Txt US
1.15 Preset selector 0 to 9 0 RW Uni US
1.16 Preset reference selector timer 0 to 400.0 s 10.0 RW Uni US
1.17 Keypad control reference ±MAX_SPEED_REF rpm RO Bi NC PT PS
0.0
1.18 Precision reference coarse ±MAX_SPEED_REF rpm RW Bi US
1.19 Precision reference fine 0.0 to 0.099 rpm 0.000 RW Uni US
1.20 Precision reference update disable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
1.21 Preset reference 1 RW Bi US
±MAX_SPEED_REF rpm 0.0
1.29 Skip reference 1 0 to 10,000 rpm 0 RW Uni US
1.30 Skip reference band 1 0 to 250 rpm 5 RW Uni US
1.35 Reference in rejection zone OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
1.36 Analog reference 1 RO Bi NC
±MAX_SPEED_REF rpm 0
1.37 Analog reference 2 RO Bi NC
1.38 Percentage trim ±100.00 % 0.00 RW Bi NC
1.39 Velocity feed-forward reference ±10,000.0 rpm RO Bi NC PT
1.40 Feed forward selected RO Bit NC PT
1.41 Analog reference 2 select RW Bit NC
1.42 Preset reference select RW Bit NC
1.43 Keypad reference select RW Bit NC
1.44 Precision reference select OFF (0) or On (1) RW Bit NC
OFF (0)
1.45 Preset reference select bit 1 RW Bit NC
1.48 Preset reference scan timer reset RW Bit NC
1.49 Reference selected indicator 1 to 6 RO Uni NC
1.50 Preset reference selected indicator 1 to 8 RO Uni NC PT
1.51 Power-up keypad reference control mode 0 to 2 0 RW Txt US
1.52 Keypad reference only select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
*The range shown for Pr 1.07 shows the range used for scaling purposes (i.e. for routing to an analog output etc). Further range restrictions are
applied depending on the settings of Pr 1.08 and Pr 1.10.
RW Read / Write RO Read only Uni Unipolar Bi Bi-polar Bit Bit parameter Txt Text string
FI Filtered DE Destination NC Not copied RA Rating dependent PT Protected US User save PS Power down save


11.2 Menu 2: Ramps

The pre-ramp speed reference passes through the ramp block controlled by menu 2 before being used by the drive to produce input to the speed
controller. The ramp block includes: linear ramps, and an S ramp function for ramped acceleration and deceleration.
Acceleration rate select bits

Key
2.34 2.33 2.32

2.32 Input Read-write (RW)
terminals 0.XX
Acceleration parameter
2.30
ramp selected
0 0 0 Output 0.XX Read-only (RO)

terminals parameter
0 0 1
0 1 0
The parameters are all shown at their default settings
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
Acceleration
1 1 0 rate selector
1 1 1
2.10
Acceleration rates 1 ~ 8
2.11 Acceleration rate 1
Preset reference 1.50

selected indicator
Jog acceleration
1 2.19
rate
2
3
4 Jog selected
1.13
indicator
5
6
7 Reverse Forward
8 accel. rate accel. rate
N N
t t
Acceleration
Ramp control
2.03 Ramp hold
Pre-ramp speed 2.40 S-Ramp time

reference 1.03
2.41 S-Ramp mode
2.39 Ramp rate speed units

Deceleration rate select bits
2.37 2.36 2.35
Deceleration 2.31
ramp selected
Deceleration
rate selector
2.20
Preset reference
1.50
selected indicator
2.29 Jog deceleration

rate
Jog selected
1.13
indicator
Forward Reverse
Decel. rate Decel. rate
N N
t t
2.02 Ramp enable Ramp output
selector
Deceleration
Post-ramp 2.05
Ramp control reference
2.06 S-Ramp enable**

2.01
S-Ramp acceleration Menu 3
2.07
limit
d/dt
Pr 3.18 = Motor and load inertia 2.38

Pr 5.32 = Motor torque per amp
Inertia compensation
torque
** For more information refer to the Mentor MP Advanced User Guide.


2.01 Post ramp reference {di03, 0.38} ±SPEED_MAX rpm RO Bi NC PT
2.02 Ramp enable On (1) RW Bit US
2.03 Ramp hold 0 RW Bit US
OFF (0) or On (1)
2.05 Ramp output selector On (1) RW Bit US
2.06 S ramp enable 0 Eur: 0, USA: 1 RW Bit US
2.07 S ramp acceleration limit 0 to 100.000 s2/1000 rpm 3.600 RW Uni US
2.10 Acceleration rate selector 0 to 9 0 RW Uni US
2.11 Acceleration rate 1 {SE03, 0.24} RW Uni US
2.12 Acceleration rate 2 RW Uni US
0 to MAX_RAMP_RATE s /
2.15 Acceleration rate 5 5.000 RW Uni US
(Pr 1.06 OR Pr 2.39)
2.19 Jog acceleration rate RW Uni US
2.20 Deceleration rate selector 0 to 9 0 RW Uni US
2.21 Deceleration rate 1 {SE04, 0.25} RW Uni US
2.22 Deceleration rate 2 RW Uni US
0 to MAX_RAMP_RATE s / 5.000
(Pr 1.06 OR Pr 2.39)
2.29 Jog deceleration rate 10.000 RW Uni US
2.30 Acceleration ramp selected RO Uni NC PT
1 to 8
2.31 Deceleration ramp selected RO Uni NC PT
2.32 Acceleration select bit 0 RW Bit NC
OFF (0) or On (1)
2.35 Deceleration select bit 0 RW Bit NC
2.38 Inertia compensation torque ± 1,000.0 % RO Bi NC PT
2.39 Ramp rate speed units 0 to 10000 rpm 0 RW Uni US
2.40 Time of S ramp 0 to 100.000 s 1.250 RW Uni US
2.41 S ramp mode OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US

11.3 Menu 3: Speed feedback and speed control

Speed accuracy and resolution
Digital reference resolution
When a preset speed is used the reference resolution is 0.1 rpm. Improved resolution can be obtained by using the precision reference (0.001 rpm).
Analog reference resolution
The analog input has a maximum resolution of 14 bits plus sign. The resolution of the reference from analog inputs 2 or 3 is 10 bits plus sign.
Analog feedback resolution
The resolution for both Armature voltage and tachogenerator feedback is 10 bit plus sign.
Accuracy
With encoder feedback the absolute speed accuracy depends on the accuracy of the crystal used with the drive microprocessor. The accuracy of the
crystal is 100 ppm, and so the absolute speed accuracy is 100 ppm (0.01 %) of the reference, when a preset speed is used. If an analog input is used
the absolute accuracy is further limited by the absolute accuracy and non-linearity of the analog input. If analog feedback is used the accuracy is even
further limited.


Hard speed
3.22
Speed controller set-up reference
Speed controller gain

3.16 select Hard speed
Speed controller reference
3.17 set-up method selector
3.23
Motor and load
3.18 inertia
Held at 0 when in
Speed error
3.20 Bandwidth Reference direct firing angle
invert
enabled 1.11
3.21 Damping factor indicator
5.86
Speed loop gains*
3.10 (Kp1) Speed

controller
Final speed Speed 3.11 (Ki1) output
reference error x-1
+
3.13 (Kp2)
3.04
Menu 2
+ 3.01 + +
3.03 3.14 (Ki2)
_ _
Speed feedback
Select estimated selector
3.55 speed on feedback Speed controller
3.26
loss differential
Estimated speed feedback gains
Speed feedback has been
3.56 loss window (Kd1)
automatically 3.12
selected
(Kd2) 3.15
3.57
Encoder interface Drive encoder

speed feedback
Drive encoder marker
3.31 position reset disable 3.27
Drive encoder marker
3.32 flag
3.33 Drive encoder turns Feedback from the

option modules set-up
Drive encoder lines in Menus 15, 16 and 17
3.34 per revolution
Drive encoder marker Speed feedback
3.35 mode from option 15.03
Drive encoder module in slot 1
3.36 supply voltage
Speed feedback Speed feedback Speed feedback
3.38 Drive encoder type from option 16.03 percentage
Drive encoder module in slot 2

3.39 termination select 3.02 3.58
Speed feedback
Drive encoder error
3.40 from option 17.03
detection level
module in slot 3 Speed detector threshold
3.42 Drive encoder filter levels
Tacho speed
Re-initialise position 3.05 Zero speed
3.47 3.52
feedback
‘At speed’
Position feedback 3.06
lower limit
3.48 initialised
5.04 ‘At speed’
3.07 upper limit
Full motor object
3.49 electronic nameplate Estimated
speed Overspeed
transfer 3.08
Drive encoder threshold
3.28 Absolute ‘at
3.54 Encoder direction revolution counter 3.09
speed’ detect
Drive encoder
3.29
position
Speed detector flags
Drive encoder
reference Drive encoder 10.03 Zero speed
reference scaling ??.??
Maximum drive
3.43 encoder 3.45 3.44 Running at
reference (rpm) or below
10.04
??.?? minimum
speed
Any unprotected
variable parameter Below set
Tachometer 10.05 speed
Drive 3.51 voltage rating Drive encoder
tachometer 3.46 reference
input Tachometer input destination
3.53 mode 10.06 At speed
Key
Above set
10.07 speed
terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter
* If Pr 5.28 (Field weakening compensation disable) is set to ‘OFF (0)’ a multiplication factor is applied to the speed loop gains when the flux is below
100 %.


3.01 Final speed reference {di04, 0.39} RO Bi FI NC PT
3.02 Speed feedback {di05, 0.40} ±SPEED_MAX rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
3.03 Speed error RO Bi FI NC PT
3.04 Speed controller output {di06, 0.41} ±Torque_prod_current_max % RO Bi FI NC PT
3.05 Zero speed threshold 0 to 200 rpm 30 RW Uni US
3.06 At speed lower limit RW Uni US
5
3.07 At speed upper limit 0 to 10,000 rpm RW Uni US
3.08 Overspeed threshold 0 RW Uni US
3.09 Absolute ‘at speed’ detect OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
Speed controller proportional gain
3.10 {SP01, 0.61} 0.0 to 6.5535 (1 / rad/s)) 0.0300 RW Uni US
(Kp1)
3.11 Speed controller integral gain (Ki1) {SP02, 0.62} 0 to 655.35 (s / rad/s)) 0.10 RW Uni US
Speed controller differential
3.12 {SP03, 0.63} 0 to 0.65535 (1/s / rad/s)) 0.00000 RW Uni US
feedback gain (Kd1)
3.13 Speed controller proportional gain (Kp2) 0.0 to 6.5535 (1 / rad/s)) 0.0300 RW Uni US
3.14 Speed controller integral gain (Ki2) 0 to 655.35 (s / rad/s)) 0.10 RW Uni US
3.15 Speed controller differential feedback gain (Kd2) 0 to 0.65535 (1/s / rad/s)) 0.00000 RW Uni US
3.16 Speed controller gain select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
3.17 Speed controller set-up method 0 to 2 0 RW Uni US
3.18 Motor and load inertia 0.0 to 90.00000 kg m2 0.00000 RW Uni US
3.20 Bandwidth 0 to 50 Hz 1 RW Uni US
3.21 Damping factor 0.0 to 10.0 1.0 RW Uni US
-MAX_SPEED_REF to
3.22 Hard speed reference 0.0 RW Bi US
MAX_SPEED_REF rpm
3.23 Hard speed reference selector OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
3.26 Speed feedback selector {Fb01, 0.71} 0 to 5 5 RW Txt US
3.27 Drive encoder speed feedback {Fb09, 0.79} ±10,000.0 rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
3.28 Drive encoder revolution counter ±32,768 revolutions RO Bi FI NC PT
3.29 Drive encoder position 0 to 65,535 1/216ths of a revolution RO Uni FI NC PT
3.31 Drive encoder marker position reset disable RW Bit US
OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0)
3.32 Drive encoder marker flag RW Bit NC
3.33 Drive encoder turn bits 0 to 16 16 RW Uni US
3.34 Drive encoder lines per revolution {Fb05, 0.75} 1 to 50,000 1024 RW Uni US
3.35 Drive encoder marker mode 0 to 1 RW Uni US
3.36 Drive encoder supply voltage {Fb06, 0.76} 0 to 3 0 RW Txt US
3.38 Drive encoder type {Fb07, 0.77} RW Txt US
3.39 Drive encoder termination select {Fb08, 0.78} 0 to 2 1 RW Uni US
3.40 Drive encoder error detection level 0 RW Uni US
3.42 Drive encoder filter 0 to 5 (0 to 16 ms) 2 RW Txt US
3.43 Maximum drive encoder reference 0 to 10,000 rpm 1000 RW Uni US
3.44 Drive encoder reference scaling 0 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
3.45 Drive encoder reference ±100.0 % RO Bi FI NC PT
3.46 Drive encoder reference destination 0 to 22.99 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US
3.47 Re-initialise position feedback RW Bit NC
3.48 Position feedback initialised RO Bit NC PT
OFF (0) or On (1)
3.49 Full motor object electronic nameplate transfer RW Bit US
OFF (0)
3.50 Position feedback lock RW Bit NC
3.51 Tachometer voltage rating {Fb02, 0.72} 0 to 300.00 v/1000 rpm Eur:60.00, USA 50.00 RW US
3.52 Tachometer speed feedback {Fb04, 0.74} ±SPEED_MAX rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
3.53 Tachometer input mode {Fb03, 0.73} 0 to 2 0 (DC) RW Txt US
3.54 Encoder direction RW Bit US
3.55 Select estimated speed on feedback loss RW Bit US
3.56 Speed feedback loss window 0 to 100.0 % 20.0 % RW US
3.57 Estimated speed has been automatically selected OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit
3.58 Speed feedback percentage ±100.0 % RO NC PT
11.4 Menu 4: Torque and current control

MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX is used as the maximum for some parameters such as the user current limits. The current maximum current limit
Maximum current
is defined as follows (with a maximum of 1000 %): CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX = ------------------------------------------------------- × 100 %
Motor rated current
Where:
Motor rated current is given by Pr 5.07 (SE07, 0.28)

(MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX is calculated from the motor map 2 parameters). The maximum current is 1.5 x drive rating.
Inertia
compensation
torque
2.38
Inertia
4.22 compensation
enable
Speed loop Torque mode

4.11
output selector* Menu 5
+
+ Torque
3.04
demand
Quadrant
4.03
select
+
Speed +
over-ride Current taper
level
4.27 1 threshold
Coiler/uncoiler 2 threshold
speed over-
ride level 1 end point
Torque 2 end point

reference
+
4.08 Threshold 1
4.31
exceeded
+ Motor rated
current
4.10 4.32 Threshold 2
5.07 exceeded
Torque
reference
4.09
offset
enable Torque reference
offset
Current Overload detection Current limits
magnitude Thermal
4.05 Motoring
4.15 time
Current 4.01 constant
measurement Regenerating
Thermal
Filtered current protection
mode Symmetrical
magnitude
User current
max scaling 4.02
4.24
Percentage
load
4.20

Current limit
10.09 active
indicator
Menu 5
Current controller
Current
4.12 demand Continuous
4.13 Kp gain
filter 1
Torque to Current +
current 4.04 4.23 demand Continuous Menu 5
conversion 4.14
filter 2 _ Ki gain
Current Slew rate
demand 4.33 Discontinuous
limit 4.34
Ki gain
Drive
11.32 rating
Motor
5.15 constant
Line
5.05 voltage
Menu 5
Overriding
current limit
4.18 Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter
Motor current
10.17 overload alarm
indicator Output 0.XX Read-only (RO)
terminals parameter
Motor overload
4.19
accumulator The parameters are all shown at their default settings


4.01 Current magnitude {di08, 0.43} RO Uni FI NC PT
±DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX A
4.02 Filtered current magnitude RO Uni FI NC PT
4.03 Torque demand {di07, 0.42} RO Bi FI NC PT
±TORQUE_PROD_CURRENT_MAX %
4.04 Current demand RO Bi FI NC PT
4.05 Motoring current limit RW Uni RA US
4.06 Regen current limit 0 to MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX % 150.0 RW Uni RA US
4.07 Symmetrical current limit RW Uni RA US
4.08 Torque reference 0.00 RW Bi US
±USER_CURRENT_MAX %
4.09 Torque offset 0.0 RW Bi US
4.10 Torque offset select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
4.11 Torque mode selector 0 to 4 0 RW Uni US
4.12 Current demand filter 1 0.0 to 25.0 ms 6.0 RW Uni US
4.13 Continuous current controller Kp gain 100 RW Uni RA US
0 to 4,000
4.14 Continuous current controller Ki gain 50 RW Uni RA US
4.15 Thermal time constant 0 to 3000.0 89.0 RW Uni US
4.16 Thermal protection mode 0 to 1 0 RW Bit US
4.18 Overriding current limit 0 to TORQUE_PROD_CURRENT_MAX % RO Uni NC PT
4.19 Overload accumulator 0 to 100.0 % RO Uni NC PT
4.20 Percentage load ±USER_CURRENT_MAX % RO Bi FI NC PT
4.22 Inertia compensation enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
4.23 Current demand filter 2 0.0 to 25.0 ms 6.0 RW Uni US
4.24 User current maximum scaling 0.0 to TORQUE_PROD_CURRENT_MAX% 150.0 RW Uni RA US
4.27 Current taper 1 threshold RW Uni US
0 to 10,000.0 rpm 10,000.0 rpm
4.28 Current taper 2 threshold RW Uni US
4.29 Current taper 1 end point RW Uni US
0 to 1000.0 % 1000.0 %
4.30 Current taper 2 end point RW Uni US
4.31 Taper threshold 1 exceeded RO Bit
OFF (0) or On (1)
4.32 Taper threshold 2 exceeded RO Bit
4.33 Slew rate limit 0.0 to 60,000 %s-1 7000 RW Uni US
4.34 Discontinuous current controller Ki gain 0 to 4,000 200 RW Uni RA US
4.35 Extra safe bridge change RW Bit US
Reduced hysteresis for bridge change OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0)
4.36 RW Bit US
over


11.5 Menu 5: Motor and field control

Figure 11-5 Menu 5 field control logic diagram
Maximum flux
/ Voltage limit
Field 5.68 Field weakening
Compensation enable
weakening
Voltage error factor
voltage 5.64
Back emf to % error Base loop
set-point conversion speed P gain
1
5.59 5.08 5.62
5.59
3.02 5.63 100%
Back emf
set point Speed I gain
feedback 5.69
Enable
Minimum flux field control
/ Voltage limit
5.77
5.53 Back Base
emf 5.08 speed
100%
5.09 ( 5.07 X 5.61 ) X
100%
Armature Irated Ra
rated voltage
5.04
Estimated
speed
Field IR
5.87
compensation
5.52 5.88
IR
Armature IR
drop
compensation
Armature
5.61 resistance
Contactor 6.55
enable
Filtered
Armature 4.02 current
voltage select magnitude
DC 5.14
contactor
5.16
A1 A2 Key
A1 A2
5.02 Input
MA1 MA2 Read-write (RW)
Armature terminals 0.XX
MA1 MA2 parameter
voltage
Machine
5.06 armature Output 0.XX Read-only (RO)
voltage terminals parameter

Enable field
economy timeout
5.65
Field Drive
economy active
active
Sequencer
run 10.02
& Field
5.79 controller
Field supply
economy Power-up
OR
level
5.80 5.76
5.67 Field economy Drive reset
level select
5.66
Field firing
Menu 6 Field angle
economy timeout Field voltage Voltage to
time mode select firing angle
Flux / Voltage conversion 5.58
5.75
demand
5.73
5.55 Rated
-1 Flux loop field
voltage Field output
P gain voltage
+ 5.71 5.78
5.57
Field 5.60
5.58
100 _
5.72 voltage
Percentage mode
I gain voltage
5.54 Flux
feedback demand
Flux
5.54
feedback
External flux
5.48
feedback select
5.89
Flux calculator External flux
Motor saturation feedback
5.29
breakpoint 1
Motor saturation
5.30 breakpoint 2
Field rated
5.70 current
Rated field
5.74 compensation factor Field overload calculation
Field thermal
5.81
time constant
Field current Field overload

5.56 5.82 accumulator
feedback

Figure 11-6 Menu 5 armature control logic diagram

Armature
voltage
Direct firing
5.02 angle Continuous
enable back end stop
5.11 5.13
Output Armature
Armature
power Direct firing firing angle
current 5.10
angle
Power 5.01
4.02 5.03
calculation
Menu 4
General Quadrant select

Motor rated 5.43 Armature mode
5.07 current Quadrant
Armature rated Bridge request 5.21
5.09 5.44 1 enable
voltage output
Slave bridge
5.12 Autotune 5.45 request status Quadrant
5.22
Key Slave bridge 2 enable
5.15 Motor constant 5.46 request status
Input Read-write (RW) Disable adaptive Slave bridge Quadrant
terminals 0.XX 5.25 5.47 request status 5.23
parameter control 3 enable
Continuous Field reversal
5.26 5.83 enable
Read-only (RO) autotune Quadrant
Output 0.XX
parameter Field weakening Field flux 5.24
terminals 5.84 4 enable
compensation threshold
5.28
disable
Motor torque Speed error
5.32 per amp 5.86 invert


5.01 Armature firing angle 0 to 175.0 ° RO Uni FI NC PT
5.02 Armature voltage {di10, 0.45} ±ARMATURE_VOLTAGE_MAX V RO Bi FI NC PT
5.03 Output power ±POWER_MAX kW RO Bi FI NC PT
5.04 Estimated speed ±SPEED_MAX rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
5.05 Line voltage 0 to 1000V rms AC RO Uni FI NC PT
5.06 Machine armature voltage ±ARMATURE_VOLTAGE_MAX V RO Bi FI NC PT
5.07 Motor rated current {SE07, 0.28} 0 to RATED_CURRENT_MAX A RATED_CURRENT_MAX RW Uni RA US
5.08 Base speed {SE08, 0.29} 0.0 to 10,000.0 rpm 1,000.0 RW Uni US
For 480V drive: 440 Eur 500 USA
5.09 Armature rated voltage {SE06, 0.27} 0 to ARMATURE_VOLTAGE_MAX Vdc For 575V drive: 630 Eur 630 USA RW Uni RA US
For 690V drive: 760 Eur 760 USA
5.10 Direct firing angle 0 to 165.0 ° 165.0 RW Uni
5.11 Direct firing angle enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
5.12 Autotune {SE13, 0.34} 0 to 3 0 RW Uni NC
5.13 Continuous Back End Stop 0 to 165.0 ° 165.0 RW Uni US
5.14 Armature voltage select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
5.15 Motor constant 0 to 100.0 % 50.0 % RW Uni US
5.16 DC contactor OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
5.21 Quadrant 1 Enable RW Uni US
0 to 1
5.22 Quadrant 2 Enable RW Uni US
1
5.23 Quadrant 3 Enable 0 to QUADRANT_MAX RW Uni US
5.24 Quadrant 4 Enable 0 to QUADRANT_MAX RW Uni RA US
5.25 Disable adaptive control RW Bit US
OFF (0)
5.26 Continuous auto tune OFF (0) or On (1) RW Bit US
5.28 Field weakening compensation disable Eur: 0, USA: 1 RW Bit US
5.29 Motor saturation breakpoint 1 50 RW Uni US
0 to 100 % of rated flux
5.30 Motor saturation breakpoint 2 75 RW Uni US
5.32 Motor torque per amp 0.000 to 50.000 NmA-1 RO Uni
5.43 Armature mode 0 to 8 0 RW Txt US
5.44 Bridge request output RW Bit
5.45 RW Bit
0 to 1
5.46 Slave bridge request status RW Bit
5.47 RW Bit
5.48 External flux feedback select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
5.52 IR drop RO Bi FI NC PT
±ARMATURE_VOLTAGE_MAX Vdc
5.53 Back emf RO Bi FI NC PT
5.54 Flux feedback ±150 % RO Bi FI NC PT
5.55 Flux / Voltage demand ±120 % RW Bi FI NC PT
5.56 Field current feedback {di09, 0.44} ±50.00 A RO Bi FI NC PT
5.57 Percentage voltage demand ±150.0 % RO Bi FI NC PT
5.58 Field firing angle 0 to 180.0 ° RO Uni FI NC PT
For 480V Drive: 440 Eur 500 USA
5.59 Back emf set point 0 to ARMATURE_VOLTAGE_MAX Vdc For 575V Drive: 630 Eur 630 USA RW Uni US
For 690V Drive: 760 Eur 760 USA
5.60 Field output voltage 0 to 500 Vdc RO Uni FI NC PT
5.61 Armature Resistance 0 to 6.0000 Ω 0.0000 RW Uni US
5.62 field weakening loop P gain 0.40 RW Uni US
0 to 300.00
5.63 field weakening loop I gain 5.00 RW Uni US
5.64 Field weakening enable 0 RW Bit US
0 to 1
5.65 Enable field economy timeout Eur: 0, USA: 1 RW Bit US
5.66 Field economy timeout time 0 to 255 s 30 s RW Uni US
5.67 Field economy level 0 to 120.0 % 25.0 % RW Uni US
5.68 Maximum flux / Voltage limit 0 to MAX_FIELD_FLUX % 100.0 % RW Uni US
5.69 Minimum flux / Voltage limit 0 to 120.0 % 50.0 % RW Uni US
Size 1 - Eur: 2A , USA: 8A
5.70 Rated field current {SE10, 0.31} 0 to FIELD_CURRENT_SET_MAX Size 2A & B - Eur: 3A, USA: 20A RW Uni RA PT US
Size 2C & D - Eur: 5A, USA: 20A
5.71 Flux loop P gain 0 to 30.00 3.00 RW Uni PT US
5.72 Flux loop I gain 0 to 300.00 60.00 RW Uni US
5.73 Rated field voltage {SE11, 0.32} 0 to 500.0 Vdc Eur: 360, USA: 300 RW Uni US
5.74 Rated field compensation factor 0 to 100 % 100 % RW Uni PT US
5.75 Field voltage mode select 0 to 1 Eur: 0, USA: 1 RW Bit US
5.76 Field controller supply 0 to 550 rms Vac RO Uni FI NC PT


5.77 Enable field control {SE12, 0.33} 0 to 1 0 RW Bit US
5.78 Field mode 0 to 2 (IntrnL (0), EtrnL (1) and E FULL (2)) IntrnL (0) RW Txt US
5.79 Field economy active 0 to 1 RO Bit
5.80 Field economy level select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
5.81 Field thermal time constant 0.0 to 3000.0 24.0 RW Uni US
5.82 Field overload accumulator 0 to 100.0 % RO Uni NC PT
5.83 Field reversal enable 0 to ONLY_2_QUADRANT 0 RW Uni RA US
5.84 Field flux threshold 0 to 100 % 75 % RW Uni US
5.85 Flux demand invert 0 to 1 RO Bit NC PT
5.86 Speed error invert 0 to 1 RO Bit NC PT
5.87 Field IR compensation 0 to 100.0 % 100.0 % RW Uni US
5.88 Armature IR compensation ±100.0 % 100.0 % RW Uni US
5.89 External Flux feedback 0 to 100.0 % RW Uni NC

11.6 Menu 6: Sequencer and clock

Control word
6.43
enable
Stop / Start Control word

select 1.11 Reference
6.42 Sequencer enabled indicator
6.04
Drive enable
Stop mode
6.15 6.01
selector Reverse selected
1.12
Run forward Mains loss indicator
6.03
T25 digital I/O 2 6.30 mode
Jog forward Hold zero

6.08 Jog selected
speed enable 1.13
6.31 indicator
Catch a
6.09
Run reverse spinning motor
T26 digital I/O 3 6.32 Enable sequencer
6.40 2.02 Ramp enable/disable
latching
Forward / Reverse
Menu 8 6.33 Start/stop logic
6.04
select
3.23 Hard speed
Run
T27 digital input 4 Zero reference reference disable
6.34 6.52
interlock
Jog reverse Run rising
6.54
6.37 edge delay 13.10 Position control
Not stop 6.55 Contactor active
6.39
Drive active falling 13.18 Relative jog
6.56 enable
edge delay
Hardware
enable 6.29
13.19 Relative jog
reverse select
Limit switch 1 6.35
Limit switch 2 6.36
Logic RUN
1
Enable 6.15
STOP/ RESET
RESET
Speed error invert

User defined
Logic 1
Flux demand invert
Pr 1.49 = 4? 0 1
1.49 Yes
No
Reference
selected
indicator 6.12
Keypad STOP
key enable
6.13 Clock control

Keypad reverse
key function Electricity cost 6.24
6.16 Power meter
per kWh 6.25
Power-up 6.20
time 6.21 Power consumption
6.17
meter reset
6.18 Time interval between

filter changes 6.26 Running cost
Run-time 6.22
6.23
6.19 Filter change
required/done
6.27 Time before filter
Motor 6.28 Select clock for trip change due
5.03 log time stamp
power
Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter


6.01 Stop mode 0 to 2 1 RW Uni US
6.03 Main loss ride through 0 to 2 (diS, StoP, ridEth) 0 RW Uni US
6.04 Start/stop logic select 0 to 4 4 RW Uni US
6.08 Hold zero speed OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
6.09 Catch a spinning motor 0 to 1 1 RW Uni US
6.12 Enable stop key OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
6.13 Enable forward/reverse key 0 to 2 0 RW Uni US
6.15 Drive enable OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
6.16 Electricity cost per kWh 0.0 to 600.0 currency units per kWh 0.0 RW Uni US
6.17 Reset energy meter OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
6.18 Time between filter changes 0 to 30,000 hrs 0 RW Uni US
6.19 Filter change required / change done OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit PT
6.20 Powered-up time: years.days 0 to 9.364 Years.Days RW Uni NC PT
6.21 Powered-up time: hours.minutes 0 to 23.59 Hours.Minutes RW Uni NC PT
6.22 Run time: years.days 0 to 9.364 Years.Days RO Uni NC PT PS
6.23 Run time: hours.minutes 0 to 23.59 Hours.Minutes RO Uni NC PT PS
6.24 Energy meter: MWh ±9999 MWh RO Bi NC PT PS
6.25 Energy meter: kWh ±999 kWh RO Bi NC PT PS
6.26 Running cost ±32000 RO Bi FI NC PT
6.27 Time before filter change due 0 to 30,000 hrs RO Uni NC PT PS
6.28 Select clock for trip log time stamping OFF (0) RW Bit US
6.29 Hardware enable RO Bit NC PT
6.30 Sequencing bit: Run forward RW Bit NC
6.31 Sequencing bit: Jog RW Bit NC
6.32 Sequencing bit: Run/reverse RW Bit NC
6.33 Sequencing bit: Forward/reverse RW Bit NC
OFF (0) or On (1)
6.34 Sequencing bit: Run RW Bit NC
OFF (0)
6.35 Forward limit switch RW Bit NC
6.36 Reverse limit switch RW Bit NC
6.37 Sequencing bit: Jog reverse RW Bit NC
6.39 Sequencing bit: Not stop RW Bit NC
6.40 Enable sequencer latching RW Bit US
6.41 Drive event flags 0 to 65535 0 RW Uni NC
6.42 Control word 0 to 32767 0 RW Uni NC
6.43 Control word enable OFF (0) RW Bit US
OFF (0) or On (1)
6.45 Force cooling fan to run at full speed RW Bit US
6.50 Drive comms state 0 to 3 RO Txt NC PT
6.52 Zero reference interlock OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
6.54 Run rising edge delay 0 to 25.0 s 0.3 s RW Uni US
6.55 Contactor active OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
6.56 Drive active falling edge delay 0 to 255 s 0s RW Uni US

11.7 Menu 7: Analog I/O

Analog
input 1 Analog input Analog input 1
destination
1 offset parameter Any
7.01 unprotected
Analog input 1 7.30 7.10
variable
parameter
+ Analog
??.?? ref. 1
A/D + 7.08
1.36
Analog
input 1 x(-1) ??.??
scaling
7.09 Analog input 1
invert
Analog input 2
current loop loss Analog
input 2 Analog input 2
Analog input destination
7.28 2 offset parameter
7.02 Any
7.14 unprotected
7.31
Analog input 2 variable
parameter
+ Analog
??.?? ref. 2
7.11 + 7.12
A/D
1.37
mode selector input 2 x(-1) ??.??
scaling
7.13 Analog input 2
invert
Analog input 3
Analog
current loop loss Analog input 3
input 3
Analog input destination
7.29 3 offset parameter
7.03 Any
7.18 unprotected
7.31
7.32
Analog input 3 variable
parameter
+ ??.??
7.15 + 7.16
A/D
mode selector input 3 x(-1) ??.??
Analog output 1 scaling
source parameter 7.17
7.19 Analog input
3 invert
Any variable Analog output 1
parameter
??.??
3.02 7.20 7.21
Speed ??.?? Analog Analog
feedback output 1 output 1
scaling mode
selector
Analog output 2
source parameter Key
Any 7.22
variable Input Read-write (RW)
Analog output 2 0.XX
parameter terminals parameter
Current
magnitude ??.??
4.01 7.23 7.24 terminals parameter
??.?? Analog Analog
output 2 output 2
scaling mode The parameters are all shown at their default settings
selector


7.01 T5/6 analog input 1 {in02, 0.82} ±100.00 % RO Bi NC PT
7.02 T7 analog input 2 {in03, 0.83} RO Bi NC PT
±100.0 %
7.03 T8 analog input 3 {in04, 0.84} RO Bi NC PT
7.04 Power circuit temperature -128 °C to 127 °C RO Bi NC PT
7.08 T5/6 analog input 1 scaling 0 to 40.000 1.000 RW Uni US
7.09 T5/6 analog input 1 invert OFF (0) to On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
7.10 T5/6 analog input 1 destination Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 1.36 RW Uni PT US
7.11 T7 analog input 2 mode 0 to 6 6 RW Uni US
7.12 T7 analog input 2 scaling 0 to 40.000 1.000 RW Uni US
7.13 T7 analog input 2 invert OFF (0) to On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
7.14 T7 analog input 2 destination Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 1.37 RW Uni PT US
7.15 T8 analog input 3 mode {in01, 0.81} 0 to 9 Eur: 8, USA: 6 RW Txt US
7.16 T8 analog input 3 scaling 0 to 40.000 1.000 RW Uni US
7.17 T8 analog input 3 invert OFF (0) to On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
7.18 T8 analog input 3 destination Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
Pr 0.00 to 22.99
7.19 T9 analog output 1 source Pr 3.02 RW Uni PT US
7.20 T9 analog output 1 scaling 0.000 to 40.000 1.000 RW Uni US
7.21 T9 analog output 1 mode 0 to 3 0 RW Txt US
7.22 T10 analog output 2 source Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 4.02 RW Uni PT US
7.23 T10 analog output 2 scaling 0.000 to 40.000 1.000 RW Uni US
7.24 T10 analog output 2 mode 0 to 3 0 RW Txt US
7.28 T7 analog input current loop loss 2 RO Bit NC PT
OFF (0) to On (1)
7.29 T8 analog input current loop loss 3 RO Bit NC PT
7.30 T5/6 analog input 1 offset ±100.00 % 0.00 RW Bi US
7.31 T7 analog input 2 offset RW Bi US
±100.0 % 0.0
7.32 T8 analog input 3 offset RW Bi US
7.34 SCR / Thyristor junction temperature 0 to 150 °C RO Uni NC PT

11.8 Menu 8: Digital I/O

T24 digital
I/O 1 state T24 output At
??.?? speed
select
8.01 8.31 10.06
x(-1) ??.??
Any bit
T24 digital I/O 1 T24 digital parameter
8.21
I/O 1 source/
destination
8.29 8.30
8.11 T24 digital
I/O polarity Open collector Any
I/O 1 invert
select output unprotected
bit parameter
??.??
x(-1)
??.??
Any bit
T25 digital parameter
I/O 2 state T25 output
select ??.??
8.02 8.32
x(-1) ??.??
T25 digital I/O 2 T25 digital

Start/stop 6.04 8.22 I/O 2 source/
logic select destination
8.29 8.30
T25 digital Any
I/O polarity Open collector 8.12 unprotected
I/O 2 invert
select output bit
parameter
??.?? Drive reset

10.33
x(-1)
??.??
Any bit
T26 digital parameter
I/O 3 state T26 output
??.??
select
8.03 8.33
x(-1) ??.??
T26 digital I/O 3 T26 digital

Start/stop 6.04 8.23 I/O 3 source/
8.29 logic select destination
8.30
T26 digital Any
I/O polarity Open collector 8.13
I/O 3 invert unprotected
select output bit
parameter
??.?? Run forward
6.30
x(-1)
??.??

Figure 11-10 Menu 8 logic diagram (cont)
T27 digital Stop/start T27 digital input 4

T27 digital input 4 invert logic select destination
input 4 state
8.04 8.14 6.04 8.24 Any
unprotected
bit
T27 digital input 4 parameter
??.?? Run reverse
8.29
6.32
I.O polarity
x(-1) ??.??
select
T28 digital
T28 digital input 5
T28 digital input 5 invert destination Any
input 5 state unprotected
8.05 8.15 8.25 bit
Analog input 1 /
??.?? input 2 select
8.29
1.41
I.O polarity
x(-1) ??.??
select
T29 digital
T29 digital input 6
T29 digital input 6 invert destination
input 6 state
8.06 8.16 8.26 Any
unprotected
bit
??.?? Jog forward
8.29
6.31
I.O polarity
x(-1) ??.??
select
Drive enable
Drive enable mode select
Key
indicator 8.09 8.10
terminals 0.XX
parameter
Drive enable
External trip
x(-1) 10.32 parameter
8.29 terminals
I.O polarity Drive enable
select This logic diagram shows parameters
at their default settings

Figure 11-11 Menu 8 logic diagram (cont)
Relay source Relay

invert source
8.27
Any bit
parameter
Relay Drive
Relay 1 state Healthy
x(-1)
Relay source Relay

invert source
8.60
Any bit
parameter
Relay Contactor
Relay 2 state enable
x(-1)
Destination
5V (On) Any bit

I/O parameter
Start Key state
Destination
5V (On) Any bit

I/O parameter
Reverse Key state
Toggle enable
Pr 8.52


8.01 T24 digital I/O 1 state {in05, 0.85} RO Bit NC PT
8.04 T27 digital input 4 state {in08, 0.88} RO Bit NC PT
OFF (0) or On (1)
8.07 T51, 52, 53 relay state RO Bit NC PT
8.09 T31 drive enable state RO Bit NC PT
8.10 Enable mode select 0 to 2 0 RW Uni US
8.11 T24 digital I/O 1 invert RW Bit US
8.14 T27 digital input 4 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
8.15 T28 digital input 5 invert RW Bit US
8.16 T29 digital input 6 invert RW Bit US
8.17 T51, 52, 53 relay invert RW Bit US
8.20 Digital I/O read word 0 to 4095 RO Uni NC PT
8.21 T24 digital I/O 1 source/ destination Pr 10.06 RW Uni DE PT US
8.24 T27 digital input 4 destination Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 6.32 RW Uni DE PT US
8.25 T28 digital input 5 destination Pr 1.41 RW Uni DE PT US
8.26 T29 digital input 6 destination Pr 6.31 RW Uni DE PT US
8.27 T51, 52, 53 relay source Pr 10.01 RW Uni PT US
8.29 I/O polarity select 2 1 RW Uni PT US
8.30 Open collector output OFF (0) RW Bit US
8.31 T24 digital I/O 1 output select On (1) RW Bit US
8.32 T25 digital I/O 2 output select RW Bit US
8.33 T26 digital I/O 3 output select OFF (0) RW Bit US
8.40 T61, 62, 63 relay state RO Bit NC PT
OFF (0) or On (1)
8.41 Start button state RO Bit NC PT
8.42 Forward/reverse button state OFF (0) RO Bit NC PT
8.48 24V input state RO Bit NC PT
8.50 T61, 62, 63 relay invert RW Bit US
OFF (0)
8.52 Toggle enable RW Bit US
8.60 T61, 62, 63 relay source Pr 6.55 RW Uni DE PT US
8.61 Start button destination Pr 0.00 to 22.99 RW Uni DE PT US
Pr 0.00
8.62 Forward/reverse button destination RW Uni DE PT US

11.9 Menu 9: Programmable logic, motorized pot and binary sum

Figure 11-12 Menu 9 logic diagram: Programmable logic
Any bit Function-1
parameter 9.05
input-1 invert Function-1
??.?? output Function-1
indicator destination
Function-1 parameter
output invert 9.01 9.10
??.?? x(-1) Any
9.08 unprotected
bit
parameter
Function-1 input-1 Function 1
9.04 mode
source parameter ??.??
9.37
9.09
Any bit Function-1
parameter 9.07 x(-1) Function-1
input-2 invert ??.??
delay
??.??
??.?? x(-1)
9.06 Function-1 input-2

source parameter
Any bit Function-2

parameter 9.15
input-1 invert Function-2
??.?? output Function-2
indicator destination
Function-2 parameter
output invert 9.02 9.20
??.?? x(-1) Any
9.18 unprotected
bit
Function 2 parameter
source parameter mode ??.??
9.38
9.19
Any bit Function-2
parameter 9.17 x(-1) Function-2
input-2 invert ??.??
delay
??.??
??.?? x(-1)

source parameter
Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter

Figure 11-13 Menu 9 logic diagram: Motorized potentiometer and binary sum
Motorized
pot. bipolar Motorized pot. Motorized pot.
Motorized output indicator destination
select
pot. rate parameter
9.22
9.23 9.03 9.25
Motorized pot. Any
up unprotected
variable
9.26 parameter
??.??
M 9.24
Motorized pot. ??.??
output scale
9.27 Function disabled if set
to a non valid destination
Motorized pot.
down
9.28 9.21 Motorized pot.

mode
Motorized pot.
reset to zero
Binary-sum
logic output Binary-sum
Binary-sum value logic destination
offset parameter
9.34 9.32 9.33
9.29
Any
unprotected
Binary-sum bit
logic ones (LSB) parameter
+ ??.??
+
9.30 Σ
??.??
Binary-sum
logic twos Function disabled if set
to a non valid destination
9.31
Key
Binary-sum
logic fours (MSB)
terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter


9.01 Logic function 1 output RO Bit NC PT
OFF (0) or On (1)
9.02 Logic function 2 output RO Bit NC PT
9.03 Motorized pot output ±100.00 % RO Bit NC PT PS
9.04 Logic function 1 source 1 Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
9.05 Logic function 1 source 1 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
9.07 Logic function 1 source 2 invert RW Bit US
9.08 Logic function 1 output invert RW Bit US
9.09 Logic function 1 delay ±25.0 s 0.0 s RW Bi US
9.10 Logic function 1 destination RW Uni PT US
Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00
9.14 Logic function 2 source 1 RW Uni PT US
9.15 Logic function 2 source 1 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
9.17 Logic function 2 source 2 invert RW Bit US
9.18 Logic function 2 output invert RW Bit US
9.19 Logic function 2 delay ±25.0 s 0.0 s RW Bi US
9.20 Logic function 2 destination Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
9.21 Motorized pot mode 0 to 3 2 RW Uni US
9.22 Motorized pot bipolar select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
9.23 Motorized pot rate 0 to 250 s 20 s RW Uni US
9.24 Motorized pot scale factor 0 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
9.25 Motorized pot destination Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
9.26 Motorized pot up RW Bit NC
9.27 Motorized pot down RW Bit NC
9.28 Motorized pot reset RW Bit NC
9.29 Binary sum ones input RW Bit NC
9.30 Binary sum twos input RW Bit NC
9.31 Binary sum fours input RW Bit NC
9.32 Binary sum output 0 to 255 RO Uni NC PT
9.33 Binary sum destination Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
9.34 Binary sum offset 0 to 248 0 RW Uni US
9.35 Up down disable source Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
9.36 Up down disable invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
9.37 Logic block 1 mode RW Uni US
0 to 4 0
9.38 Logic block 2 mode RW Uni US

11.10 Menu 10: Status and trips

10.01 Drive ok RO Bit NC PT
10.02 Drive active RO Bit NC PT
10.03 Zero speed RO Bit NC PT
10.04 Running at or below min speed RO Bit NC PT
10.05 Below set speed RO Bit NC PT
10.06 At speed RO Bit NC PT
10.07 Above set speed RO Bit NC PT
10.08 Load reached OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
10.09 Drive output is at current limit RO Bit NC PT
10.10 Regenerating RO Bit NC PT
10.13 Direction command RO Bit NC PT
10.14 Direction running RO Bit NC PT
10.17 Overload alarm RO Bit NC PT
10.18 Drive over temperature alarm RO Bit NC PT
10.19 Drive warning RO Bit NC PT
10.20 Trip 0 {tr01, 0.51} RO Txt NC PT PS
0 to 229
10.32 External trip RW Bit NC
10.33 Drive reset RW Bit NC
10.34 Number of auto-reset attempts 0 to 5 0 RW Uni US
10.35 Auto-reset delay 0 to 25.0 s 1.0 s RW Uni US
10.36 Hold drive ok until last attempt OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
10.38 User trip 0 to 255 0 RW Uni NC
10.40 Status word 0 to 32767 RO Uni NC PT
10.41 Trip 0 time: Years.Days 0 to 9.364 Years.Days RO Uni NC PT PS
10.42 Trip 0 time: Hours.Minutes 0 to 23.59 Hours.Minutes RO Uni NC PT PS
10.43 Trip 1 time: Hours.Minutes RO Uni NC PT PS
10.47 Trip 5 time: Hours.Minutes 0 to 600.00 Hours.Minutes RO Uni NC PT PS
10.52 Trip mask 0 RW Uni US
0 to 216 0
10.62 Stop on trip mask 0 RW Bit US
On (1)
10.67 Stop on trip mask 5 OFF (0) or On (1) RW Bit US
10.72 Trip mask active RO Bit NC
10.73 Bridge active 0 to 2 RO Txt NC
10.74 Electrical phase back RO Bit NC
OFF (0) or On (1)
10.75 Armature voltage clamp active RO Bit NC
10.76 Phase rotation 0 to 15 RO Txt NC
10.77 Input frequency 0 to 100.00 RO Uni NC

11.11 Menu 11: General drive set-up

11.21 Parameter scaling 0 to 9.999 1.000 RW Uni US
11.22 Parameter displayed at power-up 0 to 00.90 00.40 RW Uni PT US
11.23 Serial address {Si02, 0.67} 0 to 247 1 RW Uni US
11.24 Serial mode 0 to 2 1 RW Txt US
11.25 Baud rate {Si01, 0.66} 0 to 9 6 RW Txt US
11.26 Minimum comms transmit delay 0 to 250 ms 2 RW Uni US
11.29 Software version {di14, 0.49} 1.0 to 99.99 RO Uni NC PT
11.30 User security code 0 to 999 0 RW Uni NC PT PS
11.32 Current rating 0 to 10000.0 A RO Uni NC PT
11.33 Drive voltage rating 0 (480 V), 1 (575 V), 2 (690 V) RO Txt NC PT
11.34 Software sub-version 0 to 99 RO Uni NC PT
11.35 Number of modules 0 to 3 RW Uni PT US
SMARTCARD parameter data previously
11.36 0 to 999 RO Uni NC PT US
loaded 0
11.37 SMARTCARD data number 0 to 1003 RW Uni NC
SMARTCARD data type/
11.38 0 to 18 RO Uni NC PT
mode
11.39 SMARTCARDdata version 0 to 9999 0 RW Uni NC
11.40 SMARTCARD data checksum 0 to 65335 RO Uni NC PT
11.41 Status mode timeout 0 to 250 s 240 RW Uni US
11.42 Parameter copying {SE09, 0.30} 0 to 4 0 RW Txt NC *
11.44 Security status {SE14, 0.35} 0 to 2 0 RW Txt PT US
11.45 Select motor 2 parameters OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
11.46 Defaults previously loaded 0 to 2 0 RO Txt PT US
Drive Onboard Application Lite Ladder
11.47 0 to 2 2 RW Uni US
Program Enable
11.48 -128 to +127 RO Bi NC PT
Program Status
11.49 0 to 65535 RO Uni NC PT PS
Program Events
11.50 0 to 65335 ms RO Uni NC PT
Program Maximum Scan Time
11.51 OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
Program First Run
11.52 Drive serial number 0 to 999 999 999 RO Uni NC PT
11.53 Build location 0 to 255 RO Uni NC PT
11.55 Drive rating number 0 to 68 RO Uni NC PT
11.56 Power PCB software version 1.00 to 99.99 RO Uni NC PT
11.57 Serial programmable source Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
11.58 Serial scaling 0 to 1999 1000 RW Uni US
Mentor II Parameter Emulator Module
11.59 0 to 3 0 RW Uni US
Control
11.60 Application parameters RW Uni NC
16000 to -16000
11.61 Application parameters RW Uni NC
11.62 Full power discharge time 0 to 25.0 s RW Uni US
0.0 s
11.63 Full power discharge period 0 to 1500.0 s RW Uni US
11.64 External discharge resistance 0 to 9999 Ω 0Ω RW Uni US
11.65 External resistor temperature 0 to 100 % RO NC PT
11.66 Suppressor voltage 0 to 2000 V RO NC PT
* Modes 1 and 2 are not US (i.e. not saved when drive parameters are saved), mode 3 and 4 are US. Therefore this parameter can only be saved to
EEPROM if it has a value of 0, 3 or 4.

11.12 Menu 12: Threshold detectors, variable selectors and brake control function
Threshold Threshold Threshold
Detector 1 Threshold Detector 1 Detector 1
Detector 1 output indicator output
threshold level destination
parameter Any
Any variable 12.04 12.01 unprotected
Threshold 12.07
parameter Detector 1 bit parameter
??.?? ??.??
??.?? x(-1) ??.??
12.03 12.05 12.06

Detector 1 Detector 1 Detector 1
input source hysteresis output invert

Detector 2 Threshold Detector 2 Detector 2
Detector 2 output indicator output
threshold level destination
parameter Any
Any variable 12.24 12.02 unprotected
Threshold 12.27
parameter Detector 2 bit parameter
??.?? ??.??
??.?? x(-1) ??.??
12.23 12.25 12.26 All parameters are shown

Threshold Threshold Threshold at their default setting
Detector 2 Detector 2 Detector 2
input source hysteresis output invert
Key
Hysteresis
Input Read-write (RW) Threshold
terminals 0.XX
parameter level
t
terminals parameter
Threshold
output
t

Figure 11-15 Menu 12 logic diagram (continued)

Variable Selector 1
Any variable Variable
parameter selector 1 Variable
Variable selector 1 output selector 1
??.?? input 1 scaling indicator output Any
12.13 destination unprotected
variable
12.12 12.11
??.?? parameter
Variable selector 1 ??.??
Variable selector 1 12.10
12.08 mode
input 1 source
Any variable Variable selector 1
12.15 ??.??
parameter control
Variable selector 1
??.?? input 2 scaling
12.14
??.??
Variable selector 1
12.09
input 2 source
Variable Selector 2
Any variable Variable
parameter selector 2 Variable
Variable selector 2 output selector 2
??.?? input 1 scaling Any
indicator output
destination unprotected
12.33
variable
12.32 12.31 parameter
??.??
Variable selector 2 ??.??
Variable selector 2 12.30
12.28 mode
input 1 source
Any variable Variable selector 2
12.35 ??.??
parameter control
Variable selector 2
??.?? input 2 scaling
12.34
??.??
Variable selector 2
12.29
input 2 source
Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter

The brake control functions are provided to allow well co-ordinated operation of an external brake with the drive. While both hardware and
software are designed to high standards of quality and robustness, they are not intended for use as safety functions, i.e. where a fault or
failure would result in a risk of injury. In any application where the incorrect operation of the brake release mechanism could result in injury,
WARNING independent protection devices of proven integrity must also be incorporated.
The control terminal relay can be selected as an output to release a brake. If a drive is set up in this manner and a drive replacement takes
place, prior to programming the drive on initial power up, the brake may be released.
When drive terminals are programmed to non default settings the result of incorrect or delayed programming must be considered. The use of
WARNING
a SMARTCARD in boot mode or an SM-Applications module can ensure drive parameters are immediately programmed to avoid this situation.
Figure 11-16 Menu 12 Brake control function

External brake Post brake Brake release
External field released indicator release delay action
12.51 12.54 12.47 12.49
Position control
mode
Flux feedback 1 0
13.10=1
5.54 + 1
0
- 2
Flux present 12.52 Field Active 12.50 Jog override
threshold LATCH (Menu 6)
Positive torque only Brake release source

12.55
12.53
Current magnitude 1 0
0
4.01 Brake Release
+
- LATCH 12.40
1 Torque
present
12.43
Drive Active Torque proving
threshold
10.02
6.08 Hold zero
speed
Reference On
1.11 Brake controller

12.48 12.41
enable
Brake apply delay
Speed feedback
3.02 +
-
input output
Brake apply 12.45 12.46 Brake apply speed

delay reset
speed
LAT
1. If the reset input is 1 the output is 0

Key 2. If the reset input is 0 the output latches at 1 if the input is 1

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter

Figure 11-17 Brake sequence
Pr 12.45 Speed threshold

Pr 3.02 Motor Speed
Torque present
Pr 10.02 Drive active
Pr 1.11 Reference on
Pr 12.40 Brake release
Pr 2.03 Ramp hold

Pr 13.10 Position control mode
Pr 6.08 Hold zero speed
1 2 3 4 5
Pr 12.47 Pr 12.46 Pr 12.48

1. Wait for armature current and fully fluxed machine
2. Post-brake release delay
3. Wait for speed threshold
4. Wait for brake apply speed delay
5. Brake apply delay


12.01 Threshold detector 1 output RO Bit NC PT
OFF (0) or On (1)
12.02 Threshold detector 2 output RO Bit NC PT
12.03 Threshold detector 1 source Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
12.04 Threshold detector 1 level 0 to 100.00 % RW Uni US
0.00
12.05 Threshold detector 1 hysteresis 0 to 25.00 % RW Uni US
12.06 Threshold detector 1 output invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
12.07 Threshold detector 1 destination RW Uni PT US
12.08 Variable selector 1 source 1 Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
12.09 Variable selector 1 source 2 RW Uni PT US
12.10 Variable selector 1 mode 0 to 10 0 RW Uni US
12.11 Variable selector 1 destination Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
12.12 Variable selector 1 output ±100.00 % RO Uni NC PT
12.13 Variable selector 1 source 1 scaling RW Uni US
±4.000 1.000
12.15 Variable selector 1 control 0 to 100.00 0.00 RW Uni US
12.23 Threshold detector 2 source Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
12.24 Threshold detector 2 level 0 to 100.00 % RW Uni US
0.00
12.25 Threshold detector 2 hysteresis 0 to 25.00 % RW Uni US
12.26 Threshold detector 2 output invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
12.27 Threshold detector 2 destination RW Uni PT US
12.28 Variable selector 2 source 1 Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
12.29 Variable selector 2 source 2 RW Uni PT US
12.30 Variable selector 2 mode 0 to 10 0 RW Uni US
12.31 Variable selector 2 destination Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
12.32 Variable selector 2 output ±100.00 % RO Uni NC PT
±4.000 1.000
12.35 Variable selector 2 control 0 to 100.00 0.00 RW Uni US
The brake control functions are provided to allow well co-ordinated operation of an external brake with the drive. While both hardware
and software are designed to high standards of quality and robustness, they are not intended for use as safety functions, i.e. where a
fault or failure would result in a risk of injury. In any application where the incorrect operation of the brake release mechanism could result
WARNING
in injury, independent protection devices of proven integrity must also be incorporated.
12.40 Brake release OFF (0) or On (1) RO Uni NC PT

12.41 Brake controller enable 0 to 3 0 RW Txt US
12.43 Torque proving threshold 0 to 150 % 10 % RW Uni US
12.45 Brake apply speed 0 to 200 rpm 5 rpm RW Uni US
12.46 Brake apply speed delay RW Uni US
12.47 Post-brake release delay 0 to 25.0 s 1.0 s RW Uni US
12.48 Brake apply delay RW Uni US
12.49 Brake release action RW Uni US
12.50 Field active OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
12.51 External field control RW Bit US
12.52 Flux present threshold 0 to 100 % 80 % RW US
12.53 Positive torque proving only OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
12.54 External brake released indicator OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
12.55 Brake release action source OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US


11.13 Menu 13: Position control

Relative Relative
jog reverse jog enable
13.19 13.18
Relative
jog reference
Position control reference position
13.17
Revolution
Position x(-1)
counter
Drive Position
Encoder 3.28 3.29 controller
reference 13.04 Position
source reference
invert
Slot 1 15.04 15.05 15.06 13.06
Δ Position Ratio +
Slot 2 16.04 16.05 16.06 13.07
13.08
+
∫ +
x(-1) _
Slot 3 17.04 17.05 17.06
Position
error reset 13.16
Local 13.20 13.21 13.22

reference
∫
Ignore local
13.24
reference turns
Local
13.23 reference
disable
Position control feedback position
Revolution Position
Position
counter controller
feedback
Drive source
Encoder 3.28 3.29
13.05
Slot 1 15.04 15.05 15.06
Δ Position _
Slot 2 16.04 16.05 16.06
+
Limited to
± /2 rev
1
Slot 3 17.04 17.05 17.06

Orientation
position 13.13
reference

Pre-ramp Post-ramp
Speed reference reference Final speed
reference 1.01 reference
selected Menu 2 +
1.03 2.01 3.01
Ramp Control
+
Velocity
feed- 1.39
forward Velocity feed
1.40 -forward
select
Position Hard speed
controller reference
mode selector
13.10 = 13.10 = 13.10 =
13.10 3.23
5 or 6 1 or 3 1 to 6
Position loop
disabled
Hard speed
reference 3.22
Hold zero
6.08
speed
Position
Position loop error
controller
P gain
13.01 13.02 13.03 13.09
Revolution Position Fine

Position
13.12
Position
Position loop controller
enabled speed clamp
Orientation
acceptance
window
13.14
Key
Orientation
terminals 0.XX
parameter
Orientation Output 0.XX Read-only (RO)

position 13.15 terminals parameter
complete
This logic diagram applies only when all
parameters are at their default settings


13.01 Revolutions error -32768 to +32767 RO Uni NC PT
13.02 Position error -32768 to +32767 RO Uni NC PT
13.03 Fine position error -32768 to +32767 RO Uni NC PT
13.04 Position controller reference source 0 to 4 0 RW Txt US
13.05 Position controller feedback source 0 to 3 0 RW Txt US
13.06 Position reference invert OFF (0) or On(1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
13.07 Ratio numerator 0 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
13.08 Ration denominator 0 to 1.000 1.000 RW Uni US
13.09 Position controller P gain 0 to 100.00 rads-1/rad 25.00 RW Uni US
13.10 Position controller mode 0 to 6 0 RW Uni US
13.11 Absolute mode enable OFF (0) or On(1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
13.12 Position controller speed clamp 0 to 250 150 RW Uni US
13.13 Orientation position reference 0 to 65535 0 RW Uni US
13.14 Orientation acceptance window 0 to 4096 256 RW Uni US
13.15 Orientation position complete OFF (0) or On(1) RO Bit NC PT
13.16 Position error reset OFF (0) or On(1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
13.17 Relative jog reference 0 to 4000.0 rpm 0.0 RW Uni US
13.18 Relative jog enable OFF (0) or On(1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
13.19 Relative jog reverse OFF (0) or On(1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
13.20 Local reference turns 0 to 65535 0 RW Uni NC
13.21 Local reference position 0 to 65535 0 RW Uni NC
13.22 Local reference fine position 0 to 65535 0 RW Uni NC
13.23 Local reference disable OFF (0) or On(1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
13.24 Ignore local reference turns OFF (0) or On(1) OFF (0) RW Bit US


11.14 Menu 14: User PID controller

Main reference
source parameter
14.02
Any variable
parameter PID Main
reference
??.??
14.19
??.??
PID reference
source parameter PID reference
14.03 source invert
Any variable 14.05

parameter
PID PID
??.?? PID reference reference error
slew-rate limit
+
14.07 14.20 14.22
??.??
x(-1) _
PID feedback
source parameter PID feedback
14.04 source invert
Any variable 14.06

parameter PID
feedback
??.??
14.21
??.??
x(-1)
PID
enable
14.08
Drive normal
indicator
10.01 &
Logic 1
Any bit
parameter
??.??
??.??
Source
14.09
not used
Optional PID
enable source
parameter

PID output
14.13
high limit
PID hold PID output
integrator enable PID output
14.14 destination
low limit
14.17 parameter*
14.10
PID symmetrical 14.16 Any
PID proportional 14.18 unprotected
gain limits enable
variable
14.11 PID controller parameter
output PID output
scale factor
+ ??.??
PID integral
gain +
14.01 14.15
14.12
??.??
PID derivative
gain
Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter
*The PID controller is only enabled if Pr 14.16 is set to a non Pr xx.00 and unprotected destination parameter.


14.01 PID output ±100.00 % RO Uni NC PT
14.02 PID source1 Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
14.03 PID source 2 Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
14.04 PID source 3 Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
14.05 PID source invert 1 OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
14.06 PID source invert 2 OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
14.07 PID reference slew rate limit 0 to 3200.0s 0.0 RW Uni US
14.08 PID enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
14.09 PID optional enable source Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
14.10 PID P gain 0 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
14.11 PID I gain 0 to 4.000 0.500 RW Uni US
14.12 PID D gain 0 to 4.000 0.000 RW Uni US
14.13 PID upper limit 0 to 100.00 % 100.00 RW Uni US
14.14 PID lower limit ±100.00 % -100.00 RW Bi US
14.15 PID scaling 0 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
14.16 PID destination Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
14.17 PID hold integrator OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
14.18 PID symmetrical limit enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
14.19 PID main reference ±100.00 % RO Bi NC PT
14.20 PID reference ±100.00 % RO Bi NC PT
14.21 PID feedback ±100.00 % RO Bi NC PT
14.22 PID error ±100.00 % RO Bi NC PT

11.15 Menus 15, 16 and 17: Solutions Module slots

Figure 11-20 Location of Solution Module slots and their corresponding menu numbers
Solutions Module
in slot 1 (Menu 15)
Solutions Module
in slot 2 (Menu 16)
Solutions Module
in slot 3 (Menu 17)
Pr x.00 and Pr x.01 are always present in menus 15, 16 and 17. Pr x.01 indicates which type of module is present (0 = no module installed). When a
module is installed the drive provides the relevant menu (menu 15 for slot 1, 16 for slot 2 and 17 for slot 3) depending on the Solutions Module
installed. The possible categories are shown below.
Solutions Module ID Module Category

0 No module installed
102 SM-Universal Encoder Plus
Feedback
104 SM-Encoder Plus and SM-Encoder Output Plus
201 SM-I/O Plus
203 SM-I/O Timer
204 SM-I/O PELV
Automation
205 SM-I/O24V Protected
(I/O Expansion)
206 SM-I/O120V
207 SM-I/O Lite
208 SM-I/O 32
304 SM-Applications Plus
Automation
305 SM-Applications Lite V2
(Applications)
306 SM-Register
403 SM-PROFIBUS DP-V1
404 SM-INTERBUS
407 SM-DeviceNet
Fieldbus
408 SM-CANopen
410 SM-Ethernet
421 SM-EtherCAT
Refer to the specific Solutions Module User Guide for more information.
Most modules include a processor and parameters are updated by the processor in the Solutions Module. However, dumb modules do not contain a
processor and all parameters are updated by the drive processor.
Dumb Solutions Module parameters are read/written by the drive background task or at the combined update time for time critical parameters. The
combined update time depends on the number and type of dumb Solutions Modules installed to the drive. For each Solutions Module the update rate
of these parameters is specified as 4 ms, 8 ms, etc. The combined update time is the total of the update times for all dumb Solutions Modules
installed.
For example, if a module with 4 ms update time and a module with 8 ms are installed to the drive, then the combined update time for the time critical
parameters of each module is 12 ms.
In the parameter tables the update time added by the type of module is given, for example 4 ms for the SM-Encoder Plus or 8 ms for the SM-I/O Plus.
When parameters are saved by the user in the drive EEPROM the option code of the currently installed module is saved in EEPROM. If the drive is
subsequently powered-up with a different module installed, or no module installed where a module was previously installed, the drive gives a Slot.dF
trip. The menu for the relevant slot appears for the new module category with the default parameter values for the new category. The new parameters
values are not stored in EEPROM until the user performs a parameter save.

Solutions Module software

Most Solutions Modules contain software. The software version of the module can be checked by looking at Pr x.02 and Pr x.51.
The software version takes the form of xx.yy.zz, where Pr x.02 displays xx.yy and Pr x.51 displays zz. I.e. for software version 01.01.00, Pr x.02
would display 1.01 and Pr x.51 would display 0
The SM-Encoder Plus, SM-Encoder Output Plus and SM-I/O Plus modules do not contain any software, so Pr x.02 and Pr x.51 either show 0 or the
parameters do not appear.
Parameters common to all categories

x.01 Solutions Module ID 0 to 599 RO Uni PT US
Solutions Module software
x.02 0.00 to 99.99 RO Uni NC PT
version
x.50 Solutions Module error status 0 to 255 RO Uni NC PT
Solutions Module
x.51 0 to 99 RO Uni NC PT
software sub-version
11.16 Menu 18: Application menu 1

Application menu 1 power-down
18.01 -32,768 to +32,767 0 RW Bi NC PS
saved integer
18.02 to Application menu 1 read-only
-32,768 to +32,767 0 RO Bi NC
18.10 integer
18.11 to Application menu 1 read-write
-32,768 to +32,767 0 RW Bi US
18.30 integer
18.31 to 0
Application menu 1 read-write bit OFF (0) or On (1) RW Bit US
18.50

Application menu 2 power-down
19.01 -32,768 to +32,767 0 RW Bi NC PS
saved integer
19.02 to Application menu 2 read-only
-32,768 to +32,767 0 RO Bi NC
19.10 integer
-32,768 to +32,767 0 RW Bi US
19.30 integer
19.31 to
Application menu 2 read-write bit OFF (0) or On (1) 0 RW Bit US
19.50

-32,768 to +32,767 0 RW Bi NC
20.20 integer
20.40 long integer -231 to 231-1 0 RW Bi NC
All menu 20 parameters are transferred to the SMARTCARD when a 4yyy transfer is performed. See section 9.3.1 Writing to the SMARTCARD on
page 86 for more information.
Read / Bit
RW RO Read only Uni Unipolar Bi Bi-polar Bit Txt Text string
Write parameter
Rating Power down
FI Filtered DE Destination NC Not copied RA PT Protected US User save PS
dependent save

11.19 Menu 21: Second motor parameters

21.01 Maximum reference clamp SPEED_LIMIT_MAX rpm 1000.0 RW Uni US
21.02 Minimum reference clamp ±SPEED_LIMIT_MAX rpm* 0.0 RW Bi PT US
21.03 Reference selector 0 to 6 0 (A1.A2) RW Txt US
21.04 Acceleration rate 0 to MAX_RAMP_RATE_M2 5.000 RW Uni US
21.05 Deceleration rate 0 to MAX_RAMP_RATE_M2 5.000 RW Uni US
21.06 Base speed 0 to 10000.0 rpm 1000 RW Uni US
21.07 Rated current 0 to RATED_CURRENT_MAX A RATED_CURRENT_MAX RW Uni US
For 480V drive: 440 Eur, 500 USA
21.08 Back emf set point 0 to ARMATURE_VOLTAGE_MAX V DC For 575V drive: 630 Eur, 630 USA RW Uni US
21.09 Rated voltage 0 to ARMATURE_VOLTAGE_MAX V DC For 575V drive: 630 Eur, 630 USA RW Uni US
21.10 Armature resistance 0 to 6.0000 Ω 0.0000 RW Uni US
21.11 Motor constant 0 to 100.0 % 50 % RW Uni RA US
Discontinuous current controller Ki
21.12 0 to 4000 200 RW Uni RA US
gain
21.13 Continuous current controller Kp gain 0 to 4000 100 RW Uni RA US
21.14 Continuous current controller Ki gain 0 to 4000 50 RW Uni RA US
21.15 Motor 2 active OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
21.16 Thermal time constant 0 to 3000.0 89.0 RW Uni US
21.17 Speed controller Kp gain 0.00 to 6.5535(1 / (rad/s)) 0.0300 RW Uni US
21.18 Speed controller Ki gain 0.00 to 655.35(s / (rad/s)) 0.10 RW Uni US
21.19 Speed controller Kd gain 0.00000 to 0.65535(1/s / (rad/s)) 0.00000 RW Uni US
21.21 Speed feedback selector 0 to 5 5 RW Txt US
21.23 Rated field voltage 0 to 500 Vdc Eur: 360, USA: 300 RW Uni US
Size 1: 2A Eur: 8A, USA: 8A
21.24 Rated field current 0 to FIELD_CURRENT_SET_MAX Size: 2A&B Eur: 3A, USA: 20A RW Uni RA PT US
Size 2C&D Eur: 5A, USA: 20A
21.25 Motor saturation breakpoint 1 0 to 100 % of rated flux 50 RW Uni US
21.26 Motor saturation breakpoint 2 0 to 100 % of rated flux 75 RW Uni US
21.27 Motoring current limit 0 to MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX % 150.0** RW Uni RA US
21.28 Regen current limit 0 to MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX % 150.0** RW Uni RA US
21.29 Symmetrical current limit 0 to MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX % 150.0** RW Uni RA US
21.30 Field thermal time constant 0.0 to 3000.0 24.0 RW Uni US
21.31 Flux loop P gain 0 to 30.0 3.0 RW Uni US
21.32 Flux loop I gain 0 to 300.0 60.0 RW Uni US
21.33 field weakening P gain 0 to 300.0 0.4 RW Uni US
21.34 field weakening I gain 0 to 300.0 5.0 RW Uni US
21.35 Rated field compensation factor 0 to 100 % 100 % RW Uni PT US
*The range shown for Pr 21.02 shows the range used for scaling purposes (i.e. for routing to an analog output etc.). Further range restrictions are
applied depending on the settings of Pr 1.08 and Pr 1.10.
**These are the maximum default values. If the variable maximum of this parameter (MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX) gives a lower value with the
default value of Motor rated current (Pr 21.07) the default of this parameter is at the lower value.
11.20 Menu 22: Additional Menu 0 set-up

22.01 to
Parameter 00.xy setup Pr 0.00 to 22.99 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
22.20
11.21 Menu 23: Header selections

0 to 7 (USEr (0), SEt UP (1), diAGnoS (2),
23.01 Sub block headers triPS (3), SP LOOP (4), SintEr (5), RO Uni NC PT
Fb SP (6), inPut (7)
Binary sum of per defined sub block
23.02 0 to 127 RO Uni NC PT
enables
23.03 to
Pre-defined sub block enable OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
23.09

12 Technical data Table 12-3 690 V current ratings

AC input
12.1 Drive technical data current
DC output Current Typical motor
12.1.1 Power and current ratings power (With
Model 150 % Vdc = 760 V)
The power ratings for the 480 V, 575 V and 690 V configurations are Continuous Continuous
Overload
shown in Table 12-1, Table 12-2 and Table 12-3.
A A A kW hp
The continuous current ratings given are for a maximum ambient
MP350A6(R) 295 350 525 240 320
temperature of 40 °C and an altitude of 1000 m. For operation at higher
temperatures and altitudes derating is required. MP470A6(R) 395 470* 705 320 425
MP700A6(R) 585 700 1050 480 640
The maximum continuous output current rating of the drive should be
‘derated’ for operation at altitudes above 1000 m. The derating is to be 1 MP825A6(R) 665 825* 1237.5 650 850
% derating of rated output current per 100 m above 1000 m to a MP1200A6(R) 1050 1200 1800 850 1150
maximum derating of 20 % at 3000 m. MP1850A6(R) 1570 1850 2775 1300 1750
Table 12-1 480 V current ratings * For this rating at 690 V, 150 % overload time is 20 s at 40 °C and 30 s
AC input Typical motor at 35 °C
DC output current
current power Maximum continuous input current
Model 150 % @ 400 @ 500 The values of maximum continuous input current are given to aid the
Continuous Continuous selection of cables and fuses. These values are stated for worst-case
overload Vdc Vdc
conditions.
A A A kW hp
NOTE
MP25A4(R) 22 25 37.5 9 15
For current ratings above 1850 A then parallel connection of the drives is
MP45A4(R) 40 45 67.5 15 27
required. However, this function is not implemented on firmware
MP75A4(R) 67 75 112.5 27 45
versions V01.05.02 and earlier.
MP105A4(R) 94 105 157.5 37.5 60
MP155A4(R) 139 155 232.5 56 90
12.1.2 Typical short-term overload limits
The maximum percentage overload limit changes depending on the
MP210A4(R) 188 210 315 75 125
selected motor
MP350A4(R) 295 350 525 125 200
Variations in motor rated current will result in changes in the maximum
MP420A4(R) 350 420 630 150 250
possible overload as detailed in the Mentor MP Advanced User Guide.
MP550A4(R) 450 550 825 200 300
Figure 12-1 can be used to determine the maximum overload duration
MP700A4(R) 585 700 1050 250 400
available for overloads between 100 % and 150 %. For example the
MP825A4(R) 665 825 1237.5 300 500 maximum overload available for a period of 60 seconds is 124 %.
MP900A4(R) 725 900 1350 340 550
Figure 12-1 Maximum overload duration available
MP1200A4(R) 1050 1200 1800 450 750
160
MP1850A4(R) 1570 1850 2775 700 1150
155
Table 12-2 575 V current ratings 150
AC input Typical motor 145

DC output current overload
current power (%) 140
Model 150 % (With Vdc = 630 135

Continuous Continuous V)
overload
130
A A A kW hp
125
MP25A5(R) 22 25 37.5 14 18
120
MP45A5(R) 40 45 67.5 25 33
115
MP75A5(R) 67 75 112.5 42 56
110
MP105A5(R) 94 105 157.5 58 78
MP155A5(R) 139 155 232.5 88 115 105
MP210A5(R) 188 210 315 120 160 100

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
200
110
MP350A5(R) 295 350 525 195 260 overload duration (seconds)

MP470A5(R) 395 470* 705 265 355
MP700A5(R) 585 700 1050 395 530 NOTE
MP825A5(R) 665 825* 1237.5 465 620 Overload of 150 % for 30 s is available up to a maximum of 10
MP1200A5(R) 1050 1200 1800 680 910 repetitions per hour.
MP1850A5(R) 1570 1850 2775 1045 1400
* For this rating at 575 V, 150 % overload time is 20 s at 40 °C and 30 s
at 35 °C

12.1.3 Drive derating for extended ambient operation

Figure 12-2 Mentor MP size 1A derating for extended ambient operation
80
75
70
MP75Av (R)
65
60
55
Permissible output current (A)
50
45
40 MP45Av (R)
35
30
25
20
15
MP25Av (R)
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Figure 12-3 Mentor MP size 1B derating for extended ambient operation

220
210
200 MP210Av (R)
190
180
170
160 MP155Av (R)
150
140
130
120
MP105Av (R)
110
100
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Figure 12-4 Mentor MP size 2A derating for extended ambient operation

560
550
540
530
MP550A4(R)
520
510
500
490
480 MP470A5(R)
MP470A6(R)
470
460
450
440
430
420 MP420A4(R)
410 (No derating
400 necessary)
390
380
370
360
350 MP350A4(R)
340 MP350A5(R)
330 MP350A6(R)
320
310
300
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Figure 12-5 Mentor MP size 2B derating for extended ambient operation

910
900
890
880 MP900A4(R)
870
860
850
840
830
820 MP825A5(R)
MP825A5(R)
810
800
790
780
770
760 MP825A4(R)
750
740
730
720
710
700 MP700A5(R)
MP700A6(R)
690
680
670
660
650
640 MP700A4(R)
630
620
610
600
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Figure 12-6 Mentor MP Size 2C and 2D derating for extended ambient operation
1900
1850
1800
1750
1700 MP1850A4(R)
MP1850A5(R)
1650 MP1850A6(R)
1600
1550
1500
1450
1400
1350
1300
1250 MP1200A4(R)
MP1200A5(R)
1200 MP1200A6(R)
1150
1100
1050
1000
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
NOTE
The derating graphs show the derating required for worst-case conditions.

12.1.4 Power dissipation 12.1.7 Main AC supply (L1, L2, L3)

The table below shows the maximum drive losses, assuming high output
Table 12-5 Three phase AC supply
Product voltage variant
Table 12-4 Drive losses Specification
480 V 575 V 690 V
Loss @ Loss @ Loss @
40 °C 50 °C 55 °C Maximum nominal supply 480 V 575 V 690 V
Model
Tolerance +10 %
W W W
Minimum nominal supply 24 V 500 V
MP25A4(R)
125 91 Tolerance -20 % -10 %
MP25A5(R)
MP45A4(R)
168 139 117 12.1.8 Auxiliary AC supply
MP45A5(R) Table 12-6 Line to line supply
MP75A4(R)
219 194 183 Specification Value
MP75A5(R)
MP105A4(R) Maximum nominal supply 480 V
274
MP105A5(R) Tolerance +10 %
MP155A4(R) Minimum nominal supply 208 V
400
MP155A5(R) Tolerance -10 %
310
MP210A4(R)
561 456
MP210A5(R) 12.1.9 Line reactors
MP350A4(R) 954 The Mentor MP, in common with all naturally commutated thyristor
drives, causes voltage notches at the input supply terminals. In order to
MP350A5(R)
1045 avoid disturbance to other equipment using the same supply, the
MP350A6(R)
addition of external line inductance is strongly recommended in order to
MP420A4(R) 1154 restrict the depth of the notches imposed on the shared supply. This is
MP470A5(R) generally not necessary where a dedicated transformer is used to supply
1546 1268 1162
MP470A6(R) the drive.
MP550A4(R) 1568 1354 The following recommendations for added line inductance, have been
MP700A4(R) 1663 calculated based on the power drive systems standard: EN 61800-
MP825A4(R) 3:2004 “Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 3: EMC
MP700A5(R) requirements and specific test methods”.
1955 1795
MP700A6(R) Table 12-7 Minimum required line inductance for a typical
MP825A4(R) 2160 1909 1751 application (50 % ripple content)
MP825A5(R) Drive System voltage Typical Maximum
2381 2004 1795
MP825A6(R) rated current current
MP900A4(R) 2220 1908 1751 current 400 V 480 V 575 V 690 V rating rating
MP1200A4(R) A μH μH μH μH A A
MP1200A5(R) 3635 3660
25 220 260 320 21 22
MP1200A6(R)
45 220 260 320 38 40
MP1850A4(R)
75 220 260 320 63 67
MP1850A5(R) 5203 4418 4139
MP1850A6(R) 105 220 260 320 88 94
155 160 190 230 130 139
12.1.5 AC Supply requirements 210 120 140 170 176 188
The standard drive is rated for a nominal supply voltage up to 480 V rms. 350 71 85 110 120 293 295
An optional rating of 575 V rms is available for size 1 drives. 420 59 71 351 350
An optional rating of 575 V rms and 690 Vrms is available for size 2 470 80 91 393 395
drives. 550 45 54 460 450
700 36 43 53 61 586 585
Grounded delta supplies exceeding 575 V are not permitted
825 45 52 690 665
for drives up to and including 210 A. Grounded delta
supplies exceeding 600 V are not permitted for drives rated 900 28 33 753 725
WARNING 350 A and above. 1200 21 25 31 36 1004 1050
1850 18 23 29 32 1548 1450
12.1.6 Supply types
Drives rated for supply voltages of up to 575 V (rated up to 210 A) and NOTE
600 V (350 A and above), are suitable for use with any supply type i.e. 1. The above assumes the supply has 1.5 % impedance.
TN-S, TN-C-S, TT, IT with grounding at any potential i.e neutral, centre 2. Assumes a minimum supply rating of 5 kA and a maximum rating of
or corner (“Grounded delta”). 60 kA.
Grounded delta supplies >575 V are not permitted for drives rated up to
and including 210 A. Grounded delta supplies >600 V are not permitted
for drives rated 350 A and above.

12.1.10 Temperature, humidity and cooling method 12.1.14 Corrosive gasses

Ambient temperature operating range: Concentrations of corrosive gases must not exceed the levels given in:
0 °C to 55 °C (32 °F to 131 °F). • Table A2 of EN 50178:1998
Output current derating must be applied at ambient temperatures • Class 3C2 of IEC 60721-3-3
>40 °C (104 °F). This corresponds to the levels typical of urban areas with industrial
Minimum temperature at power-up: activities and/or heavy traffic, but not in the immediate neighborhood of
The drive will power up at -15 °C (5 °F) industrial sources with chemical emissions.
Cooling method: 12.1.15 RoHS compliance
MP25Ax(R) and MP45Ax(R) = Natural convection. Mentor MP meets EU directive 2002/95/EC for RoHS compliance.
MP75Ax(R) upwards = Forced cooling. 12.1.16 Vibration
Maximum humidity: Maximum recommended continuous vibration level 0.14 g r.m.s. broad-
The Mentor MP Product range can operate in environments up to 90 band 5 to 200 Hz.
% relative humidity at 50 °C. NOTE
This is the limit for broad-band (random) vibration. Narrow-band
12.1.11 Storage vibration at this level which coincides with a structural resonance could
-40 °C (-40 °F) to +55 °C (131 °F) for long term storage, or to +70 °C result in premature failure.
(158 °F) for short term storage. Bump test
Storage time is 2 years. Testing in each of three mutually perpendicular axes in turn.
Electrolytic capacitors in any electronic product have a storage period Referenced standard:IEC 60068-2-29: Test Eb:
after which they require reforming or replacing. Severity: 18 g, 6 ms, half sine
No. of Bumps: 600 (100 in each direction of each axis)
The DC bus capacitors have a storage period of 10 years.
Random vibration test
The low voltage capacitors on the control supplies typically have a
Testing in each of three mutually perpendicular axes in turn.
storage period of 2 years and are thus the limiting factor.
Referenced standard:IEC 60068-2-64: Test Fh:
Low voltage capacitors cannot be reformed due to their location in the Severity: 1.0 m²/s³ (0.01 g²/Hz) ASD from 5 to 20 Hz
circuit and thus may require replacing if the drive is stored for a period of -3 dB/octave from 20 to 200 Hz
2 years or greater without power being applied. Duration: 30 minutes in each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes.
It is therefore recommended that drives are powered up for a minimum Sinusoidal vibration test
of 1 hour after every 2 years of storage. Testing in each of three mutually perpendicular axes in turn.
This process allows the drive to be stored for a further 2 years. Referenced standard: IEC 60068-2-6: Test Fc:
Frequency range: 5 to 500 Hz
12.1.12 Altitude Severity: 3.5 mm peak displacement from 5 to 9 Hz
Altitude range: 0 to 3,000 m (9,900 ft), subject to the following 10 m/s² peak acceleration from 9 to 200 Hz
conditions: 15 m/s² peak acceleration from 200 to 500 Hz
1,000 m to 3,000 m (3,300 ft to 9,900 ft) above sea level: derate the Sweep rate: 1 octave/minute
maximum output current from the specified figure by 1 % per 100 m Duration: 15 minutes in each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes.
(330 ft) above 1,000 m (3,300 ft) EN 61800-5-1:2007, Section 5.2.6.4. referring to IEC 60068-2-6
For example at 3,000 m (9,900 ft) the output current of the drive would Frequency range: 10-150 Hz
have to be derated by 20 %. Amplitude: 10-57 Hz @ 0.075 mm pk
57-150 Hz @ 1g pk
12.1.13 IP rating
Sweep rate: 1 octave/minute
The Mentor MP range of drives have the following Ingress Protection
Duration: 10 sweep cycles per axes in each of 3
rating:
mutually perpendicular axes
Table 12-8 IP rating Shock test
Frame size IP Rating BS EN 60068-2-27, Test Ea
Pulse shape: half-sine
1A IP20 Protection against medium size foreign bodies ∅
Severity: 15 g pk acceleration, 11 ms pulse duration
> 12 mm (finger) No protection against ingress of
1B No of shocks: 3 in each direction of 3 mutually
water
perpendicular axes (total of 18)
2A IP10 Protection against large foreign bodies ∅ >
50mm (large area contact with hand) No protection
2B 12.1.17 Start up time
against ingress of water
This is the time taken from the moment of applying power to the drive, to
2C IP00 No protection against contact, ingress of foreign the drive being ready to run a motor:
2D bodies or ingress of water
All sizes: 2 s
12.1.18 Output speed range
IP rating
Speed range: 0 to 10,000 rpm
It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that any enclosure
which allows access to drives from frame sizes 2A to 2D
12.1.19 Accuracy
Accuracy in estimated speed mode: Typically 5 to 10 %.
WARNING while the product is energized, provides protection against
contact and ingress to the requirements of IP20. Other modes are dependent on feedback device used.
The IP rating of a product is a measure of protection against contact and

ingress of foreign bodies and water. It is stated as IP XX, where the two
digits (XX) indicate the degree of protection.

12.1.20 Acoustic noise 12.1.23 Weights

The heatsink fan generates the majority of the acoustic noise produced by Table 12-10 Overall drive weights
the drive. The heatsink fan on the Mentor MP is a single speed fan.
Frame
Table 12-9 gives the acoustic noise produced by the drive. Model kg Ib
size
Table 12-9 Acoustic noise data MP25A4 MP25A5
10 22
Frame SPL at 1m MP45A4 MP45A5
Model
size (dBA) MP75A4 MP75A5 10.1 22.3
1A
MP25A4(R) MP25A5(R) No fans MP25A4R MP25A5R
10.2 22.5
MP45A4(R) MP45A5(R) 1A installed MP45A4R MP45A5R
MP75A4(R) MP75A5(R) 43 MP75A4R MP75A5R 10.5 23.1
MP105A4(R) MP105A5(R) MP105A4 MP105A5
MP155A4(R) MP155A5(R) 1B 56 MP155A4 MP155A5 12.6 27.8
MP210A4(R) MP210A5(R) MP210A4 MP210A5
1B
MP105A4R MP105A5R
MP350A4(R) MP350A5(R) MP350A6(R)
MP155A4R MP155A5R 13.0 28.7
MP420A4(R) MP470A5(R) MP470A6(R) 2A
MP210A4R MP210A5R
MP550A4(R)
68 MP350A4 MP350A5 MP350A6
MP700A4(R) MP700A5(R) MP700A6(R)
MP420A4
MP825A4(R) MP825A5(R) MP825A6(R) 2B 35 77.2
MP470A5 MP470A6
MP900A4(R)
MP550A4
MP1200A4 MP1200A5 MP1200A6 2A
2C MP350A4R MP350A5R MP350A6R
MP1850A4 MP1850A5 MP1850A6
67* MP420A4R
MP1200A4R MP1200A5R MP1200A6R 38 83.8
2D MP470A5R MP470A6R
MP1850A4R MP1850A5R MP1850A6R MP550A4R
MP700A4 MP700A5 MP700A6
NOTE
MP825A4 MP825A5 MP825A6 41 90.4
* The acoustic noise figure for frame sizes 2C and 2D has been taken
with the bottom right angle ducting removed. MP900A4
2B
12.1.21 Cooling fan air flow
Mentor MP drives rated 75 A to 900 A are ventilated by internally MP825A4R MP825A5R MP825A6R 46 101.4
supplied fans. MP900A4R
Ensure the minimum clearances around the drive are maintained to MP1200A4 MP1200A5 MP1200A6
2C 100 220.5
allow the air to flow freely. The air flow figures are listed below: MP1850A4 MP1850A5 MP1850A6
Size 1A - 0.5 cubic metres per minute. MP1200A4R MP1200A5R MP1200A6R
2D 138 304.2
Size 2A - 7.8 cubic metres per minute.
12.2 Cable and fuse size ratings
Mentor MP drives rated 1200 A and above are ventilated by externally
The selection of the correct fuse is essential to ensure the
supplied fans. Please refer to section 4.12 Connecting the fan on size
safety of the installation
2C and 2D drives on page 52 for more information.
WARNING
The air flow figures are listed below:
Size 2C - 22 cubic metres per minute. Maximum continuous input currents are given in section 2.1 Current
ratings on page 6 to aid the selection of fuses and cabling. The
Size 2D - 22 cubic metres per minute.
maximum input current is dependent on the ripple content of the output
The drive controls the fan operation based on the temperature of the current. A value of 100 % ripple has been assumed for the given ratings.
heatsink and the drives thermal model system.
The cable sizing selected when installing a Mentor MP must comply with
the local wiring regulations. The information provided in this section is
12.1.22 Overall dimensions provided for guidance purposes only.
Refer to section 3.4 Mounting method on page 17. The power terminals on Mentor MP frame size 1 drives have been
designed to accommodate a maximum cable size of 150 mm2 (350
kcmil) with a temperature of 90 °C (194 °F).
The power terminals on Mentor MP frame size 2A drives have been
designed to accommodate a maximum cable size of 2 x 150 mm2 (2 x
350 kcmil) with a temperature of 75 °C (167 °F).
The power terminals on Mentor MP frame size 2B drives have been
designed to accommodate 2 x 240 mm2 with a temperature of 90 °C
(194 °F). The use of cables sized using the US national electrical code
as shown in Table 12-13 requires the use of a terminal adaptor.
The power terminals on Mentor MP frame size 2C and 2D drives have
been designed for use with busbars. The drive can be used with cables
as shown in Table 12-13 with the use of a terminal adaptor.

The actual cable size depends on a number of factors including: Table 12-11 Typical cable sizes for size 1 drives
• Actual maximum continuous current
• Ambient temperature IEC 60364-5-52[1] UL508C/NEC[2]
Model
• Cable support, method and grouping Input Output Input Output
• Cable voltage drop
MP25A4(R) MP25A5(R) 2 mm2 8 AWG 8 AWG
2.5 mm 4
In applications where the motor used is of a reduced rating, the cable
sizing selected can be appropriate for that motor. To protect the motor MP45A4(R) MP45A5(R) 10 mm2 10 mm2 4 AWG 4 AWG
and the output cabling the drive must be programmed with the correct MP75A4(R) MP75A5(R) 16 mm 2
25 mm 2 1 AWG 1/0 AWG
motor rated current.
MP105A4(R) MP105A5(R) 25 mm2 35 mm2 1/0 AWG 1/0 AWG
NOTE MP155A4(R) MP155A5(R) 50 mm2 70 mm2 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG
When using reduced cable sizes, the branch circuit protection fuse rating
needs to be reduced in line with the cable size selected.
MP210A4(R) MP210A5(R) 95 mm2 95 mm2 300 kcmil 350 kcmil
The following table shows typical cable sizes based on USA and
NOTE
International standards, assuming 3 conductors per raceway/conduit, an
1. The maximum cable size is defined by the power terminal housing
ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F) and applications with high output
using 90 °C (194 °F) rated cables as per Table A.52-5 of the
standard.
2. Assumes the use of 75 °C rated cables, as per Table 310.16 of the
National Electrical Code.
The use of higher temperature rated cable would allow a reduction on
the minimum recommended cable size for Mentor MP shown above. For
high temperature cable sizing, please refer to the data supplied by the
manufacturer of the high temperature cable.
Frame input output Column B2 derated by 0,87 of PVC at 40
size current current
1 13 8 2.5 1.5 14 AWG 14 AWG
IEC 60364-5-52 use installation method B2, Table A.52-4 for three loaded conductors, PVC insulation 30 °C and apply derating factor for 40 °C from
Table A.52-14 (0.87 for PVC).
Notes for UL508C:
Either 60 °C or 75 °C cable can be used. Ampacities as per table 40.3 as described in the UL508C standard.
Table 12-13 Typical cable sizes for size 2 drives

IEC 60364-5-52 Table A52-
12 Column 5 derated by
0.91 for 40 °C XLPE cables
US National
Maximum (IEC 60364-5-52 table A52-
Continuous Electrical Code
input 14) and 0.77 for cables
output current bunching (IEC 60364-5-52
Model current
table A52-17 item 4)
90 °C cables at 40 °C
75 °C cable at 40 °C ambient
ambient
Input size Output size Input cables Output cables
A A mm² mm² Kcmil Kcmil
MP350A4(R) MP350A5(R) MP350A6(R) 295 350 120 150 350 400
MP420A4(R) 350 420 150 185 400 500
MP470A5(R) MP470A6(R) 395 470 185 240 500 600
MP550A4(R) 450 550 300 2 x 185 2 x 300 2 x 350
MP900A4(R) 725 900 2 x 185 2 x 240 3 x 350 3 x 400
MP1850A4(R) MP1850A5(R) MP1850A6(R) 1450 1850 4 x 240 4 x 300 * *
* Values are beyond the mechanical design of the drive. At this power level it may be prudent to consider bus-bars.


NOTE
1. IEC 60364-5-52 Table A 52-12 F method column 5 = Single core cable in free air.
2. IEC 60364-5-52 table A52-14 correction factor for ambient air temperature others than 30 °C.
3. IEC 60364-5-52 table A52-17 item 4 correction factor for groups of more than one circuit or more than one multi-core cable placed on a single
layer on a perforated tray.
NOTE
Notes for US National Electrical Code:

1. Table 310.17 allowable ampacities of single-insulated conducted rated 0 through 2,000 V in free air, based on ambient air temperature of 30 °C
(87 °F).
2. Derating factor of 0.88 is applied for 40 °C to the 75 °C cable column. Table 310.17 is based on 30 °C (86 °F) ambient air temperature.
3. NEC 2005 edition Table 310.15(B)(2)(a) shows the adjustment factors for more than three current-carrying conductors in a race way or cable, for
4-6 current-carrying conductors 0.80 derating factor is applied.
input output Column B2 derated by 0,87 of PVC at 40
Frame size current current
2 23 20 6 4 10 AWG 10 AWG
IEC 60364-5-52 use installation method B2, Table A.52-4 for three loaded conductors, PVC insulation 30 °C and apply derating factor for 40 °C from
Table A.52-14 (0.87 for PVC).
Notes for UL508C: Either 60 °C or 75 °C cable can be used. Ampacities as per table 40.3 as described in the UL508C standard.

12.2.1 Ferraz Shawmut fuses
Fuses
The AC supply to the drive must be installed with suitable protection against overload and short-circuits. The following tables show the
recommended fuses. Failure to observe this requirement will cause risk of fire.
WARNING
Ferraz Shawmut fuses are recommended for the Mentor MP.

International USA
Model
10 x 38 mm 10 x 38 mm
Field fuses FR10GB69V12.5 H330011 √ FR10GB69V12.5 H330011 √
Ferrule Ferrule
A50QS Series
MP25A4 A50QS40-4 Y215583 √
MP25A5
A50QS Series
MP45A4 A50QS70-4 B222664 √
MP45A5
A50QS Series
MP75A4 A50QS125-4 K218417 √
MP75A5 22 x 58 mm
Ferrule A70QS Series
MP25A4R A70QS60-4 H219473
MP25A5R
A70QS Series
MP45A4R A70QS80-4 X212816
MP45A5R
A70QS Series
MP75A4R A70QS125-4 Q216375
MP75A5R
A50QS Series
MP105A4 A50QS175-4 A222663 √
PC30UD69V160EF M300092 √ round fuse
MP105A5
A50QS Series
MP155A4 Size 30 Square A50QS250-4 W211251 √
PC30UD69V200EF N300093 √ round fuse
body fuse
MP155A5
A50QS Series
MP210A4 A50QS350-4 T215343 √
PC30UD69V315EF Q300095 √ round fuse
MP210A5
A70QS Series
MP105A4R A70QS175-4 A223192
PC70UD13C160EF T300604 √ round fuse
MP105A5R
A70QS Series
MP155A4R Size 70 Square A70QS250-4 L217406
PC70UD13C200EF V300605 √ round fuse
body fuse
MP155A5R
A70QS Series
MP210A4R A70QS350-4 M211266
PC70UD12C280EF L300712 √ round fuse
MP210A5R
NOTE

International USA
Model
Description Catalog No. Ref No. UL app Catalog No. UL app
Auxiliary 21 x 57 mm Cylindrical HSJ15 D235868 AJT10 √
MP25A4 MP25A5 FR22GG69V25 N212072 AJT30 √
MP45A4 MP45A5 FR22GG69V50 P214626 AJT45 √
MP75A4 MP75A5 FR22GG69V80 Q217180 AJT70 √
22 x 58 mm Ferrule
MP25A4R MP25A5R FR22GG69V25 N212072 AJT30 √
MP45A4R MP45A5R FR22GG69V50 P214626 AJT45 √
MP75A4R MP75A5R FR22GG69V80 Q217180 AJT70 √
MP105A4 MP105A5 NH 00 Knife Blade NH00GG69V100 B228460 AJT125 √
MP155A4 MP155A5 NH1GG69V160 F228487 AJT175 √
NH 1 Knife Blade
MP210A4 MP210A5 NH1GG69V200 G228488 AJT225 √
MP105A4R MP105A5R NH 00 Knife Blade NH00GG69V100 B228460 AJT125 √
MP155A4R MP155A5R NH1GG69V160 F228487 AJT175 √
NH 1 Knife Blade
MP210A4R MP210A5R NH1GG69V200 G228488 AJT225 √
Table 12-17 Ferraz Shawmut DC Semiconductor protection fusing for size 1 drives
International USA
Model UL UL
app app
MP25A4R A70QS Series round fuse A70QS60-4 H219473 √
20 x 127 mm Cylindrical FD20GB100V32T F089498
MP25A5R
MP45A4R A70QS Series round fuse A70QS80-4 X212816 √
36 x 127 mm Cylindrical FD36GC100V80T A083651
MP45A5R
MP75A4R FD20GC100V63T x A70QS Series round fuse A70QS125-4 Q216375 √
20 x 127 mm Cylindrical 2 connected in F083656
MP75A5R parallel
MP105A4R A70QS Series round fuse A70QS175-4 A223192 √
Size 120 Square body D120GC75V160TF R085253
MP105A5R
MP155A4R A70QS Series round fuse A70QS250-4 L217406 √
Size 121 Square body D121GC75V250TF Q085252
MP155A5R
MP210A4R A70QS Series round fuse A70QS350-4 M211266 √
Size 122 Square body D122GC75V315TF M085249
MP210A5R
NOTE
DC fusing is required on four quadrant (R) drives only.

International USA
Model
FR10GR69V25 F1014581 FR10GR69V25 F1014581

Field fuses 10 x 38 mm 10 x 38 mm
√ √
(all size 2) Ferrule Ferrule
FR10GB69V25 L330014 FR10GB69V25 L330014
A50QS450-4 E216871 √
MP350A4 PC30UD69V500TF W300399 √
A7OQS450-4 F214848 √
MP350A4R PC71UD11V500TF F300523 √ A7OQS450-4 F214848 √
MP350A5 PC31UD69V500TF T300006 √ A70QS450-4 F214848 √

MP350A6 PC31UD69V500TF T300006 A70QS450-4 F214848
MP350A5R PC72UD13C500TF D300498 √ A70QS450-4 F214848 √
MP350A6R PC72UD13C500TF D300498 A70QS450-4 F214848
A50QS600-4 Q219457 √
MP420A4 PC32UD69V630TF M300069 √
A70QS600-4 Y219993 √
MP420A4R PC272UD13C630TF W300721 √ A70QS600-4 Y219993 √
MP470A5 PC272UD13C700TF X300722 √
MP470A6 PC272UD13C700TF X300722 2 x A70QS400
J214345 (x2)
MP470A5R PC272UD13C700TF X300722 √ in parallel
MP470A6R PC272UD13C700TF X300722

A50QS700-4 N223181 √
MP550A4 PC33UD69V700TF Y300079 √
A70QS700-4 E202772 √
MP550A4R PC272UD13C700TF X300722 √ A70QS700-4 E202772 √
A50QS900-4 R212282 √
MP700A4 PC32UD69V1000TF S300074 √ 2 x A70QS500-4
Square body American round A218431 (x2)
in parallel
fuses fuses
MP700A4R PC72UD10C900TF G300869 √
MP700A5 PC32UD69V1000TF S300074 √
2 x A70QS500
MP700A6 PC32UD69V1000TF S300074 A218431 (x2)
in parallel
MP700A5R PC73UD12C900TF T300512 √
MP700A6R PC73UD12C900TF T300512
A50QS1200-4 C217904 √
MP825A4 PC32UD69V1100TF M300759 √ 2 x A70QS600-4
Y219993 (x2)
in parallel
MP825A5 PC33UD69V1100TF C300083 √
MP825A6 PC33UD69V1100TF C300083
2 x A7OQS600-4
MP825A4R Y219993 (x2)
PC73UD95V800TFB W300514 √ in parallel
MP825A5R
MP825A6R PC73UD95V800TFB W300514
A50QS1200-4 C217904 √
MP900A4 PC33UD69V1250TF D300084 √ 2 x A7OQS600-4
Y219993 (x2)
in parallel
2 x A7OQS600-4
MP900A4R PC73UD95V800TFB W300514 √ Y219993 (x2)
in parallel
2 x A5OQS800-4
PC33UD60V1600TF Z300586 C202287 (x2)
in parallel
MP1200A4
2 x A70QS800-4
A075URD 44 PPASF D1020007A √ Z213830 (x2)
in parallel

International USA
Model
PC273UD11C16CTF J302228
MP1200A4R
A075URD 44 PPASF D1020007A √
PC232UD69V16CTD W300215
MP1200A5
A075URD 44 PPASF D1020007A √ 2 x A70QS800-4 in
Z213830 (x2)
MP1200A6 PC232UD69V16CTD W300215 parallel
PC273UD11C16CTF J302228
MP1200A5R
A075URD 44 PPASF D1020007A √
MP1200A6R Square PC273UD11C16CTF J302228 American
body fuses
round fuses 2 x A5OQS1000-4
B217391 (x2)
in parallel.
MP1850A4
3 x A70QS700-4 in
*E202772 (x3)
parallel.
MP1850A4R
** A075URD 44 PPASF D1020007A √
MP1850A5
*3 x A7OQS700-4
MP1850A6 *E202772 (x3)
in parallel
MP1850A5R
MP1850A6R
NOTE
*Application overload limited to infrequent overloads to avoid fuse wear out
**Fuse limits applications to those operating at rated current. No cyclic overloads permitted.
International USA
Model UL UL
app app
25 A 600 Vac 25 A 600 Vac
Auxiliary High Speed HSJ205 G235871J √ High Speed AJT25R X21160J √
Class J Class J
MP350A5(R)
MP350A4(R) NH2GG69V355 Y228503 A6D400R B216776 √
MP350A6(R)
MP420A4(R) NH3GG69V400 D228508 A6D500R P217294 √
MP470A5(R) NH4GG69V630-8 E215537

MP470A6(R) NH4AGG69V630-8 W222107
General A6D600R T217804 √
purpose IEC NH4GG69V630-8 E215537
MP550A4 (R)
(square body) NH4AGG69V630-8 W222107
MP700A5(R) NH4GG69V800-8 K216554 General
MP700A4(R)
MP700A6(R) NH4AGG69V800-8 M222858 purpose US
(round body)
MP825A4(R) A4BQ800 Z219373 √
NH4GG69V800-8 K216554
MP825A5(R)
NH4AGG69V800-8 M222858
MP825A6(R)
MP900A4(R) A4BQ1000 P216282 √
MP1200A5(R) MF76GG69V1250 E302753
MP1200A4(R) General A4BQ1200 R216790 √
MP1200A6(R) Purpose IEC
(round body)
MP1850A5(R)
MP1850A4(R) MF114GG69V2000 G302755 A4BQ2000 B223101 √
MP1850A6(R)
NOTE
USA fuses are only rated up to 600 Vac.

Table 12-20 Ferraz Shawmut DC protection fusing for size 2 drives

International USA
Model UL UL
recog recog
MP350A4R A70QS600-4 Y219993 √
MP350A5R D123GB75V630TF C098557 American round
A100P600-4 A217373 √
MP350A6R fuse
MP420A4R D123GB75V800TF J220946 A70QS800-4 Z213830 √

MP470A5R
A100P1000-4 (x2) Y217371 (x2)
MP470A6R D2122GD75V900TF T220955 American round
fuses
MP550A4R 2 in parallel A70QS450-4 (x2) F214848 (x2) √
MP700A4R A70QS600-4 (x2) Y219993 (x2) √
Square Body
MP700A5R fuse American round
A100P1200-4 N218397
MP700A6R fuse
D2123GB75V12CTF D098558 American round

MP825A4R fuses A70QS800-4 (x2) Z213830 (x2)
2 in parallel
MP825A5R American round
A100P1200-4 N218397
MP825A6R fuse
American round
MP900A4R D2123GB75V14CTF B090483 fuses A70QS600-4 (x3) Y219993 (x3)
3 in parallel
MP1200A4R A70QS700-4 (x3) E202772 (x3)
PC73UD13C630TF Q300509
(x3) (x3) A100P700-4 (x3) T223163 (x3)
MP1200A6R
MP1850A4R A70QS600-4 (x5) Y219993 (x5)
PC73UD13C700TF R300510
(x4) (x4) A100P600-4 (x5) A217373 (x5)
MP1850A6R
NOTE
The use of the A100P series fuses is limited to applications with L/R time constants of 30 ms or less. DC fusing is only required on four quadrant (R)
drives.

12.2.2 Alternative fusing

Cooper Bussmann or Siba fuses are an acceptable alternative.
Cooper Bussmann
Table 12-21 Cooper Bussmann semiconductor fusing for size 1 two quadrant drives
Model Fuse type Rating V Rating A Catalog number UL approved
Auxiliary 10.3 x 38 mm ferrule 600 Vac 12 FWC-12A10F
MP25A4 MP25A5 ET Type BS88 fuse 40 40ET √
MP45A4 MP45A5 FE Type BS88 fuse 80 80FE √
MP75A4 MP75A5 EET Type BS88 fuse 140 140EET √
690 Vac
MP105A4 MP105A5 FEE Type BS88 fuse 160 160FEE √
MP155A4 MP155A5 FM Type BS88 fuse 250 250FM √
MP210A4 MP210A5 FMM Type BS88 fuse 400 400FMM √
Figure 12-7 Cooper Bussmann North American alternative semiconductor fusing for size 1 two quadrant 480 V drives only
MP25A4 40 FWH-40
MP45A4 70 FWH-70
MP75A4 125 FWH-125
FWH series American round fuse 500 Vac
MP105A4 175 FWH-175
MP155A4 250 FWH-250
MP210A4 350 FWH-350
Table 12-22 Cooper Bussmann North American alternative semiconductor fusing for size 1 two quadrant 480 V and 575 V drives
MP25A4 MP25A5 40 FWP-40
MP45A4 MP45A5 70 FWP-70
MP75A4 MP75A5 125 FWP-125
FWP series American round fuse 700 Vac
MP105A4 MP105A5 175 FWP-175
MP155A4 MP155A5 250 FWP-250
MP210A4 MP210A5 300 FWP-300
Table 12-23 Cooper Bussmann North American alternative semiconductor fusing for size 1 two and four quadrant drives
MP25A4(R) MP25A5(R) 40 FWJ-40
MP45A4(R) MP45A5(R) 70 FWJ-70
MP75A4(R) MP75A5(R) 125 FWJ-125
FWJ series American round fuse 1000 Vac
MP105A4(R) MP105A5(R) 175 FWJ-175
MP155A4(R) MP155A5(R) 250 FWJ-250
MP210A4(R) MP210A5(R) 350 FWJ-350
Table 12-24 Cooper Bussmann branch circuit protection fusing for 480 V and 575 V size 1 drives
Auxiliary 10.3 x 38 mm ferrule 12 LP-CC-12
MP25A4(R) MP25A5(R) 30 LPJ-30SP √
26.9 x 60.5 mm ferrule
MP45A4(R) MP45A5(R) 60 LPJ-60SP √
MP75A4(R) MP75A5(R) 600 Vac 80 LPJ-80SP √
MP105A4(R) MP105A5(R) 110 LPJ-110SP √
Cylindrical bolt-in type fuse
MP155A4(R) MP155A5(R) 175 LPJ-175SP √
MP210A4(R) MP210A5(R) 225 LPJ-225SP √

Table 12-25 Cooper Bussmann DC protection fusing for 480 V and 575 V size 1 drives
Model Fuse type Rating V Rating A Catalog number UL Recognized
MP25A4R FWJ series American round fuse 1000 Vac 40 FWJ-40A √
MP25A5R AC fuse provides protection
NOTE
DC protection fusing is only required for 4 quadrant drives.
Table 12-26 Cooper Bussman Semiconductor fusing for size 2 drives (alternative 1)
Alternative 1
UL
Model Description Catalog No. UL
app Description Catalog No.
app
Auxiliary 10 x 38 mm ferrule FWC-25A10F
700 V, 500 A FWP Series
MP350A4 690 V, 500 A BS88 fuse 500FMM √ FWP-500A √
fuse
MP350A4R Size 3 US blade SQ body 170M8536

fuse
MP350A6 690 V, 500 A BS88 fuse 500FMM FWP-500A
fuse
Size 2 Square Body
MP350A5R 170M5144 √
DIN 43 653 fuse
Size 2 Square Body
MP350A6R 170M5144
DIN 43 653 fuse
fuse
Size 2 Square body
MP420A4R 170M5972
DIN 43 653
MP470A5 FWP-800A
fuse
MP470A6
*2 x Size 2 Square body
170M5139
DIN 43 653 in parallel
MP470A5R
MP470A6R
2 x Size 3 Square body

MP550A4R 170M8616
DIN 43 653 in parallel.

MP700A4 Size 1 Square body flush end 170M4419 FWP-900A √
fuse
MP700A4R Size 3 Square DIN 43 653 fuse 170M6147
MP700A5 √ √
Size 2 Square body flush end 170M5415 FWP-900A
fuse
MP700A6

Alternative 1
UL
Model Description Catalog No. UL
app Description Catalog No.
app
MP700A5R
Square body flush end contact 170M6726
MP700A6R
MP825A4
√ √
MP825A5 Size 2 Square body flush end 170M5417 FWP-1200A
Fuse
MP825A6
2 x Size 3 Square Body DIN 43

MP825A4R 170M6143
653 in parallel.
MP825A5R
MP825A6R
MP900A4 Size 3 Square body flush end 170M6416 √ FWP-1200A √
Fuse
MP900A4R *Size 3 Square DIN 43 653 Fuse *170M6147 √
MP1200A4 Size 4 Square body flush end 170M7061
2x Size 3 Square Body DIN 43

MP1200A4R 170M6146
653 in parallel
MP1200A5
Size 4 Square body flush end 170M7061
MP1200A6
MP1200A5R
*2 x Square body flush end
*170M6726
contact in parallel
MP1200A6R
2 x Size 4 Square body flush end

MP1850A4 170M7059
in parallel
MP1850A4R
MP1850A5
*2 x Size 2 Square Body Flush
*170M5415
End in parallel.
MP1850A6
MP1850A5R
*3 x Size 3 Square body DIN 43
*170M6143
653 in parallel.
MP1850A6R

Alternative 2
Model Description Catalog No. UL app
Description Catalog No. UL app
MP350A4 690 V, 500 A BS88 fuse 500FMM √

1000 V, 500 A FWJ series fuse FWJ-500A √
MP350A5 √ √
690 V, 500 A BS88 fuse 500FMM 1000 V, 500 A FWJ series fuse FWJ-500A
MP350A6
MP350A5R √
Size 2 Square Body DIN 43
170M5144
653 fuse
MP350A6R
MP420A4 690 V, 630 A BS88 fuse 630FMM √ 1000 V, 600 A FWJ series fuse FWJ-600A √
MP420A4R Size 2 Square body DIN 43 653 170M5972 1000 V, 600 A FWJ series fuse FWJ-600A √
MP470A5
1000 V, 800 A FWJ Series Fuse FWJ-800A
MP470A6
*2 x Size 2 Square body DIN
170M5139
43 653 in parallel
MP470A5R
MP470A6R
2 x Size 3 Square body DIN 43

MP550A4R 170M8616 1000 V, 800 A FWJ series fuse FWJ-800A
653 in parallel
MP700A4R Size 3 Square DIN 43 653 fuse 170M6147

1000 V, 1000 A FWJ series fuse FWJ-1000A
MP700A5 Size 2 Square body flush end √
170M5415
MP700A6 Size 2 Square body flush end
MP700A5R
MP700A6R

√
MP825A5 Size 2 Square body flush end 170M5417 1000 V, 1200 A FWJ series fuse FWJ-1200A

MP825A4R 170M6143 *1000 V, 1000 A FWJ series fuse *FWJ-1000A
653 in parallel
MP825A5R
MP825A6R
MP900A4 Size 3 Square body flush end 170M6416 √ 1000 V, 1200 A FWJ series fuse FWJ-1200A
*Size 3 Square DIN 43 653

MP900A4R *170M6147 √ *1000 V, 1000 A FWJ series fuse *FWJ-1000A
fuse

Alternative 2
2x Size 3 Square body DIN 43

MP1200A4R 170M6146 1000 V, 1600 A FWJ series fuse FWJ-1600A
653 in parallel
MP1200A5
Size 4 Square body flush end 170M7061 1000 V, 1600 A FWJ Series fuse FWJ-1600A
MP1200A6
MP1200A5R
*170M6726
contact in parallel
MP1200A6R
2 x Size 4 Square body flush

MP1850A4 170M7059
end in parallel
*2 x 1000 V, 1000 A FWJ Series

MP1850A4R *FWJ-1000A
fuses in parallel.
MP1850A5
*2 x Size 2 Square body flush
*170M5415
end in parallel
MP1850A6
MP1850A5R
*3 x Size 3 Square body DIN
*170M6143
43 653 in parallel
MP1850A6R
Alternative 3
MP350A4 690 V, 500 A BS88 fuse 500FMM √ 500 V, 450 A FWH Series fuse FWH-450A √
MP350A5 690 V, 500 A BS88 fuse 500FMM √
MP350A6 690 V, 500 A BS88 fuse 500FMM
Size 2 Square Body DIN 43 653

MP350A5R 170M5144 √
fuse
Size 2 Square Body DIN 43 653
MP350A6R 170M5144
fuse
MP420A4 690 V, 630 A BS88 fuse 630FMM √ 500 V, 600 A FWH Series fuse FWH-600A √
MP420A4R Size 2 Square Body DIN 43 653 170M5972
MP470A5
MP470A6
170M5139
653 in parallel
MP470A5R
MP470A6R

MP550A4R 170M8616
653 in parallel
MP700A4 Size 1 Square body flush end 170M4419 500 V, 1000 A FWH Series fuse FWH-1000A √
MP700A4R Size 3 Square DIN 43 653 Fuse 170M6147
MP700A5 Size 2 Square body flush end 170M5415 √

Alternative 3
MP700A5R
MP700A6R
MP825A4 Size 2 Square body flush end 500 V,1200 A FWH Series fuse FWH-1200A √
√

MP825A4R 170M6143
653 in parallel
MP825A5R
MP825A6R
MP900A4 Size 3 Square body flush end 170M6416 √ 500 V, 1200 A FWH Series fuse FWH-1200A √
MP900A4R *Size 3 Square DIN 43 653 fuse *170M6147 √
2 x 500 V, 1000 A FWH Series

MP1200A4 Size 4 Square body flush end 170M7061 FWH-1000A (x2)
fuse in parallel
2x Size 3 Square body DIN 43

MP1200A4R 170M6146
653 in parallel
MP1200A5
Size 4 Square body flush end 170M7061
MP1200A6
MP1200A5R
*170M6726
contact in parallel
MP1200A6R
2 x Size 4 Square body flush 2 x 500 V, 1200 A FWH Series

MP1850A4 170M7059 FWH-1200A (x2)
end in parallel fuse in parallel
MP1850A4R
MP1850A5
*2 x Size 2 Square body flush
*170M5415
end in parallel
MP1850A6
MP1850A5R
*170M6143
653 in parallel
MP1850A6R
NOTE
*Fusing limits applications to those operating at rated current. No cyclic overloads are permitted.

Table 12-29 Cooper Bussman branch circuit protection fusing for size 2 drives
Model Description Catalog number UL approved
Auxiliary Class CC, 600 Vac, 20 A fuse √
MP350A4 MP350A4R Class L, 600 Vac, 900 A fuse KRP-C-900SP √
MP350A6 MP350A5R MP350A6R
MP420A4 MP420A4R Class L,600 Vac, 1200 A fuse KRP-C-1200SP √
MP700A4 MP700A4R Class L, 600 Vac, 1600 A fuse KRPC-1600SP √
MP1200A6 MP1200A5R MP1200A6R

Table 12-30 Cooper Bussmann DC protection fusing for size 2 drives (alternative 1)
Alternative 1
Model Description Catalog No. UL recog
Description Catalog No. UL recog
MP350A4R 1000 V, 550 A US SQ Body fuse 170M8536 1000 V, 600 A FWJ Series fuse FWJ-600 √
MP420A4R 1000 V, 800 A FWJ Series fuse FWJ-800 1000 V, 800 A FWJ Series fuse FWJ-800
1000 V, 900 A SQ Body end

MP550A4R 170M6603 1000 V, 1000 A FWJ Series fuse FWJ-1000
contact fuse
MP350A5R 170M6726
contact fuse
MP350A6R 170M6726
contact fuse
MP470A5R 170M6727
contact fuse
MP470A6R 170M6727
contact fuse
MP700A4R 1000 V, 1200 A FWJ Series fuse FWJ-1200A 700 Vac 900 A FWP Series fuse FWP 900A √
MP700A5R 1500 V, 1260 A Double body fuse 170M6757
2 x 700 Vac, 1000 A FWP

MP1200A4R 1000 V, 2000 A FWJ Series fuse FWJ-2000 FWP 1000A
fuses in parallel
2 x 700 Vac, 1200 A FWP
MP1850A4R 1000 V, 3000 A End contact fuse 170M7680 FWP 1200A
fuses in parallel
MP1200A5R 170M8112
contact fuse
MP1200A6R 170M8112
contact fuse
MP1850A5R 170M8163
contact fuse
MP1850A6R 170M8163
contact fuse
NOTE
DC fusing is only required on four quadrant (R) drives.

Table 12-31 Cooper Bussmann DC protection fusing for size 2 drives (alternative 2)
Alternative 2
Model Description Catalog No. UL recog
Description Catalog No. UL recog
MP350A4R 1000 V, 550 A US SQ Body fuse 170M8536 700 V, 450 A FWP Series Fuse FWP 450A √
MP420A4R 1000 V, 800 A FWJ Series fuse FWJ-800 700 V, 600 A FWP Series Fuse FWP 600A √

MP550A4R 170M6603 700 V, 700 A FWP Series Fuse FWP 700A √
contact fuse
MP350A5R 170M6726
contact fuse
MP350A6R 170M6726
contact fuse
MP470A5R 170M6727
contact fuse
MP470A6R 170M6727
contact fuse
MP700A4R 1000 V, 1200 A FWJ Series fuse FWJ-1200A
MP1200A4R 1000 V, 2000 A FWJ Series fuse FWJ-2000
MP1850A4R 1000 V, 3000 A End contact fuse 170M7680

MP1200A5R 170M8112
contact fuse
MP1200A6R 170M8112
contact fuse
MP1850A5R 170M8163
contact fuse
MP1850A6R 170M8163
contact fuse
NOTE

Siba
Table 12-32 Siba semiconductor fusing for 480 V and 575 V size 1 drives
Rating Rating Part No. Part No. UL

Model Fuse type
V A (with indicator) (without indicator) approved
Auxiliary 10 x 38 mm Ferrule fuse 660 Vac 12 50 179 06.12

MP25A4 MP25A5 32 50 140 06.32 √
MP45A4 MP45A5 63 50 140 06.63 √
MP75A4 MP75A5 100 50 140 06.100 √
22 x 58 cylindrical
MP25A4(R) MP25A5(R) 690 Vac URZ 32 50 140 06.32 √
MP45A4(R) MP45A5(R) 63 50 140 06.63 √

MP75A4(R) MP75A5(R) 100 50 140 06.100 √
URB 000 690 Vac 160 A
MP105A4 MP105A5 160 20 282 20.160 20 282 21.160 √
bolt-type 690 Vac
URB 000 690 Vac 200 A
MP155A4 MP155A5 200 20 282 20.200 20 282 21.200 √
bolt-type
URB 000 690 Vac 315 A
MP210A4 MP210A5 315 20 282 20.315 20 282 21.315 √
bolt-type
URB 000 690 Vac 160 A
MP105A4(R) MP105A5(R) 160 20 282 20.160 20 282 21.160 √
bolt-type
URB 000 690 Vac 200 A
MP155A4(R) MP155A5(R) 200 20 282 20.200 20 282 21.200 √
bolt-type
URB 000 690 Vac 315 A
MP210A4(R) MP210A5(R) 315 20 282 20.315 20 282 21.315 √
bolt-type
Table 12-33 Siba branch circuit protection fusing for 480 V and 575 V size 1 drives
Model Rating V Rating A Description Part number UL approved
Auxiliary 10 NH 000 gG 690 Vac 10 A 20 477 13.10

MP25A4 MP25A5 35 NH 000 gG 690 Vac 35 A 20 477 13.35
MP45A4 MP45A5 63 NH 00 gG 690 Vac 63 A 20 209 13.63
MP75A4 MP75A5 100 NH 00 gG 690 Vac 100 A 20 209 13.100
MP25A4(R) MP25A5(R) 35 NH 000 gG 690 Vac 35 A 20 477 13.35
MP45A4(R) MP45A5(R) 63 NH 00 gG 690 Vac 63 A 20 209 13.63

MP75A4(R) MP75A5(R) 690 Vac 100 NH 00 gG 690 Vac 100 A 20 209 13.100
MP105A4 MP105A5 160 NH1 gG 690 Vac 160 A 20 211 13.160
MP155A4 MP155A5 200 NH1 gG 690 Vac 200 A 20 211 13.200
MP210A4 MP210A5 315 NH2 gG 690 Vac 315 A 20 212 13.315
MP105A4(R) MP105A5(R) 160 NH1 gG 690 Vac 160 A 20 211 13.160

Table 12-34 Siba DC protection fusing for 480 V and 575 V size 1 drives
Reference UL
Model Rating V Rating A Description Configuration
number approved
MP25A4R MP25A5R 32 20 x 127 1000 Vdc 32 A gR 90 080 10.32
1000 Vdc
MP45A4R MP45A5R 50 20 x 127 1000 Vdc 50 A gR 90 080 10.50
MP75A4R MP75A5R 1500 Vdc 80 36 x 190 1500 Vdc 80 A gR 90 094 10.80
MP105A4R MP105A5R 125 SQB-DC2 1200 V 125 A 90 203 25.125 Single fuse
MP155A4R MP155A5R 900 Vdc 160 SQB-DC2 1200 V 160 A 90 203 25.160
MP210A4R MP210A5R 250 SQB-DC2 1200 V 250 A 90 203 25.250
NOTE

Table 12-35 Siba Semiconductor fusing for size 2 drives

International USA
Model Part number
Description
Metric thread contact UL app Blade contact UL app Blade contact UL app
Auxiliary 10 x 38 mm Ferrule fuse 50 179 06.20
MP350A4 690 V SQB1 500 A 20 660 31.500 √ 20 610 31.500 √ 20 617 31.500 √
MP420A4 690 V SQB1 550 A 20 660 31.550 √ 20 610 31.550 √ 20 617 31.550 √
MP550A4 2 x 690 V SQB1 400 A in parallel 20 660 31.400 20 610 31.400 20 617 31.400
MP350A4R 690 V SQB1 500 A 20 660 31.500 √ 20 610 31.500 √ 20 617 31.500 √
MP420A4R 690 V SQB1 550 A 20 660 31.550 20 610 31.550 20 617 31.550
MP550A4R 2 x 690 V SQB1 400 A in parallel 20 660 31.400 20 610 31.400 20 617 31.400
MP350A5 1250 V SQB1 450 A 20 760 31.450 √ 20 713 31.450 √ 20 719 31.450 √
MP350A6 1250 V SQB1 450 A 20 760 31.450 20 713 31.450 20 719 31.450
MP350A5R 1250 V SQB1 450 A 20 760 31.450 √ 20 713 31.450 √ 20 719 31.450 √
MP350A6R 1250 V SQB1 450 A 20 760 31.450 20 713 31.450 20 719 31.450
MP700A4 690 V SQB1 900 A 20 660 31.900 20 610 31.900 20 617 31.900
MP900A4 690 V SQB2-2 1250 A 20 678 32.1250
MP700A4R 690 V SQB1 900 A 20 660 31.900 20 610 31.900 20 617 31.900
MP900A4R 690 V SQB2-2 1250 A 20 678 32.1250
MP700A5 *1250 V SQB3 900 A 20 780 31.900 √ 20 733 31.900 √ 20 739 31.900 √
MP700A6 *1250 V SQB3 900 A 20 780 31.900 20 733 31.900 20 739 31.900
MP825A5 1250 V SQB2 800 A *20 770 31.800 √ *20 723 31.800 √ *20 729 31.800 √
MP825A6 1250 V SQB2 800 A *20 770 31.800 *20 723 31.800 *20 729 31.800
MP700A5R 1250 V SQB3 900 A 20 780 31.900 √ 20 733 31.900 √ 20 739 31.900 √
MP700A6R 1250 V SQB3 900 A 20 780 31.900 20 733 31.900 20 739 31.900
MP825A5R *1250 V SQB2 800 A *20 770 31.800 √ *20 723 31.800 √ *20 729 31.800 √
MP825A6R *1250 V SQB2 800 A *20 770 31.800 *20 723 31.800 *20 729 31.800
MP1200A4 690 V SQB2-2 1600 A 20 678 32.1600
MP1850A4 *690 V SQB3-2 1800 A *20 688 32.1800
MP1200A5 2 x 1250 V SQB3-2 900 A in parallel 20 788 32.900
MP1200A6 2 x 1250 V SQB3-2 900 A in parallel 20 788 32.900
MP1850A5 **2 x 1250 V SQB3-2 900 A in parallel **20 788 32.900
MP1850A6 **2 x 1250 V SQB3-2 900 A in parallel **20 788 32.900
MP1200A4R 690 V SQB2-2 1600 A 20 678 32.1600
MP1850A4R *690 V SQB3-2 1800 A *20 688 32.1800
MP1200A5R 2 x 1250 V SQB3-2 900 A in parallel 20 788 32.900
MP1200A6R 2 x 1250 V SQB3-2 900 A in parallel 20 788 32.900
MP1850A5R **2 x 1250 V SQB3-2 900 A in parallel **20 788 32.900
MP1850A6R **2 x 1250 V SQB3-2 900 A in parallel **20 788 32.900
NOTE
*Applications limited to 100 % current ripple content and no cyclic overloads to avoid fuse wear-out.
**Applications limited to 30 % current ripple content and no cyclic overloads to avoid fuse wear-out.

Table 12-36 Siba branch circuit fusing for size 2 drives

International
Model
Description Part number UL approved
*500 Vac, 20 A gG NH-Knife Blade 20 000 13.20
Auxiliary
690 Vac, 20 A gG NH-Knife Blade 20 477 13.20
*500 Vac, 355 A gG NH-knife blade 20 004 13.355
MP350A4(R)
690 Vac, 355 A gG NH-knife blade 20 212 13.355
MP350A5(R)
MP350A6(R)
MP420A4(R)
MP470A5(R)
MP470A6(R)
MP550A4(R) 690 Vac, 630 A gG NH-knife blade 20 225 13.630
MP700A4(R)
MP700A5(R)
MP700A6(R)
MP825A4(R)
MP825A5(R) 690 Vac, 800 A gG NH-knife blade 20 225 13.800
MP825A6(R)
MP900A4(R) *500 Vac, 1250 A gG NH-knife blade 20 006 13.1250
MP1200A4(R) *500 Vac, 1250 A gG NH-knife blade 20 006 13.1250
NOTE
Fuses are only rated up to 500 Vac.

Table 12-37 Siba DC protection fusing for size 2 drives

International USA
Model Description Part number
Metric thread UL Blade contact UL UNC thread UL Blade contact UL
2 x SQB3 1250 V 315 A
MP350A4R 2078132.315A. 2073532.315A 2078432.315A 2073932.315A
in parallel
MP350A5R SQB3 1250 V 400 A *2078132.400A. √ *2073532.400A √ *2078432.400A √ *2073932.400A √
MP350A6R SQB3 1250 V 400 A *2078132.400A. √ *2073532.400A √ *2078432.400A √ *2073932.400A √
MP420A4R SQB3 1250 V 500 A *2078132.500A √ *2073532.500A √ *2078432.500A √ *2073932.500A √
2 x SQB3 1250 V 315 A
MP470A5R *2078132.315A. *2073532.315A *2078432.315A *2073932.315A
in parallel
2 x SQB3 1250 V 315 A
MP470A6R *2078132.315A. *2073532.315A *2078432.315A *2073932.315A
in parallel
2 x SQB3 1250 V 315 A
MP550A4R *2078132.315A. *2073532.315A *2078432.315A *2073932.315A
in parallel
2 x SQB3 1250 V 500 A
MP700A4R 2078132.500A 2073532.500A 2078432.500A 2073932.500A
in parallel
2 x SQB3 1250 V 450 A
MP700A5R *2078132.450A *2073532.450A *2078432.450A *2073932.450A
in parallel
2 x SQB3 1250 V 450 A
MP700A6R *2078132.450A *2073532.450A *2078432.450A *2073932.450A
in parallel
2 x SQB3 1250 V 500 A
MP825A4R *2078132.500A *2073532.500A *2078432.500A *2073932.500A
in parallel
2 x SQB3 1250 V 500 A
MP825A5R *2078132.500A *2073532.500A *2078432.500A *2073932.500A
in parallel
2 x SQB3 1250 V 500A
MP825A6R *2078132.500A *2073532.500A *2078432.500A *2073932.500A
in parallel
2 x SQB3 1250 V 500 A
MP900A4R *2078132.500A *2073532.500A *2078432.500A *2073932.500A
in parallel
NOTE
* Applications limited to 100 % current ripple content and no cyclic overloads to avoid fuse wear-out.
NOTE

Table 12-38 Mentor MP size 1 drive thyristor I2t rating for 12.2.3 Torque settings
semiconductor fusing Table 12-40 Drive control, status relay and encoder terminal data
Latching Holding Model Connection type Torque setting
Thyristor I2t
Model 2
current current All Plug-in terminal block 0.5 N m (4.5 lb in)
(A s) IL IH
(mA) (mA) Table 12-41 Drive auxiliary and machine armature terminal data
Field regulator 400 Model Connection type Torque setting

MP25A4 All Terminal block 0.5 N m (4.5 lb in)
MP25A5
1030 Table 12-42 Drive power stage terminals on size 1 drives
MP25A4(R)
MP25A5(R) Model Connection type Torque setting
MP45A4 All M8 stud 10 N m (89.0 lb in)
MP45A5
3600 450 200
MP45A4(R) Table 12-43 Drive power stage terminals on size 2 drives
MP45A5(R) Model Connection type Torque setting
MP75A4
Size 2A M10 stud 15 N m (133.0 lb in)
MP75A5
15000 Size 2B
MP75A4(R)
MP75A5(R) Size 2C M12 stud 30 N m (266.0 Ib in)
MP105A4 Size 2D
MP105A5
MP105A4(R)
MP105A5(R)
MP155A4
MP155A5
80000 300 200
MP210A4
MP210A5
MP155A4(R)
MP155A5(R)
MP210A4(R)
MP210A5(R)
Table 12-39 Mentor MP size 2 drive thyristor I2t ratings for

semiconductor fusing
Latching Holding
Thyristor I2t
Model current current
(A2s) IL IH
(mA) (mA)
Field regulator 400
MP350A4(R)
MP550A4(R) 320000 200 150
MP420A4(R)
MP350A6(R)
MP470A6(R) 281000
MP470A5(R)
MP700A4(R)
MP900A4(R) 1050000 300 - 2000 150 - 500
MP825A4(R)
MP700A6(R)
MP825A6(R) 1200000
MP825A5(R)
MP1200A4(R)
MP1200A6(R)
MP1200A5(R)
2720000 2000 1000
MP1850A4(R)
MP1850A6(R)
MP1850A5(R)

12.2.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Emission

This is a summary of the EMC performance of the drive. For full details, The requirements of the following standards are met for motor cable
refer to the Mentor MP EMC data sheet which can be obtained from the lengths up to 100 m.
supplier of the drive.
Table 12-45 Emission compliance
Table 12-44 Immunity compliance
Filter
Type of
Standard Test specification Application Level Field: Standard
immunity Model Field: Standard
6 kV contact None Armature:High
IEC 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Module Level 3 Armature: Standard
discharge performance
EN 61000-4-2 discharge enclosure (industrial)
8 kV air discharge
MP25A4(R)
10 V/m prior to
Radio modulation MP45A4(R)
IEC 61000-4-3 Module Level 3
EN 61000-4-3
frequency 80 - 1000 MHz
enclosure (industrial) MP75A4(R)
radiated field 80 % AM (1 kHz) C3
modulation MP105A4(R)
5/50 ns 2 kV transient MP155A4(R)
Level 4
at 5 kHz repetition MP210A4(R)
Control lines (industrial
frequency via
harsh) MP350A4(R)
IEC 61000-4-4 Fast transient coupling clamp C4 C2
EN 61000-4-4 burst 5/50 ns 2 kV transient MP420A4(R)
at 5 kHz repetition Level 3 MP550A4(R)
Power lines
frequency by direct (industrial)
injection MP700A4(R)
AC supply MP825A4(R)
Common mode 4 kV
lines: Level 4
1.2/50 μs waveshape MP900A4(R)
line to ground
Differential mode 2 AC supply MP1200A4(R)
IEC 61000-4-5
Surges
EN 61000-4-5 kV lines: Level 3 MP1850A4(R)
1.2/50 μs waveshape line to line
Signal ports to Key (shown in decreasing order of permitted emission level):
Lines to ground Level 2
ground 1 C4 EN 61800-3:2004 second environment, restricted distribution
10V prior to (Additional measures may be required to prevent interference)
Conducted modulation
IEC 61000-4-6 Control and Level 3 C3 EN 61800-3:2004 second environment, unrestricted distribution
radio 0.15 - 80 MHz
EN 61000-4-6 power lines (industrial)
frequency 80 % AM (1 kHz) C2 Industrial generic standard EN 61000-6-4:2007
modulation EN 61800-3:2004 first environment restricted distribution (The
-30 % 10 ms following caution is required by EN 61800-3:2004)
Voltage dips
IEC 61000-4-11 +60 % 100 ms AC power
and
EN 61000-4-11 -60 % 1s ports This is a product of the restricted distribution class according
interruptions
<-95 % 5s
to IEC 61800-3. In a residential environment this product may
EN 61000-6- Generic immunity standard for the
1:2007 residential, commercial and light - Complies
cause radio interference in which case the user may be
IEC 61000-6-1 industrial environment CAUTION required to take adequate measures.
IEC 61000-6-2
Generic immunity standard for the
EN 61000-6- Complies C1 Residential generic standard EN 61000-6-3:2007
industrial environment
2:2005
EN 61800-3:2004 first environment unrestricted distribution
IEC 61800-3 Product standard for adjustable Meets immunity
EN 61800- speed power drive systems requirements for first and EN 61800-3:2004 defines the following:
3:2004 (immunity requirements) second environments • The first environment is one that includes residential premises. It
1 also includes establishments directly connected without intermediate
See section 4.9.4 Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and
transformers to a low-voltage power supply network which supplies
connections outside a building on page 50 for control ports for possible
buildings used for residential purposes.
requirements regarding grounding and external surge protection.
• The second environment is one that includes all establishments
other than those directly connected to a low-voltage power supply
network which supplies buildings used for residential purposes.
• Restricted distribution is defined as a mode of sales distribution in
which the manufacturer restricts the supply of equipment to
suppliers, customers or users who separately or jointly have
technical competence in the EMC requirements of the application of
drives.

12.3 Optional external EMC filters

EMC filters can be sourced directly from Schaffner and Epcos. See Table 12-46 for details.
It is essential that line reactors be connected between the

filter terminals and the power input terminals, as shown in
Figure 4-1. Failure to observe this requirement could result in
CAUTION destruction of the thyristors.
Table 12-46 Mentor MP and EMC filter cross reference

Manufacturers part number
Epcos
Model Schaffner armature Schaffner armature Schaffner standard Epcos standard
armature
standard high performance field filter field filter
high performance
MP25A4(R)
B84143-A66-R105
MP45A4(R) FN3270H-80-35 FN3258-75-52
MP75A4(R) *B84143-A90-R105
FN3280H-8-29 W62400-T1262D004
MP105A4(R)
MP155A4(R) FN3270H-200-99 FN3258H-180-40 B84143BO250S080
MP210A4(R)
MP350A4 (R)
MP420A4 (R)
MP550A4 (R)
FN3359-800-99
MP700A4 (R)
FN3280H-25-33
MP825A4(R)
MP900A4 (R)
MP1200A4 (R)
FN3359-1600-99
MP1850A4 (R)
* This filter is required if the input current to the Mentor MP will be greater than 66 Amps.

13 Diagnostics Figure 13-1 Keypad status modes
The display on the drive gives various information about the status of the Status Mode
drive. These fall into three categories:
Healthy Status Alarm Status Trip Status
• Trip indications
• Alarm indications Drive status
• Status indications = tripped
Trip type (UV
Users must not attempt to repair a drive if it is faulty, nor = undervolts)
carry out fault diagnosis other than through the use of the
diagnostic features described in this chapter.
If a drive is faulty, it must be returned to an authorized
WARNING Control Techniques distributor for repair. Figure 13-2 Location of the status LED
13.1 Trip indications

If the drive trips, the output of the drive is disabled so that the drive stops
controlling the motor. The upper display indicates that a trip has
occurred and the lower display shows the trip.
Trips are listed alphabetically in Table 13-1 based on the trip indication
shown on the drive display. Refer to Figure 13-1.
If a display is not used, the drive LED Status indicator will flash if the
drive has tripped. Refer to Figure 13-2.
The trip indication can be read in Pr 10.20 providing a trip number. Trip
numbers are listed in numerical order in Table 13-2 so the trip indication
can be cross referenced and then diagnosed using Table 13-1.
Non flashing: Flashing:
Example Normal status Trip status
1. Trip code 3 is read from Pr 10.20 via serial communications.
2. Checking Table 13-2 shows Trip 3 is an AOC trip.
Comms No. Trip Keypad

code display
3 AOC
3. Look up AOC in Table 13-1.

4. Perform checks detailed under Diagnosis.
Table 13-1 Trip indications

Trip Diagnosis
AOC Instantaneous output over current detected: Peak current greater than 225 %
Check for short circuit on armature cabling
3 Check integrity of motor insulation
Check current loop stability
AOP Voltage has been applied to the armature but no current feedback has been detected
158 Check the armature circuit
AtL Err Power processor armature timing loop cannot operate with the current PLL synchronization and the firing angle demand
161 This can occur if the PLL is in the process of losing synchronization but has not yet asserted a PLL Err (trip 174).
C.Acc SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD Read / Write fail
Check SMARTCARD is installed / located correctly
185 Ensure SMARTCARD is not writing data to data location 500 to 999
Replace SMARTCARD
SMARTCARD trip: The menu 0 parameter modification cannot be saved to the SMARTCARD because the necessary file has
C.boot
not been created on the SMARTCARD
A write to a menu 0 parameter has been initiated via the keypad with Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) set to auto(3) or boot(4), but the
necessary file on the SMARTCARD has not bee created
177
Ensure that Pr 11.42 (SE09, 0.30) is correctly set and reset the drive to create the necessary file on the SMARTCARD
Re-attempt the parameter write to the menu 0 parameter
C.bUSY SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD can not perform the required function as it is being accessed by a Solutions Module
178 Wait for the Solutions Module to finish accessing the SMARTCARD and then re-attempt the required function
C.Chg SMARTCARD trip: Data location already contains data
Erase data in data location
179
Write data to an alternative data location

Trip Diagnosis
C.cPr SMARTCARD trip: The values stored in the drive and the values in the data block on the SMARTCARD are different
188 Press the red reset button
C.dAt SMARTCARD trip: Data location specified does not contain any data
183 Ensure data block number is correct
C.Err SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD data is corrupted
Ensure the card is located correctly
182 Erase data and retry
Replace SMARTCARD
C.Full SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD full
184 Delete a data block or use different SMARTCARD
cL2 Analog input 2 current loss (current mode)
28 Check analog input 2 (terminal 7) current signal is present (4-20 mA, 20-4 mA)
cL3 Analog input 3 current loss (current mode)
29 Check analog input 3 (terminal 8) current signal is present (4-20 mA, 20-4 mA)
CL.bit Trip initiated from the control word (Pr 6.42)
35 Disable the control word by setting Pr 6.43 to 0 or check setting of Pr 6.42
C.OPtn SMARTCARD trip: Solutions Modules installed are different between source drive and destination drive
Ensure correct Solutions Modules are installed
180 Ensure Solutions Modules are in the same Solutions Module slot
Press the red reset button
C.Prod SMARTCARD trip: The data blocks on the SMARTCARD are not compatible with this product
175 Erase all data on the SMARTCARD by setting Pr xx.00 to 9999 and pressing the red reset button
Replace SMARTCARD
C.rdo SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD has the Read Only bit set
Enter 9777 in Pr xx.00 to allow SMARTCARD Read / Write access
181
Ensure the drive is not writing to data locations 500 to 999 on the card
C.rtg SMARTCARD trip: The voltage and/or current rating of the source and destination drives are different
Parameter data or default difference data is being transferred from a SMARTCARD to the drive, but the current and /or voltage
ratings are different between source and destination drives. This trip does not stop the data transfer, but is a warning that the data for
186
the Solution Modules that are different will be set to the default values and not the values from the card.
This trip also applies if a compare is attempted between the data block and the drive.
C.TyP SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD parameter set not compatible with drive
Press the reset button
187
Ensure destination drive type is the same as the source parameter file drive type
dESt Two or more parameters are writing to the same destination parameter
199 Set Pr xx.00 = 12001 check all visible parameters in the menus for duplication
EEPROM data corrupted - Drive mode becomes open loop and serial comms will timeout with remote keypad on the drive
EEF
RS485 comms port.
31 This trip can only be cleared by loading default parameters and saving parameters
EnC1 Drive encoder trip: Encoder power supply overload
Check encoder power supply wiring and encoder current requirement
189
Maximum current = 200 mA @ 15 V, or 300 mA @ 8 V and 5 V
EnC2 Drive encoder trip: Wire break
Check cable continuity
Check wiring of feedback signals is correct
190 Check encoder power supply is set correctly in Pr 3.36 (Fb06, 0.76)
Replace feedback device
If wire break detection on the main drive encoder input is not required, set Pr 3.40 = 0 to disable the Enc2 trip
EnC3 Drive encoder trip: Overload
191 Overload

Trip Diagnosis
Drive encoder trip: Position feedback is selected from a Solutions Module slot which does not have a speed / position
EnC9
feedback Solutions Module installed
197 Check setting of Pr 3.26 (Fb01, 0.71) (or Pr 21.21 if the second motor parameters have been enabled)
EnC10 Drive encoder trip: Termination overload

198 If the voltage from the encoder is >5 V, then the termination resistors must be disabled (Pr 3.39 to 0)
Et External trip
Check terminal 31 signal
Check value of Pr 10.32
6
Enter 12001 in Pr xx.00 and check for parameter controlling Pr 10.32
Ensure Pr 10.32 or Pr 10.38 (=6) are not being controlled by serial comms
FbL No feedback from the tachogenerator or encoder
If the difference between the estimated speed (Pr 5.04) and the actual speed feedback (Pr 3.02 (di05, 0.40)) exceeds the value set
in the speed feedback loss window (Pr 3.56) the drive will trip Feedback loss. With fast acceleration rates in applications with low
load inertia estimated speed (Pr 5.04) may not track the actual speed feedback (Pr 3.02 (di05, 0.40)) fast enough and the speed
feedback loss window (Pr 3.56) may need to be increased.
159
Check the feedback device is connected correctly
Check motor name plate values have been entered into the drive correctly
Check the speed feedback in estimated speed mode - refer to running a motor section checking speed feedback
Carry out a rotating autotune
Fbr The polarity of the feedback tachogenerator or encoder is incorrect
160 Check that the feedback devices are connected correctly
FdL No current in the field supply circuit
Check that the field controller (Pr 5.77 (SE12, 0.33)) is enabled.
168 For the internal field controller check terminals L11, L12 are closed
Check internal auxiliary fuses, refer to section on page 46.
FOC Excess current detected in field current feedback
Maximum current feedback is present
Check Field rated current (Pr 5.70 (SE10, 0.31)) and Field rated voltage (Pr 5.73 (SE11, 0.32)) are set correct to motor nameplate
169
Check for short circuit on field circuit cabling
Check integrity of motor insulation
F.OVL Field I2t overload
157 See Pr 5.81 and Pr 5.82
HF01 Data processing error: CPU address error
Hardware fault - return drive to supplier
HF02 Data processing error: DMAC address error
HF03 Data processing error: Illegal instruction
HF04 Data processing error: Illegal slot instruction
HF05 Data processing error: Undefined exception
HF06 Data processing error: Reserved exception
HF07 Data processing error: Watchdog failure
HF08 Data processing error: Level 4 crash
HF09 Data processing error: Heap overflow
HF10 Data processing error: Router error

Trip Diagnosis
HF11 Data processing error: Access to EEPROM failed
HF12 Data processing error: Main program stack overflow
HF17 Data processing error: No Comms from power processor
217 Hardware fault - return drive to supplier
HF18 Bucket suppressor capacitor failure
HF19 Overheat on bucket suppressor or snubber circuits
219 Check internal fan operation
HF20 Power stage recognition: identification code error
HF21 Power processor: Watchdog failure
HF22 Power processor: Undefined exception
HF23 Power processor: Level overrun
HF27 Power circuit: Thermistor 1 fault
HF28 Power software not compatible with user software
HF29 User processor: Armature timing error
It.AC I2t on drive output current (Refer to Pr 4.16)
Ensure the load is not jammed / sticking
20
Check the load on the motor has not changed
O.ht1 Drive overheat (thyristor junction) based on thermal model
Reduce ambient temperature
21
Reduce overload cycle
O.ht2 Heatsink over temperature
Check enclosure / drive fans are still functioning correctly
Check enclosure ventilation paths
Check enclosure door filters
22 Increase ventilation
Decrease acceleration / deceleration rates
Reduce duty cycle
Reduce motor load
O.ht3 External discharge resistor over temperature
The temperature of the external discharge resistor is monitored by the temperature accumulators. When the resistor temperature
27 (Pr 11.65) reaches 100 % the drive will trip
See Pr 11.62, Pr 11.63 and Pr 11.64
O.Ld1 Digital output overload: total current drawn from 24 V supply and digital outputs exceeds 200 mA
26 Check total load on digital outputs (terminals 24, 25 and 26) and the +24 V rail (terminal 22)
O.SPd Motor speed has exceeded the over speed threshold
The drive will trip O.SPd if the armature is open circuit when the drive is in estimated speed mode.
Check armature circuit
If the speed feedback (Pr 3.02 (di05, 0.40)) exceeds the over speed threshold (Pr 3.08) in either direction an over speed trip is
7
produced. If this parameter is set to zero, the over speed threshold is automatically set to 1.2 x Pr 1.06 (SE02, 0.23) or Pr 1.07
(SE01, 0.22).
Reduce the speed loop gain (Pr 3.10 (SP01, 0.61)) and speed integral (Pr 3.11 (SP02, 0.62)) to prevent speed overshoot.

Trip Diagnosis
PAd Keypad has been removed when the drive is receiving the speed reference from the keypad
Install keypad and reset
34
Change speed reference selector to select speed reference from another source
PLL Err Phase Lock Loop cannot lock to the auxiliary supply
174 Check auxiliary supply is stable
PS Internal power supply fault
Remove any Solutions Modules and reset
5
PS.10V 10 V user power supply current greater than 10 mA
Check wiring to terminal 4
8
Reduce load on terminal 4
PS.24V 24 V internal power supply overload
The total user load of the drive and Solutions Modules has exceeded the internal 24 V power supply limit.
The user load consists of the drive’s digital outputs, the SM-I/O Plus digital outputs, the drive’s main encoder supply and the SM-
Universal Encoder Plus encoder supply.
9
• Reduce load and reset
• Provide an external 24 V >50 W power supply
• Remove any Solutions Modules and reset
PSAVE.Er Power down save parameters in the EEPROM are corrupt
Indicates that the power was removed when power down save parameters were being saved.
The drive will revert back to the power down parameter set that was last saved successfully.
37
Perform a user save (Pr xx.00 to SAVE and reset the drive) or power down the drive normally to ensure this trip does or occur the
next time the drive is powered up.
SAVE.Er User save parameters in the EEPROM are corrupt
Indicates that the power was removed when user parameters were being saved.
36 The drive will revert back to the user parameter set that was last saved successfully.
Perform a user save (Pr xx.00 to SAVE and reset the drive) to ensure this trip does or occur the next time the drive is powered up.
SCL Drive RS485 serial comms loss to remote keypad
Reinstall the cable between the drive and keypad
Check cable for damage
30
Replace cable
Replace keypad
SL AC input phase loss
Ensure all three thyristor bridge supply phases are present
170
Check input voltage levels are correct (at full load)
SLX.dF Solutions Module slot X trip: Solutions Module type installed in slot X changed
204,209,214 Save parameters and reset
SLX.Er Solutions Module slot X trip: Solutions Module in slot X has detected a fault
Feedback module category
202,207,212
See the Diagnostics section in the relevant Solutions Module User Guide for more information.
SLX.HF Solutions Module slot X trip: Solutions Module X hardware fault
Ensure Solutions Module is installed correctly
200,205,210
Return Solutions Module to supplier
SLX.nF Solutions Module slot X trip: Solutions Module has been removed
Ensure Solutions Module is installed correctly
203,208,213 Reinstall Solutions Module
Save parameters and reset drive
SL.rtd Solutions Module trip: Drive mode has changed and Solutions Module parameter routing is now incorrect
Press reset.
215
If the trip persists, contact the supplier of the drive.
SLX.tO Solutions Module slot X trip: Solutions Module watchdog timeout
Press reset.
201,206,211
If the trip persists, contact the supplier of the drive.
S.Old The maximum power the over voltage suppressor can handle has been exceeded
Check the recommended line reactors are installed
171
Check the recommended external suppressor resistor is installed

Trip Diagnosis
S.OV Excessive suppressor voltage
Operation of the drive requires the installation of the external suppressor resistance, see section 4.7 External suppressor resistor on
172
page 47.
t002 Reserved
A value of 2 is being written to user trip (Pr 10.38). The drives internal logic, on board or Solutions Module program must be
2
interrogated. The program should be modified so that only trips defined as User trip are used.
t004 Reserved
4 See diagnosis for t002
t010 Reserved
t019 Reserved
t023 User trip
This trip is user defined. The drives internal logic, on board or Solutions module program must be interrogated to find the cause of
23
this trip. A value of 23 is being written to user trip (Pr 10.38)
t032 Reserved
t032 to t033 Reserved
32 to 33 See diagnosis for t002
t040 to t089 User trip
t099 User trip defined in 2nd processor Solutions Module code
99 This solutions module program must be interrogated to find the cause of this trip. A value of 99 is being written to user trip (Pr 10.38)
t101 User trip
t112 to t156 User trip
t176 Reserved
t216 User trip
th Motor thermistor trip
Check motor temperature
24 Check thermistor continuity
Set Pr 7.15 (in01, 0.81) = VOLt and reset the drive to disable this function
th.Err Missing thyristor
thS Motor thermistor short circuit
Check motor thermistor wiring
25 Replace motor / motor thermistor
Set Pr 7.15 (in01, 0.81) = VOLt and reset the drive to disable this function

Trip Diagnosis
tunE Autotune stopped before completion
The drive has tripped out during the autotune
18
The red stop key has been pressed during the autotune
tunE1* The position feedback did not change or required speed could not be reached during the inertia test (see Pr 5.12 (SE13, 0.34))
Ensure the motor is free to turn i.e. brake was released
Ensure Pr 3.26 and Pr 3.38 are set correctly
11
Check feedback device wiring is correct
Check feedback device coupling to motor
tunE2* Position feedback direction incorrect or motor could not be stopped during the inertia test (See Pr 5.12 (SE13, 0.34))
Check motor cable wiring is correct
12
Check feedback device wiring is correct
tunE3* Field flux has not decayed to zero during autotune
13 Contact the supplier of the drive
tunE4* Back emf detected during autotune
14 Check that the motor is not spinning when a static autotune is carried out
tunE5* No field current detected during autotune
15 Reset Pr 5.70 (SE10, 0.31) to nameplate value and re-autotune motor
tunE6* Cannot achieve ¼ rated back emf during autotune
16 Reset Pr 5.70 (SE10, 0.31) to nameplate value and re-autotune motor
tunE7* Rotating autotune initiated with Estimated speed selected
17 Connect a feedback device to carry out a rotating autotune
UP ACC Onboard PLC program: cannot access Onboard PLC program file on drive
Disable drive - write access is not allowed when the drive is enabled
98
Another source is already accessing Onboard PLC program - retry once other action is complete
UP div0 Onboard PLC program attempted divide by zero
90 Check program
UP OFL Onboard PLC program variables and function block calls using more than the allowed RAM space (stack overflow)
95 Check program
UP ovr Onboard PLC program attempted out of range parameter write
94 Check program
UP PAr Onboard PLC program attempted access to a non-existent parameter
91 Check program
UP ro Onboard PLC program attempted write to a read-only parameter
92 Check program
UP So Onboard PLC program attempted read of a write-only parameter
93 Check program
UP udF Onboard PLC program un-defined trip
97 Check program
UP uSEr Onboard PLC program requested a trip
96 Check program
UV The drive is running from the external 24 V supply
1 The drive is running from the external 24 V supply
*If a tunE through tunE 7 trip occurs, then after the drive is reset the drive cannot be made to run unless it is disabled via the drive enable parameter
(Pr 6.15) or the control word (Pr 6.42).

Table 13-2 Serial communications look-up table

No. String No. String No. String
1 UV 92 UP ro 189 EnC1
2 t002 93 UP So 190 EnC2
3 AOC 94 UP ovr 191 EnC3
4 t004 95 UP OFL 192-196 t192 - t196
5 PS 96 UP uSEr 197 EnC9
6 Et 97 UP udf 198 EnC10
7 O.SPd 98 UP ACC 199 dESt
8 PS.10V 99 t099 200 SL1.HF
9 PS.24V 100 201 SL1.tO
10 t010 101 t101 202 SL1.Er
11 tunE1 102-111 t102 - t111 203 SL1.nF
12 tunE2 112-155 t112 - t155 204 SL1.dF
13 tunE3 156 SLAVE.Er 205 SL2.HF
14 tunE4 157 F.OVL 206 SL2.tO
15 tunE5 158 AOP 207 SL2.Er
16 tunE6 159 FbL 208 SL2.nF
17 tunE7 160 Fbr 209 SL2.dF
18 tunE 161 AtL Err 210 SL3.HF
19 t019 162-167 t162 - t167 211 SL3.tO
20 It.AC 168 FdL 212 SL3.Er
21 O.ht1 169 FOC 213 SL3.nF
22 O.ht2 170 SL 214 SL3.dF
23 t023 171 S.OLd 215 SL.rtd
24 th 172 S.OV 216 t216
25 thS 173 th.Err 217-229 HF17 – HF29
26 O.Ld1 174 PLL Err
27 O.ht3 175 C.Prod
28 cL2 176 t176
29 cL3 177 C.Boot
30 SCL 178 C.BUSy
31 EEF 179 C.Chg
32-33 t032 - t033 180 C.Optn
34 Pad 181 C.RdO
35 CL.bit 182 C.Err
36 SAVE.Er 183 C.dat
37 PSAVE.Er 184 C.FULL
38-39 t038 - t039 185 C.Acc
40-89 t040 - t089 186 C.rtg
90 UP div0 187 C.Typ
91 UP Par 188 C.cpr
13.2 Trip categories

Trips can be grouped into the following categories. It should be noted that a trip can only occur when the drive is not tripped or is already tripped but
with a trip with a lower priority number.
Table 13-3 Trip categories
Priority Category Trips Comments
These indicate fatal problems and cannot be reset. The drive is
1 Hardware faults HF01 to HF16
inactive after one of these trips and the display shows HFxx.
HF17 to HF29, SL1.HF, SL2.HF,
2 Non-resetable trips Cannot be reset
SL3.HF
Cannot be reset unless a code to load defaults is first entered in
3 EEF trip EEF
parameter x.00
C.Boot, C.Busy, C.Chg, C.Optn,
4 SMARTCARD trips C.RdO, C.Err, C.dat, C.FULL, SMARTCARD trips have priority 5 during power up.
C.Acc, C.rtg, C.Typ, C.cpr,
These trips can only override the following priority 5 trips: Enc2, Enc9
4 Encoder power supply trips Enc1, Enc2
or Enc10
All other trips not included in this
5 Normal trips Can be reset after 1.0 s
table
Under voltage trip cannot be reset by the user, but is automatically
6 Self reseting trips UV
reset by the drive when the supply voltage is with specification.
Unless otherwise stated, trips cannot be reset until 1.0 s after the trip has been accepted by the drive.

13.3 Alarm indications 13.5 Displaying the trip history

In any mode an alarm flashes alternately with the data displayed on the The drive retains the last 10 trips that have occurred.
2nd row when one of the following conditions occur. If action is not taken Table 13-6 shows parameters used to store the last 10 trip.
to eliminate any alarm except "Autotune", and "PLC" the drive may
eventually trip. Alarms flash once every 640 ms except "PLC" which Table 13-6 Trips
flashes once every 10 s. Alarms are not displayed when a parameter is
being edited.
0.51 10.20 Trip 0 (most recent trip) tr01
Table 13-4 Alarm indications
0.52 10.21 Trip 1 tr02
Lower
Description 0.53 10.22 Trip 2 tr03
display
0.54 10.23 Trip 3 tr04
Hot Heatsink alarm is active
0.55 10.24 Trip 4 tr05
The temperature displayed in Pr 7.04 has exceeded the alarm level
0.56 10.25 Trip 5 tr06
(see Pr 7.04).
0.57 10.26 Trip 6 tr07
OVLd Motor overload
0.58 10.27 Trip 7 tr08
The motor I2t accumulator (Pr 4.19) in the drive has reached 75 % of
0.59 10.28 Trip 8 tr09
the value at which the drive will be tripped and the load on the drive is >
motor rated current (Pr 5.07 (SE07, 0.28)). 0.60 10.29 Trip 9 tr10
Autotune Autotune in progress
13.6 Behavior of the drive when tripped
The autotune procedure has been initialised. 'Auto' and 'tunE' will flash
If the drive trips the output of the drive is disabled so that the drive stops
alternatively on the display.
controlling the motor. If any trip occurs (except UV) the following read
CLt Current limit is active only parameters are frozen to help in diagnosing the cause of the trip
Indicates that current limits are active.
Table 13-7 Parameters frozen on trip
PLC Onboard PLC program is running
An Onboard PLC program is installed and running. The lower display
will flash 'PLC' once every 10s. 0.36 1.01 Speed reference selected di01
S.OV Indicated suppressor over voltage 1.02 Pre-skip filter reference
Indicates that the over voltage suppressor voltage is within 30 V of the 0.37 1.03 Pre-ramp reference di02
trip level 0.38 2.01 Post ramp reference di03
S.rS Suppressor resistor overload 0.39 3.01 Final speed reference di04
Indicates that the external voltage suppressor resistor is in an overload 0.40 3.02 Speed feedback di05
condition 3.03 Speed error
ESt SPd Estimated speed selected 0.41 3.04 Speed controller output di06
The drive has lost speed feedback and automatically selected 0.43 4.01 Current magnitude di08
Estimated speed mode. See Pr 3.55 (Select estimated speed on
5.01 Armature firing angle
feedback loss).
0.45 5.02 Armature voltage di10
13.4 Status indications 5.03 Output power
5.04 Estimated speed
Table 13-5 Status indications
5.05 Line voltage
Upper Description Drive output 5.58 Field firing angle
display stage
dEC Decelerating
Enabled 0.83 7.02 Analog input 2 in03
Speed is ramping to zero after a stop
inh Inhibited
Disabled 10.77 Input frequency
Enable input is inactive
Analog and digital I/O
POS Position
Enabled The analog and digital I/O on the drive continue to work correctly if a trip
Position control active during orientation stop occurs, except the digital outputs will go low if one of the following trips
rdY Ready occur: O.Ld1, PS.24V.
Disabled
Enable closed, but drive not active Drive logic functions
run Running The drive logic functions (i.e. PID, variable selectors, threshold
Enabled detectors, etc.) continue to operate when the drive is tripped.
Drive active and motor running
StoP Stopped Onboard PLC program
Enabled The Onboard PLC program continues to run if the drive is tripped, except
Drive active, but holding zero speed.
if one of Onboard PLC program trips occur.
triP Tripped
Disabled
Drive is tripped. 13.7 Trip masking
Drive trips can be masked by setting the appropriate trip code in
Pr 10.52 to Pr 10.61. Refer to Pr 10.52 to Pr 10.72 (Advanced parameter
descriptions chapter - Menu 10) in the Mentor MP Advanced User Guide
for further information.

14 UL information 14.5 Safety label

The safety label supplied with connectors and mounting brackets must
Mentor MP drives up to 575 V have been assessed to comply with both
be placed on a fixed part of the drive enclosure where it can be seen
ULus and cUL requirements.
clearly by maintenance personnel for UL compliance.
Control Techniques UL file number is E171230. Confirmation of UL
The label clearly states "CAUTION risk of electric shock power down at
listing can be found at website: www.ul.com
least 10 minutes before removing cover".
14.1 Common UL Information 14.6 UL Listed accessories
Conformity: The drive conforms to UL listing requirements only when the
following are observed: • SM-Keypad • MP-Keypad
1. The drive is installed in a type 1 enclosure, or better as defined in UL • SM-DeviceNet • SM-PROFIBUS-DP-V1
50. • SM-INTERBUS • SM-CANopen
2. The surrounding air temperature does not exceed 40 °C when the • SM-Ethernet • SM-EtherCAT
drive is operating. • SM-Applications Plus • SM-Applications Lite-V2
3. The terminal torques specified in section 3.9.3 Torque settings on
• SM-Encoder Plus • SM-Universal Encoder Plus
page 31 are to be used.
• SM-I/O Plus • SM-Encoder Output Plus
4. The power terminal lug used to crimp the, I/P & O/P cables are to be
UL listed. • SM-I/O Lite • SM-I/O 32
5. The drive is to be installed in to a pollution degree 2 environment. • SM-I/O PELV • SM-I/O Timer
6. If the drive control stage is supplied by an external power supply, • SM-I/O 24V Protected • SM-I/O 120V
(+24 V), the external power supply must be a UL class 2 power • Single ended encoder interface • 15-way D-type converter
supply.
7. Fuses sized as specified in the various tables in section 4.6 Cable
and fuse size ratings on page 39 are to be used.
8. Field wiring is to be class 1 75 °C (167 °F) copper wire only.
Motor overload protection
All models incorporate an internal overload protection model for the
motor load that does not require the use of an external or remote
overload protection device.
The protection level is adjustable, and the method of adjustment is
provided with the instructions for the product.
Maximum current overload is dependant on the values entered into the
current limit parameters (motoring current limit, regen current limit and
symmetrical current limit entered as percentage) and the motor rated
current parameter (entered in amperes).
The duration of the overload is dependant on motor thermal time
constant (variable up to a maximum of 3000 seconds). The default
overload protection is set such that the product is capable of 150 % of
the current value entered into the motor rated current parameter (Pr 5.07
(SE07, 0.28)) for 30 seconds (20 seconds for MP470A4(R),
MP470A5(R), MP825A5(R) and MP825A6(R). The product also
provides user terminal default functionality such that the product can be
connected to a motor thermistor to protect the motor in terms of
temperature, in the event of a motor cooling fan failure.
Over speed protection
The drive provides overspeed protection. However it does not provide
the level of protection afforded by an independent high integrity
overspeed protection device.
14.2 AC supply specification

The maximum UL supply voltage is 600 Vac.
The drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more
than 100,000 rms symmetrical Amperes at 575 V (size 1A and 1B).
14.3 Maximum ratings

The drive models are listed as having the maximum current rating (FLC)
shown in Table 2-2 and Table 2-3 in section 2.1 Current ratings on
page 6.
14.4 Parallel operation

The drives are not currently UL listed for parallel operation.

List of figures
Figure 2-1 Maximum overload duration available ................7 Figure 4-11 Location of external suppressor resistor
Figure 2-2 Model number .....................................................7 terminals on size 2 drives ................................ 47
Figure 2-3 Typical drive rating label .....................................8 Figure 4-12 Removal of bucket suppressor terminals
Figure 2-4 Drive features and options on size 1 ..................9 cover on size 2C and 2D .................................. 48
Figure 2-5 Drive features and options for size 2 ..................9 Figure 4-13 Protection circuit for an external suppression
Figure 3-1 Fire enclosure bottom layout ............................14 resistor ............................................................. 48
Figure 3-2 Fire enclosure baffle construction .....................14 Figure 4-14 Surge suppression for digital and unipolar
Figure 3-3 Removing the control terminal cover (size 1 inputs and outputs ............................................ 51
shown) ..............................................................14 Figure 4-15 Surge suppression for analog and bipolar
Figure 3-4 Removing the finger-guard break-outs .............15 inputs and outputs ............................................ 51
Figure 3-5 Installation and removal of the Solutions Figure 4-16 Serial communications port ............................. 51
Module ..............................................................15 Figure 4-17 Installation of grounding bracket ...................... 52
Figure 3-6 Removal and installation of a keypad ...............16 Figure 4-18 Grounding of signal cable shields using the
Figure 3-7 Overall size 1A dimensions .............................17 grounding bracket ............................................ 52
Figure 3-8 Overall size 1B dimensions ..............................18 Figure 4-19 Fan connection ................................................ 52
Figure 3-9 Installing the mounting feet bracket on size 1 Figure 4-20 Default terminal functions ................................ 54
drives ................................................................19 Figure 4-21 Feedback cable, twisted pair ........................... 57
Figure 3-10 Overall size 2A / 2B dimensions with terminal Figure 4-22 Feedback cable connections ........................... 58
shrouds attached ..............................................19 Figure 5-1 SM-Keypad ...................................................... 59
Figure 3-11 Overall size 2A dimensions without terminal Figure 5-2 MP-Keypad ...................................................... 59
shrouds attached ..............................................20 Figure 5-3 Display modes ................................................. 60
Figure 3-12 Overall size 2B dimensions without terminal Figure 5-4 Mode examples ................................................ 60
shrouds attached 20 Figure 5-5 Sub block navigation ........................................ 61
Figure 3-13 Size 2C front view and mounting dimensions ...21 Figure 5-6 Menu 0 copying ................................................ 63
Figure 3-14 Size 2C back-plate and mounting detail ...........22 Figure 5-7 Menu structure ................................................. 63
Figure 3-15 Size 2D front view and mounting dimensions ...23 Figure 5-8 User security open ........................................... 65
Figure 3-16 Size 2D back-plate and mounting detail ...........24 Figure 6-1 Speed feedback filter arrangement .................. 71
Figure 3-17 Mounting methods of size 2C / 2D air duct .......25 Figure 8-1 Responses ....................................................... 83
Figure 3-18 Installing the terminal shrouds on Figure 9-1 Installation of the SMARTCARD ...................... 85
size 1 drives ......................................................25 Figure 10-1 Mentor MP Onboard PLC program
Figure 3-19 Removing the terminal shrouds on scheduling ........................................................ 90
size 1 drives ......................................................26 Figure 10-2 Programming options for Mentor MP ............... 91
Figure 3-20 Installing the terminal shrouds on Figure 11-1 Menu 1 logic diagram ....................................... 98
size 2 drives ......................................................26 Figure 11-2 Menu 2 logic diagram ................................... 102
Figure 3-21 Enclosure layout ...............................................27 Figure 11-3 Menu 3 logic diagram ..................................... 106
Figure 3-22 Enclosure having front, sides and top panels Figure 11-4 Menu 4 logic diagram ..................................... 108
free to dissipate heat ........................................28 Figure 11-5 Menu 5 field control logic diagram ................. 112
Figure 3-23 Location of the power and ground terminals Figure 11-6 Menu 5 armature control logic diagram ......... 114
on size 1 drives .................................................29 Figure 11-7 Menu 6 logic diagram ..................................... 117
Figure 3-24 Location of the power and ground terminals on Figure 11-8 Menu 7 logic diagram ..................................... 119
size 2A and 2B drives .......................................30 Figure 11-9 Menu 8 logic diagram ..................................... 121
Figure 3-25 Location of the power and ground terminals Figure 11-10 Menu 8 logic diagram (cont) .......................... 122
on size 2C and 2D drives ..................................31 Figure 11-11 Menu 8 logic diagram (cont) .......................... 123
Figure 4-1 Power connections for 480 V drive ...................34 Figure 11-12 Menu 9 logic diagram: Programmable logic ... 125
Figure 4-2 Power connections for 575 V / 600 V / Figure 11-13 Menu 9 logic diagram: Motorized
690 V drives ......................................................35 potentiometer and binary sum ....................... 126
Figure 4-3 Location of ground connection on Figure 11-14 Menu 12 logic diagram ................................... 130
size 1 drives ......................................................36 Figure 11-15 Menu 12 logic diagram (continued) ................ 131
Figure 4-4 Location of ground connections on size Figure 11-16 Menu 12 Brake control function ..................... 132
2A / 2B drives ...................................................36 Figure 11-17 Brake sequence ............................................. 133
Figure 4-5 Location of ground connections on size Figure 11-18 Menu 13 logic diagram ................................... 136
2C / 2D drives ...................................................36 Figure 11-19 Menu 14 logic diagram ................................... 140
Figure 4-6 Removing the MOV ground connection on Figure 11-20 Location of Solution Module slots and their
size 1 drives ......................................................37 corresponding menu numbers ....................... 143
Figure 4-7 Removing the MOV ground connection on Figure 12-1 Maximum overload duration available ........... 146
size 2A / 2B drives ............................................37 Figure 12-2 Mentor MP size 1A derating for extended
Figure 4-8 Removing the MOV ground connection on ambient operation .......................................... 147
size 2C / 2D drives ............................................37 Figure 12-3 Mentor MP size 1B derating for extended
Figure 4-9 Removing the internal field fuses ......................46 ambient operation .......................................... 147
Figure 4-10 Location of external suppressor resistor Figure 12-4 Mentor MP size 2A derating for extended
terminals on size 1 drives .................................47 ambient operation .......................................... 148

Figure 12-5 Mentor MP size 2B derating for extended
ambient operation ...........................................148
Figure 12-6 Mentor MP Size 2C and 2D derating for
extended ambient operation ...........................149
Figure 12-7 Cooper Bussmann North American alternative
semiconductor fusing for size 1 two quadrant
480 V drives only ............................................160
Figure 13-1 Keypad status modes .....................................177
Figure 13-2 Location of the status LED .............................177

List of tables
Table 2-1 Model to frame size cross reference ...................6 Table 9-1 SMARTCARD data blocks ............................... 85
Table 2-2 480 V current ratings ..........................................6 Table 9-2 Transferring data .............................................. 85
Table 2-3 575 V current ratings ..........................................6 Table 9-3 Rating dependent parameters ......................... 86
Table 2-4 690 V current ratings ..........................................6 Table 9-4 Pr 11.38 types and modes ............................... 87
Table 2-5 Encoders compatible with Mentor MP ................8 Table 9-5 Pr 11.42 actions ............................................... 88
Table 2-6 Solutions Module identification .........................10 Table 9-6 Trip conditions .................................................. 88
Table 2-7 Keypad identification .........................................11 Table 9-7 SMARTCARD status indications ...................... 89
Table 2-8 Serial comms lead ............................................11 Table 11-1 Menu descriptions ............................................ 93
Table 2-9 External field control .........................................11 Table 11-2 Key to parameter table coding ......................... 93
Table 2-10 Parts supplied with the drive .............................12 Table 11-3 Feature look-up table ....................................... 94
Table 3-1 Drive control, status relay and encoder Table 11-4 Definition of parameter ranges & variable
terminal data .....................................................31 maximums ........................................................ 96
Table 3-2 Drive auxiliary and machine armature Table 12-1 480 V current ratings ...................................... 146
terminal data .....................................................31 Table 12-2 575 V current ratings ...................................... 146
Table 3-3 Drive power stage terminals on size 1 drives ...31 Table 12-3 690 V current ratings ...................................... 146
Table 3-4 Drive power stage terminals on size 2 drives ...31 Table 12-4 Drive losses ................................................... 150
Table 4-1 Three phase AC supply ....................................38 Table 12-5 Three phase AC supply ................................. 150
Table 4-2 Minimum required line inductance for a Table 12-6 Line to line supply .......................................... 150
typical application (50 % ripple content) ...........38 Table 12-7 Minimum required line inductance for a
Table 4-3 Terminal functions ............................................38 typical application (50 % ripple content) ........ 150
Table 4-4 Line to line supply .............................................38 Table 12-8 IP rating .......................................................... 151
Table 4-5 Field controller current ratings ..........................38 Table 12-9 Acoustic noise data ........................................ 152
Table 4-6 Typical cable sizes for size 1 drives .................39 Table 12-10 Overall drive weights ...................................... 152
Table 4-7 Auxiliary wiring for size 1 drives ........................40 Table 12-11 Typical cable sizes for size 1 drives ............... 153
Table 4-8 Typical cable sizes for size 2 drives .................40 Table 12-12 Auxiliary wiring for size 1 drives ..................... 153
Table 4-9 Auxiliary wiring for size 2 drives ........................40 Table 12-13 Typical cable sizes for size 2 drives ............... 153
Table 4-10 Ferraz Shawmut semiconductor fusing for Table 12-14 Auxiliary wiring for size 2 drives ..................... 154
size 1 drives ......................................................41 Table 12-15 Ferraz Shawmut semiconductor fusing for
Table 4-11 Ferraz Shawmut branch circuit protection size 1 drives ................................................... 155
fusing for size 1 drives ......................................42 Table 12-16 Ferraz Shawmut branch circuit protection
Table 4-12 Ferraz Shawmut DC Semiconductor fusing for size 1 drives ................................... 156
protection fusing for size 1 drives .....................42 Table 12-17 Ferraz Shawmut DC Semiconductor
Table 4-13 Ferraz Shawmut semiconductor fusing for protection fusing for size 1 drives .................. 156
size 2 drives ......................................................43 Table 12-18 Ferraz Shawmut semiconductor fusing for
Table 4-14 Ferraz Shawmut branch circuit protection size 2 drives ................................................... 157
fusing for size 2 drives ......................................44 Table 12-19 Ferraz Shawmut branch circuit protection
Table 4-15 Ferraz Shawmut DC protection fusing for fusing for size 2 drives ................................... 158
size 2 drives ......................................................45 Table 12-20 Ferraz Shawmut DC protection fusing for
Table 4-16 Mentor MP size 1 drive thyristor I2t rating size 2 drives ................................................... 159
for semiconductor fusing ...................................46 Table 12-21 Cooper Bussmann semiconductor fusing for
Table 4-17 Mentor MP size 2 drive thyristor I2t ratings for size 1 two quadrant drives ............................. 160
semiconductor fusing ........................................46 Table 12-22 Cooper Bussmann North American
Table 4-18 Recommended external suppressor resistors ..47 alternative semiconductor fusing for size 1
Table 4-19 Minimum allowable external suppression two quadrant 480 V and 575 V drives ............ 160
resistance .........................................................48 Table 12-23 Cooper Bussmann North American alternative
Table 4-20 Mentor MP and EMC filter cross references .....50 semiconductor fusing for size 1 two and four
Table 4-21 Emission compliance .......................................50 quadrant drives .............................................. 160
Table 4-22 RJ45 connections .............................................51 Table 12-24 Cooper Bussmann branch circuit protection
Table 4-23 Isolated serial comms lead details ....................51 fusing for 480 V and 575 V size 1 drives ....... 160
Table 4-24 Fan supply specification ...................................53 Table 12-25 Cooper Bussmann DC protection fusing for
Table 4-25 The control connections consist of: ..................53 480 V and 575 V size 1 drives ....................... 161
Table 4-26 Control connection recommended cable Table 12-26 Cooper Bussman Semiconductor fusing for
sizes ..................................................................53 size 2 drives (alternative 1) ............................ 161
Table 4-27 Encoder types ...................................................58 Table 12-27 Cooper Bussman Semiconductor fusing for
Table 5-1 Keypad navigation ............................................61 size 2 drives (alternative 2) ............................ 163
Table 5-2 Advanced menu descriptions ............................64 Table 12-28 Cooper Bussman Semiconductor fusing for
Table 5-3 Menu 40 parameter descriptions ......................64 size 2 drives (alternative 3) ............................ 164
Table 5-4 Menu 41 parameter descriptions ......................64 Table 12-29 Cooper Bussman branch circuit protection
Table 5-5 User security and parameter access levels ......65 fusing for size 2 drives ................................... 166
Table 6-1 Pre-defined sub block parameters ....................67 Table 12-30 Cooper Bussmann DC protection fusing for
Table 7-1 Minimum control connection requirements for size 2 drives (alternative 1) ............................ 167
each control mode ............................................76

Table 12-31 Cooper Bussmann DC protection fusing for
size 2 drives (alternative 2) ............................168
Table 12-32 Siba semiconductor fusing for 480 V and
575 V size 1 drives .........................................169
Table 12-33 Siba branch circuit protection fusing for 480 V
and 575 V size 1 drives ..................................169
Table 12-34 Siba DC protection fusing for 480 V and 575 V
size 1 drives ...................................................170
Table 12-35 Siba Semiconductor fusing for size 2 drives ..171
Table 12-36 Siba branch circuit fusing for size 2 drives .....172
Table 12-37 Siba DC protection fusing for size 2 drives ....173
Table 12-38 Mentor MP size 1 drive thyristor I2t rating for
semiconductor fusing .....................................174
Table 12-39 Mentor MP size 2 drive thyristor I2t ratings
for semiconductor fusing ................................174
Table 12-40 Drive control, status relay and encoder
terminal data ...................................................174
Table 12-41 Drive auxiliary and machine armature
terminal data ...................................................174
Table 12-42 Drive power stage terminals on size
1 drives ...........................................................174
Table 12-43 Drive power stage terminals on size
2 drives ...........................................................174
Table 12-44 Immunity compliance ......................................175
Table 12-45 Emission compliance ......................................175
Table 12-46 Mentor MP and EMC filter cross reference ....176
Table 13-1 Trip indications ...............................................177
Table 13-2 Serial communications look-up table ..............184
Table 13-3 Trip categories ................................................184
Table 13-4 Alarm indications ............................................185
Table 13-5 Status indications ...........................................185
Table 13-6 Trips ...............................................................185
Table 13-7 Parameters frozen on trip ...............................185

Index
Symbols H
+10V user output .....................................................................54 Humidity ................................................................................ 151
+24V external input .................................................................54
+24V user output .....................................................................55 I
IP Rating (Ingress protection) ............................................... 151
Numerics Items supplied with the drive .................................................. 12
0V common .............................................................................54
4 -20mA ...................................................................................74 M
Menu 01 - Speed reference .................................................... 98
A Menu 02 - Ramps ................................................................. 102
Acceleration ...................................................... 69, 77, 79, 104 Menu 03 - Speed feedback, speed control ........................... 105
Accuracy ...................................................................... 105, 151 Menu 04 - Torque and current control .................................. 107
Acoustic noise .......................................................................152 Menu 05 - Motor and field control ......................................... 112
Air-flow in a ventilated enclosure .............................................28 Menu 06 - Sequencer and clock ........................................... 117
Altitude ..................................................................................151 Menu 07 - Analog I/O ........................................................... 119
Analog I/O .............................................................................119 Menu 08 - Digital I/O ............................................................. 121
Analog input 2 .........................................................................55 Menu 09 - Programmable logic, motorized pot and binary
Analog input 3 .........................................................................55 sum ................................................................................. 125
Analog output 1 .......................................................................55 Menu 10 - Status and trips ................................................... 128
Analog output 2 .......................................................................55 Menu 11 - General drive set-up ............................................ 129
Analog reference resolution ..................................................105 Menu 12 - Threshold detectors, variable selectors and
brake control function ..................................................... 130
B Menu 13 - Position control .................................................... 136
Binary sum ............................................................................125 Menu 14 - User PID controller .............................................. 140
Brake .........................................................................................5 Menu 15, 16 and 17 - Solutions Module slots ...................... 143
Brake control function ...........................................................130 Menu 18 - Application menu 1 .............................................. 144
Menu 19 - Application menu 2 .............................................. 144
C Menu 20 - Application menu 3 .............................................. 144
Cautions ....................................................................................5 Menu 21 - Second motor parameters ................................... 145
Cooling fan air flow ................................................................152 Menu 22 - Additional Menu 0 set-up ..................................... 145
Cooling method .....................................................................151 Menu 23 - Header selections ................................................ 145
Current ......................................................................................5 Minimum reference clamp ...................................................... 69
Current control ......................................................................107 Mode parameter ..................................................................... 53
Motor control ......................................................................... 112
D Motorized pot ........................................................................ 125
Deceleration .................................................... 77, 79, 104, 145
Destination parameter .............................................................53 N
Digital I/O ..............................................................................121 Notes ........................................................................................ 5
Digital I/O 1 ...................................................................... 56, 57
Digital I/O 2 ...................................................................... 56, 57 O
Digital I/O 3 ...................................................................... 56, 57 Output frequency .................................................................. 151
Digital Input 1 ..........................................................................56 Overspeed ................................................................................ 5
Digital Input 2 ..........................................................................56
Digital Input 3 ..........................................................................56 P
Digital reference resolution ....................................................105 Parameter ranges ................................................................... 96
Dimensions (overall) ..............................................................152 Parameter x.00 ....................................................................... 68
Display ....................................................................................59 PID controller ........................................................................ 140
Drive enable ............................................................................56 Position control ..................................................................... 136
Precision reference Analog input 1 ......................................... 54
E Programmable logic .............................................................. 125
EMC ..........................................................................................5
Encoder lines per revolution ....................................................74 R
Encoder supply voltage ...........................................................74 Ramps .................................................................................. 102
Encoder type ...........................................................................74 Reference modes ................................................................. 145
Encoder types .........................................................................58 Relay contacts ........................................................................ 56
Resolution ............................................................................. 105
F
Fan ............................................................................................5
Field control ...........................................................................112

S
Safety Information .....................................................................5
Second motor parameters ....................................................145
Sequencer .............................................................................117
Serial comms lead ..................................................................51
Serial communications port isolation ......................................51
Solutions Module ID codes ...................................................143
Solutions Module slots ..........................................................143
Speed control ........................................................................105
Speed feedback ....................................................................105
Speed range .........................................................................151
Speed reference .....................................................................98
Start ..........................................................................................5
Start up time ..........................................................................151
Status ....................................................................................185
Status Indications ..................................................................185
Stop ...........................................................................................5
Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and
connections outside a building ..........................................50
Surge suppression for analog and bipolar inputs and
outputs ..............................................................................51
Surge suppression for digital and unipolar inputs and
outputs ..............................................................................51
T
Temperature .........................................................................151
Terminal sizes .........................................................................29
Thermal protection ....................................................................5
Thermistor ...............................................................................74
Threshold detectors ..............................................................130
Torque control .......................................................................107
Torque settings .......................................................................31
Trip ........................................................................................177
Trip Indications ......................................................................177
V
Variable maximums ................................................................96
Variable selectors .................................................................130
Vibration ................................................................................151
W
Warnings ...................................................................................5

0476-0000-05

Mentor MP User Guide PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Mentor MP User Guide PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

User Guide

Part Number: 0476-0000-05

3 Mechanical Installation .......................13 7 Running the motor ..............................76

Mentor MP User Guide 3

12 Technical data ....................................146

4 Mentor MP User Guide

1 Safety Information 1.6 Fire protection

1.2 Electrical safety - general warning 1.8 Motor

Mentor MP User Guide 5

2 Product information Table 2-3 575 V current ratings

6 Mentor MP User Guide

2.1.1 Typical short-term overload limits

overload duration (seconds)

2.2 Model number

Figure 2-2 Model number

Mentor product line

Continuous armature current rating (A)

Mentor MP User Guide 7

2.3 Compatible encoders

2.4 Nameplate description

C Tick approval Australia

RoHS compliant Europe

2.4.1 Output current

8 Mentor MP User Guide

2.5 Drive features and options

DC Feedback Automation Fieldbus

FXMP25 connection CT Comms cable

Auxiliary connections Mode /Reset

FXMP25 Field regulator

Figure 2-5 Drive features and options for size 2

Slot 2 Solutions Modules

Feedback Automation Fieldbus

Serial port connector

and field STO RED C HARGE

Mentor MP User Guide 9

2.5.1 Options available for Mentor MP

Isolated I/O to NAMUR NE37 specifications

Additional I/O conforming to IEC 61131-2 120 Vac

Additional I/O with overvoltage protection up to 48 V

10 Mentor MP User Guide

Table 2-6 Solutions Module identification

SM-PROFIBUS DP- Profibus option

Table 2-7 Keypad identification

LED keypad option

LCD keypad option

Table 2-8 Serial comms lead

Table 2-9 External field control

information, please see the FXMP25 User Guide.

Mentor MP User Guide 11

2.6 Items supplied with the drive

UL warning label for

Terminal cover grommets

Terminal shroud base

Mounting feet bracket

12 Mentor MP User Guide

3 Mechanical Installation 3.2 Planning the installation

Follow the instructions 3.2.1 Access

Mentor MP User Guide 13

below bottom of enclosure)

Bottom of fire enclosure

3.3 Terminal cover removal

3.3.1 Removing the terminal covers

14 Mentor MP User Guide